Welcome to PhiloLogic  
   home |  the ARTFL project |  download |  documentation |  sample databases |   
Smith, Seba, 1792-1868 [1854], Way down east, or, Portraitures of Yankee life (J. C. Derby, New York) [word count] [eaf689T].
To look up a word in a dictionary, select the word with your mouse and press 'd' on your keyboard.

Previous section

Next section

Main text

-- --

p689-014 CHAPTER I. JOHN WADLEIGH'S TRIAL.

The Early Jurisprudence of New England, including a Sketch of
John Wadleigh's Trial before Squire Winslow, for Sleeping in
Meeting on the Lord's Day; with a brief Report of Lawyer
Chandler's memorable Speech on the occasion.

[figure description] Page 005.[end figure description]

The pilgrim fathers of New England, and their
children of the first and second generations, are justly
renowned for their grave character, their moral
uprightness, which sometimes was rather more than
perpendicular, and the vigilant circumspection which
each one exercised over his neighbor as well as himself.
It is true that Connecticut, from an industrious
promulgation of her “Blue Laws,” has acquired more
fame on this score than other portions of the “universal
Yankee nation,” but this negative testimony

-- 006 --

[figure description] Page 006.[end figure description]

against the rest of New England ought not to be
allowed too much weight, for wherever the light of
history does gleam upon portions further “Down East,”
it shows a people not a whit behind Connecticut in
their resolute enforcement of all the decencies of life,
and their stern and watchful regard for the well-being
of society. The justice of this remark will sufficiently
appear by a few brief quotations from their
judicial records.

In the early court records of New Hampshire, in
the year 1655, may be found the following entry:

“The Grand Jury do present the wife of Mathew
Giles, for swearing and reviling the constable when he
came for the rates, and likewise railing on the
prudenshall men and their wives. Sentenced to be
whipped seven stripes, or to be redeemed with forty
shillings, and to be bound to her good behavior.”

Another entry upon the records the same year is as
follows:

“The Grand Jury do present Jane Canny, the wife
of Thomas Canny, for beating her son-in-law, Jeremy
Tibbetts, and his wife; and likewise for striking her
husband in a canoe, and giving him reviling speeches.
Admonished by the court, and to pay two shillings
and sixpence.”

-- 007 --

[figure description] Page 007.[end figure description]

If it is consistent with rational philosophy to draw
an inference from two facts, we might here consider
it proved, that the pilgrim ladies of 1655 had considerable
human nature in them. And from the following
record the same year, it would appear also that there
were some of the male gender among them at that
day, who still exhibited a little of the old Adam.

“Philip Edgerly, for giving out reproachful
speeches against the worshipful Captain Weggen, is
sentenced by the court to make a public acknowledgement
three several days; the first day in the head of
the train band; the other two days are to be the most
public meeting days in Dover, when Oyster River
people shall be there present; which is to be done
within four months after this present day. And in
case he doth not perform as aforesaid, he is to be
whipped, not exceeding ten stripes, and to be fined
five pounds to the county.”

The reader cannot but notice in this case, last cited,
with what stern purpose and judicial acumen the
severity of the penalty is made to correspond with the
enormity of the offence. The crime, it will be seen,
was an aggravated one. The gentleman against whom
the reproachful speeches were uttered was a Captain;
and not only a Captain, but a Worshipful Captain.

-- 008 --

[figure description] Page 008.[end figure description]

Whether Captain Weggen was the commanding officer
of the train band, or not, does not appear; but there
was an appropriate fitness in requiring, that the crime
of uttering reproachful speeches against any Captain,
should be publicly acknowledged at the head of the
train band. There the culprit would have to face all
the officers, from the captain down to the corporal, and
all the soldiers, from the top to the bottom of the company,
could point the finger of scorn at him.

But as the injured party in this case was a worshipful
captain, it was very proper that a penalty of a
higher grade should be affixed to the sentence. Hence
the withering exposure of the offender to make public
acknowledgments on two several occasions, “to be
the most public meeting days in Dover, when Oyster
River people shall be there present.

Whatever may be said at the present day, as to the
temperance reformation being of modern origin, it
may be affirmed without hazard that the good people
of New England two hundred years ago, were decided
and strenuous advocates of temperance. They were
not tee-totallers; they did not prohibit the use of those
“creature comforts” altogether; but if any one among
them proved to be a wine-bibber, or abused his
privilege of drinking, woe be to him, he had to feel the

-- 009 --

[figure description] Page 009.[end figure description]

force of the law and good government. Witness the
following court record in New Hampshire, in 1657:

“Thomas Crawlie and Mathew Layn, presented for
drinking fourteen pints of wine at one time. Fined
three shillings and fourpence, and two fees and
sixpence.”

The good people of the province of Maine in those
early days have also left proof, that they were on the
side of industrious and good habits and wholesome
instruction. Their Grand Juries present as follows:

“We present Charles Potum, for living an idle,
lazy life, following no settled employment. Major
Bryant Pembleton joined with the Selectmen of Cape
Porpus to dispose of Potum according to law, and to
put him under family government.”

So it seems there were some men, even in the early
days of the Pilgrims, who enjoyed that more prevalent
luxury of modern times, living under family
government.

Again say the Grand Jury, “We present the
Selectmen of the town of Kittery, for not taking care
that their children and youth be taught their catechism
and education according to law.”

They took good care in those good old times, that
the dealings between man and man should be on

-- 010 --

[figure description] Page 010.[end figure description]

equitable and fair principles, and without extortion.
In 1640, the Grand Jury say—

“Imprimis, we do present Mr. John Winter, of
Richmond's Island, for extortion; for that Thomas
Wise, of Casco, hath declared upon his oath that he
paid unto Mr. John Winter a noble (six shillings and
eightpence), for a gallon of aqua vitæ, about two
months since; and further, he declareth that the said
Winter bought of Mr. George Luxton, when he was
last in Casco Bay, a hogshead of aqua vitæ for seven
pounds sterling.”

The punishment inflicted on Mr. John Winter, for
extorting from his customer two hundred per cent.
profit on his merchandise, is not stated; but if one
Thomas Warnerton, who flourished in the neighborhood
at that time, had any agency in fixing the
penalty, it probably went rather hard with him; for
this latter gentleman must have had a special interest
in keeping the price of the article down, inasmuch as
it is related of him, that in taking leave of a friend,
who was departing for England, “he drank to him a
pint of kill-devil, alias rum, at a draught.”

Juliana Cloyse, wife to John Cloyse, was “presented
for a talebearer from house to house, setting
differences between neighbors.” It was the

-- 011 --

[figure description] Page 011.[end figure description]

misfortune of Juliana Cloyse that she lived at too early
an age of the world. Had her lot been cast in this
day and generation, she would probably have met
with no such trouble.

Thomas Tailor was presented “for abusing Captain
F. Raynes, being in authority, for thee-ing and thouing
of him, and many other abusive speeches.”

At a town meeting in Portsmouth, March 12, 1672,
“voted, that if any shall smoke tobacco in the meeting-house
at any public meeting, he shall pay a fine
of five shillings, for the benefit of the town.”

In a previous year, September 25th, at a town
meeting, it was “ordered that a cage be made, or
some other means be invented by the Selectmen, to
punish such as sleep
or take tobacco on the Lord's
day, at meeting, in the time of the public exercise.”

It appears from this record that the town reposed
unlimited confidence in the inventive powers of the
Selectmen; and it appears also that the energetic
order of the town, passed on this occasion, was a few
years afterwards successfully carried into practical
operation. The following is preserved on the town
records, July 24, 1771.

“The Selectmen agree with John Pickering to build
a cage twelve feet square, with stocks within it, and a

-- 012 --

[figure description] Page 012.[end figure description]

pillory on the top, a convenient space from the west
end of the meeting-house.

Thus far we have confined ourselves to official
records; but some of the unofficial and unwritten
records of those days are of equal importance to be
transmitted to posterity, one of which it is our present
purpose to endeavor to rescue from oblivion.

The affair of the cage, with stocks inside, and a pillory
on the top, served to wake up the congregation
for a while, so that no one was caught napping or
chewing tobacco in the meeting-house during the
public exercises for several Sabbaths after this invention
of the Selectmen became a “fixed fact” at the
west end of the meeting-house. As the novelty of the
thing wore off, however, the terror in some degree
seemed to depart with it. There was a visible carelessness
on the part of several old offenders, who were
observed to relax their attention to the services, wearing
very sleepy looks, sometimes yawning, and occasionally
putting themselves into unseemly positions,
concealing their faces, so that the searching scrutiny
of old Deacon Winslow himself could not decide for
certainty whether they were asleep or not.

Among these delinquents, John Wadleigh seemed
to be the most conspicuous, often leaning his head so

-- 013 --

[figure description] Page 013.[end figure description]

as to hide his eyes during half sermon time. He was
also gruff and stubborn when questioned on the subject.
So marked was the periodical reeling of his head,
that Deacon Winslow began to watch him as narrowly
as a cat would a mouse. Not that the Deacon
neglected the sermon; he always took care of that
matter, and for his own edification, as well as an example
to the congregation, he steadily kept one eye
on the minister, while the other was on John Wadleigh.
There began to be sundry shrugs of the shoulders
among the knowing ones of the congregation, and
remarks were occasionally dropt, such as “Don't you
believe John Wadleigh was asleep during half the
sermon yesterday?” with the reply, “Why yes, I
know he was; but he must look out, or he'll buy the
rabbit, for Deacon Winslow keeps his eye upon him,
and if he don't make an example of him before long,
I won't guess again.”

It was whispered by some, who were out of the pale
of the church, that the Deacon's watchful powers with
regard to Wadleigh were a little more acute in consequence
of Wadleigh's having over-reached him
somewhat in the sale of a cow, at which the Deacon,
who prided himself on his sound judgment, it was
alleged, always felt a little mortified. The Deacon

-- 014 --

[figure description] Page 014.[end figure description]

however was a very upright specimen of the old
puritan race, and it is not probable his sense of justice
and right was much warped. True, he manifested considerable
zeal in looking after the delinquencies of
John Wadleigh, but his “zeal was according to knowledge;”
he knew Wadleigh to be a disregarder of the
Sabbath, sleepy-headed and profane, and he did therefore
feel a zealous and charitable desire to administer
to him a little wholesome reproof, provided it could
be done in a just, lawful, and Christian manner.

He even felt it excusable, to accomplish so good a
purpose, to enter into a pious fraud with Parson
Moody. He had observed that though Wadleigh
generally appeared to be asleep at the close of the
sermon, yet when the congregation immediately rose
up to prayers, he always managed some how or other
to be up with them, but with a flushed face and
guilty countenance. The Deacon believed, and it
was the general opinion, that Wadleigh was asleep
on these occasions, and that when the congregation
began to rise, it always awoke him. He therefore
suggested to Parson Moody, that on the next Sabbath,
at the close of the sermon, instead of immediately
commencing his prayers, he should sit quietly down
three or four minutes, as though he were a little

-- 015 --

[figure description] Page 015.[end figure description]

fatigued, or had some notes to look over, and see
whether Wadleigh would not continue to sleep on,
while the attention of every one awake would of
course be attracted to the Parson. This little plan
was tried, but without any very satisfactory result.
It added something to the presumptive testimony in
the case, but nothing clear and positive. Wadleigh
held his head down about half a minute after the
monotonous tones of the preacher's voice had ceased
to fall upon his ear, when he started suddenly, rose to
his feet, looked round a moment confusedly, and sat
down again.

At last, however, repeated complaints having been
made to the Grand Jury, they saw fit to “present
John Wadleigh for a common sleeper on the Lord's
day, at the publique meeting,” a thing which Deacon
Winslow earnestly declared they ought to have done
weeks before they did.

The Deacon was in fact the most important personage
in town, being not only the first officer in the
church, but also a civil magistrate, before whom most
of the important causes in the place were tried. Of
course the offender Wadleigh, when the Grand Jury
had once caught him in their net, had a pretty fair
chance of having justice meted out to him. The

-- 016 --

[figure description] Page 016.[end figure description]

jury met early on Monday morning, and the first
business before them was the case of Wadleigh,
against whom a fresh lot of complaints had come in.
They were not long in finding a bill against him as
above-mentioned, and a warrant was put into the
hands of Bill Cleaves, the constable, to hunt Wadleigh
up, and take him before Deacon 'Squire Winslow,
and summon in the witnesses for his trial.

Bill Cleaves tipped his hat to the 'Squire as he
went by upon his official duties, and gave him to
understand what was going on. Whereupon 'Squire
Winslow proceeded to put his house in court-order,
having the floor of his large open hall, where he generally
held his courts, swept and newly sanded, and
things all put to rights. One o'clock was the hour
appointed for the trial, for as the neighborhood all
dined at twelve, the 'Squire said that would give
them an opportunity to go to the work with a full
stomach and at their leisure.

Accordingly, at one o'clock the parties began to
assemble in the hall. 'Squire Winslow, who believed
that a pipe after dinner was a good settler to the
stomach, and always practised accordingly, came in
with a pipe in his mouth, his spectacles resting on the
top of his forehead, and taking a comfortable position

-- 017 --

[figure description] Page 017.[end figure description]

in his chair, placed his feet, where he had a perfect
right to place them, being in a land of Liberty, and
in his own house, upon the top of the table. The
prisoner, who had been found asleep in his chair at
his own dinner table, was taken away suddenly, like
Cincinnatus or Putnam from the plough, and brought
into court, just as he was, in his shirt sleeves, and
placed at the other end of the table, opposite the feet
of Gamaliel. Lawyer Chandler, who was always on
hand to help the 'Squire along in all knotty cases,
appeared with book in hand ready to lay down the
law and testimony. Lawyer Stebbins was allowed
by the courtesy of the court to take his seat by the
side of the prisoner to see that he had fair play shown
him. Bill Cleaves, the constable, took his seat a
little behind the 'Squire, crossed his legs, and fell to
smoking a cigar with great composure.

'Squire Winslow's faithful bull dog, Jowler, whose
duty it was to keep order in the house, took his
watchful station under the table, directly under his
master's feet, ready for any emergency. While the
constable's dog, Trip, who had done his part in running
down the game and getting it housed, felt that
his duties were over, and caring but little for the
court scene, he had stretched himself upon the floor,

-- 018 --

[figure description] Page 018.[end figure description]

and was as sound asleep as ever John Wadleigh was
in church. The other witnesses and spectators present
were too numerous to mention.

The indictment was read, and the prisoner called
upon to answer, who, at the suggestion of Lawyer
Stebbins, replied, “Not guilty;” at which Deacon
'Squire Winslow shook his head, and remarked in a
low tone, “We shall see about that.”

The first point made by Lawyer Chandler, was,
that the prisoner should prove his innocence; and he
argued the point with much force and eloquence. It
was no easy matter to prove that a man was actually
asleep, but it was easy enough for a man to prove
that he was awake. Therefore, from the nature of
the case, the burden of the proof ought to lay upon
the prisoner. “Now, we charge that on sundry occasions,
Wadleigh was asleep in church, against the
laws of the town and the well-being of society.
Now, if he was not so asleep, let him prove his alibi.
A criminal always has a right to an alibi if he can
prove it. May it please your honor, I take that
ground,” said Chandler, “and there I stick; I call
upon the prisoner to prove his alibi.

Lawyer Stebbins stoutly contended that the alibi
could not apply in this case. He had never heard

-- 019 --

[figure description] Page 019.[end figure description]

nor read of its being used in any case except murder.
And the wisdom of the court finally overruled that it
belonged to the prosecutors to prove the sleep.

“Well, if that be the case,” said Chandler, “I
move, your honor, that Solomon Young be sworn.
I had no idea the burden of proof was going to lay
on us, but still I've come prepared for it.”

Solomon Young was sworn, and took the stand.

Question by Chandler.—Do you know that John
Wadleigh sleeps in meeting?

Witness.—I guess taint no secret; I don't know
anybody but what does know it.

Chandler.—Well, do you know it? That's the
question.

Stebbins objected to the question. It was a leading
question, and they had no right to put leading
questions to the witness.

Chandler.—Well, then, let the court put the
questions.

Justice Winslow.— What do you know about
John Wadleigh's sleeping in meeting?

Witness.—I know all about it; taint no secret,
I guess.

Justice.—Then tell us all about it; that's just
what we want to know.

-- 020 --

[figure description] Page 020.[end figure description]

Witness (scratching his head).—Well, the long
and short of it is, John Wadleigh is a hard worken
man. That is, he works mighty hard doing nothing;
and that's the hardest work there is done. It'll make
a feller sleepy quicker than poppy leaves. So it
stands to reason that Wadleigh would naterally be a
very sleepy sort of a person. Well, Parson Moody's
sarmons are sometimes naterally pretty long, and the
weather is sometimes naterally considerable warm,
and the sarmons is some times rather heavy-like.

“Stop, stop,” said 'Squire Winslow, “no reflections
upon Parson Moody; that is not what you were
called here for.”

Witness.—I don't cast no reflections on Parson
Moody. I was only telling what I know about John
Wadleigh's sleeping in meeting; and it's my opinion,
especially in warm weather, that sarmons that are
heavy-like and an hour long naterally have a
tendency—

“Stop, stop, I say,” said 'Squire Winslow, “if you
repeat any of these reflections on Parson Moody again,
I'll commit you to the cage for contempt of court.”

Witness.—I don't cast no reflections on Parson
Moody. I was only telling what I knew about John
Wadleigh's sleeping in meeting.

-- 021 --

[figure description] Page 021.[end figure description]

'Squire Winslow.—Well, go on, and tell us all
about that; you want called here to testify about
Parson Moody.

Witness.—That's what I'm trying to do, if you
wouldn't keep putting me out. And its my opinion
in warm weather, folks is considerable apt to sleep in
meeting; especially when the sarmon—I mean
especially when they get pretty tired. I know I find
it pretty hard work to get by seventhly and eighthly
in the sarmon myself; but if I once get by there, I
generally get into a kind of waking train again, and
make out to weather it. But it isn't so with Wadleigh;
I've generally noticed if he begins to gape at
seventhly and eighthly, its a gone goose with him
before he gets through tenthly, and he has to look out
for another prop to his head somewhere, for his neck
isn't stiff enough to hold it up. And from tenthly up
to sixteenthly he's dead as a door nail; till the Amen
brings the people up to prayers, and then Wadleigh
comes up with a jerk, jest like opening a jack-knife.

Stebbins, cross-examining the witness.—Mr. Young,
how do you know that Wadleigh is asleep on these
occasions you speak of?

Witness.—Cause he is; everybody says he is.”

Stebbins.—That won't do; we don't want you to

-- 022 --

[figure description] Page 022.[end figure description]

tell us what everybody says. You must tell how
you know he is asleep?

Witness.—Well, cause he begins to gape at seventhly
and eighthly, and props his head up at tenthly,
and don't stir again till the Amen.

Stebbins.—Well how do you know he is asleep at
that time?

Witness.—Cause when I see him settle down in
that kind of way, and cover his face up so I can't see
his eyes, I know he's asleep.

Stebbins.—That's no proof at all; the witness only
knows he was asleep because he couldn't see his eyes.

Chandler.—Well, this witness has proved that the
prisoner exhibited all the outward signs of sleep; now
I will introduce one to show that he also exhibited
internal evidence of being asleep. Your honor must
know that it is a law in physics and metaphysics, and
the universal science of medicine, that being deprived
of one sense sharpens the other senses in a most wonderful
degree. Now I move your honor that my
blind friend here behind me, Jonathan Staples, be
sworn.

Jonathan Staples was sworn accordingly.

Chandler.—Now, Staples, do you know that John
Wadleigh sleeps in meeting?

-- 023 --

[figure description] Page 023.[end figure description]

Staples.—Yes, I du.

Chandler.—Do you know it?

Staples.—Yes, I know it.

Squire Winslow.—How do you know it?

Staples.—Why, don't I hear him sleep every Sabbath?

Chandler.—What is the state of your hearing?

Staples.—It is as sharp as a needle with two pints.

Chandler.—Can you always tell by a person's
breathing, whether he is asleep or awake?

Staples.—Jest as easy as I can tell whether I'm
asleep or awake myself.

Chandler.—Tell us where you sit in meeting, and
how you know Wadleigh is asleep.

Staples.—Well, I goes to meeting of a Sabbath,
and commonly takes my seat in the seventh seat at
the west end of the meeting-house. And John Wadleigh
he sets in the sixth seat, and that brings him
almost right afore me. All the first part of the exercises
he has a waking breath, till it gets along into
the sarmon, say about seventhly or eighthly, and then
he begins to have a sleepy breath; and when it gets
along into tenthly, he commonly goes it like a porpus.

Squire Winslow.—Do you know him to be asleep
at these times?

-- 024 --

[figure description] Page 024.[end figure description]

Staples.—I guess I du; I dont see how I could help
it. I know him to be asleep jest as well as I know
I'm awake.

Squire Winslow.—Well, that's sufficient, unless
Mr. Stebbins wishes to ask any questions.

Stebbins.—Now, Staples, do you pretend to say that
you can tell John Wadleigh's breath from the breath
of any other person in meeting?

Staples.—Sartainly I do. Aint everybody's breath
pitched on a different key? There's as much difference
in breathing as there is in speaking.

Chandler.—I'm willing, your honor, to rest the
cause here. I have a plenty more witnesses as good
as these, but I consider the case so clearly proved that
it is hardly necessary to bring on any more unless my
friend Stebbins should offer anything on the other
side which may need to be answered.

Stebbins.—I dont consider it necessary, may it please
your honor, for me to say a single word. I dont consider
that there has been the least particle of evidence
offered here yet, to prove that John Wadleigh ever
slept a wink in meeting in all his life. And surely
your honor wont convict this man without any proof
at all against him. Look at the evidence, sir; what
does it amount to? One man has seen him lean his

-- 025 --

[figure description] Page 025.[end figure description]

head, and another has heard him breathe; and that
is the sum total. Why, sir, if you convict a man on
such evidence as this, no man is safe. Every man, is
liable to lean his head and to breathe in meeting.
And if that is to be considered evidence of sleep, I
repeat, who is safe? No, sir; as I said before, I dont
consider it necessary for me to say one word on the
subject, for there has been no evidence offered to
prove the offence charged.

Here Lawyer Chandler rose with fire in his eyes
and thunder on his tongue.

May it please your honor, said he, I am astonished,
I am amazed at the hardihood and effrontery of my
learned friend, the counsel on the opposite side of this
cause. Why, sir, if there ever was a case made out
in any court under heaven, by clear, positive, and
irresistible evidence, it is this. Sir, I say, sir, evidence
as clear as sunshine and irresistible as thunder. Yes,
sir, as irresistible as thunder. First, sir, an unimpeachable
witness swears to you, that he sees the culprit
Wadleigh, the prisoner at the bar, gaping in meeting
and exhibiting all the signs of going to sleep;
then he sees him flatting away and muzzling about to
find a prop for his head. Now, sir, men don't want a
prop for their heads when they are awake. It's only

-- 026 --

[figure description] Page 026.[end figure description]

when they are asleep they want a prop for their heads,
sir. Well, now sir, follow the prisoner along a little
further, and what do we find, sir? Do we find him
wide awake, sir, and attending to the services as a
Christian and as a man ought to do? No, sir. We
find him from tenthly up to sixteenthly, as dead as a
door nail. Them's the witnesses' words, sir, as dead
as a door nail. What next, sir? Why, then the witness
swears to you, that when the congregation rise
up to prayers, Wadleigh comes up with a jerk, jest
like opening a jack-knife. Them's the witnesses' very
words, sir. Now, sir, persons that's awake don't get
up in meeting in that kind of style. It's only them
that's waked up out of a sudden sleep, that comes up
with a jerk, like the opening of a jack-knife, sir.
What stronger proof do we need, or rather what
stronger proof could we have, of all the outward signs
of sleep, than we have from this witness? With regard
to the internal evidence of sleep, another witness
swears to you that he hears Wadleigh asleep every
Sabbath; that he can tell when a person is asleep
or awake by his breathing, as easily as he can tell
whether he's asleep or awake himself. This witness
swears to you that during the first part of the
exercises Wadleigh has a waking breath, and when

-- 027 --

[figure description] Page 027.[end figure description]

the minister gets along to seventhly and eighthly he
begins to have a very sleepy breath. Well, sir, when
the minister gets to tenthly, the witness swears to you
that Wadleigh commonly goes it like a porpus. Yes,
sir, so sound asleep, that's the inference, so sound
asleep, that he goes it like a porpus.

Sir, I will not say another word. I will not waste
words upon a case so strong, so clear, and so perfectly
made out. If this evidence doesn't prove the culprit
Wadleigh to be a common sleeper in meetin on the
Lord's day, then there is no dependence to be placed
in human testimony. Sir, I have done. Whether
this man is to be convicted or not, I clear my skirts;
and when posterity shall see the account of this trial,
should the culprit go clear, they may cry out “judgment
has fled to brutish beasts and men have lost
their reason;” but they shall not say Chandler did
not do his duty.

The effect of this speech on the court and audience
was tremendous. It was some minutes before a word
was spoken, or any person moved. All eyes still seemed
to be rivetted upon Squire Chandler. At last
Squire Winslow spoke.

This is a very clear case, said he; there can be no
question of the prisoner's guilt; and he is sentenced

-- 028 --

[figure description] Page 028.[end figure description]

to be confined in the cage four hours, and in the stocks
one hour. Constable Cleaves will take charge of the
prisoner, and see the sentence properly executed.

-- 029 --

p689-038 CHAPTER II. YANKEE CHRISTMAS.

The autumnal holiday peculiar to New England is Thanksgiving,
while in the middle and southern States the great domestic festival
is more generally at Christmas or New Year's. Whether the
following historical sketch, therefore, applies with more propriety
to Christmas or Thanksgiving, must depend in some degree upon
the latitude in which Mr. Solomon Briggs resides.

[figure description] Page 029.[end figure description]

Next Thursday is Christmas,” said Mrs. Briggs,
as she came bustling out of the kitchen into the long
dining-room, and took her seat at the breakfast table,
where her husband, Mr. Solomon Briggs, and all the
children, being ten in number, were seated before
her. If Mrs. Briggs was the last at the table, the
circumstance must not be set down as an index to
her character, for she was a restless, stirring body,
and was never the last anywhere, without good
cause. From childhood she had been taught to
believe that the old adage, “the eye of the master
does more work than both his hands,” applied
equally well to the mistress. Accordingly, she was

-- 030 --

[figure description] Page 030.[end figure description]

in all parts of the house at once, not only working
with her own hands, but overseeing everything that
was done by others. Indeed, now that we have said
thus much in favor of Mrs. Briggs, a due regard to
impartial justice requires us to add, that Mr. Briggs
himself, though a very quiet sort of a man, and not
of so restless and mercurial a temperament as his
wife, could hardly be said to be less industrious.
His guiding motto through life had been—


“He that by the plough would thrive,
Himself must either hold or drive.”
And most literally had he been governed by the
precept. He was, in short, an industrious, thriving
New England farmer. His exact location it is not
our purpose here to disclose. We give our fair
readers, and unfair, if we have any, the whole range
of New England, from the shore of Connecticut to
the Green Mountains, and from Mount Hope to
Moosehead Lake, to trace him out. But we shall
not point to the spot, lest Mr. Solomon Briggs, seeing
his own likeness brought home to his own door,
might think us impertinent for meddling with family
affairs.

To go back to our starting point—Mrs. Briggs,
who had stopped in the kitchen till the last moment,

-- 031 --

[figure description] Page 031.[end figure description]

in order to see the last dish properly prepared for
breakfast, came herself at last to the table.

“Next Thursday is Christmas,” said she, “and
nothing done yet to prepare for it. I do wish we
could ever have things in any sort of season.”

At the mention of Christmas the children's eyes
all brightened, from James, the eldest, who was
twenty-one, down to Mary, who was but two years
old, and who, of course, knew nothing about Christmas,
but looked smiling and bright because all the
rest did.

Mr. Briggs, however, who considered the last
remark as having a little bearing upon himself,
replied—“That he should think three days was time
enough to get a Christmas dinner or a Christmas
supper good enough for any common sort of folks.”

“It would be time enough to get it,” said Mrs.
Briggs, “if we had anything to get it with; but we
haven't a mite of flour in the house, nor no meat for
the mince pies, and there aint no poultry killed yet,
neither!”

“Well, well, mother,” said Mr. Briggs, very moderately,
and with a half smile, “just be patient a
little, and you shall have as much Christmas as you
want. There's a bushel of as good wheat as ever was

-- 032 --

[figure description] Page 032.[end figure description]

ground, I put into a bag on Saturday; James can
take a horse and carry it to mill this morning, and
in two hours you may have a bushel of good flour.
You've got butter enough and lard enough in the
house, and if you want any plums or raisins, or any
such sort of things, James may call at Haskall's
store, as he comes home from mill, and get what
you want. Then Mr. Butterfield is going to kill a
beef critter this morning, and I'm going to have a
quarter, so that before noon you can have a hundred
weight of beef to make your mince pies of, and if
that aint enough, I'll send to Mr. Butterfield's for
another quarter. And then there is five heaping
cart loads of large yellow punkins in the barn, and
there is five cows that give a good mess of milk;
and you've got spices and ginger, and molasses, and
sugar enough in the house, so I don't see as there
need be any difficulty but what we might have
punkin pies enough for all hands. And as for the
poultry, it'll be time enough to kill that to-morrow
morning; and if two turkeys aint enough, I'll kill
four, besides a bushel basket full of chickens. So
now go on with your birds'-egging, and make your
Christmas as fast as you please, and as much of it.”

When this speech was ended, the children clapped

-- 033 --

[figure description] Page 033.[end figure description]

their hands and laughed, and said, “never fear
father—he always brings it out right at last.”

From that hour forth, for three days, there was
unusual hurry and bustle throughout the house of
Solomon Briggs. In the kitchen particularly there
was constant and great commotion. The oven was
hot from morning till night, and almost from night
till morning. There was baking of pound cake, and
plum cake, and sponge cake, and Christmas cake,
and New Year's cake, and all sorts of cake that
could be found in the cook book. Then there
were ovens full of mince pies, and apple pies, and
custard pies, and all sorts of pies. The greatest
display of pies, however, was of the pumpkin tribe.
There were “punkin pies” baked on large platters for
Christmas dinner, and others on large plates for
breakfast and supper a month afterwards; and others
still, in saucers, for each of the small children. In
the next place, there was a pair of plum puddings,
baked in the largest sized earthen pots, and Indian
puddings and custard puddings to match. And then
the roastings that were shown up on the morning of
Christmas were in excellent keeping with the rest of
the preparations. Besides a fine sirloin of beef, two
fat turkeys were roasted, two geese, and a half a

-- 034 --

[figure description] Page 034.[end figure description]

dozen chickens. And then another half dozen of
chickens were made into an enormous chicken pie,
and baked in a milk pan.

A query may arise, perhaps, in the mind of the
reader, why such a profusion of food should be
cooked up at once for a single family, and that
family, too, not unreasonably large, though respectable
in number, for it did not count over sixteen, including
domestics, hired help and all. This is a very
natural error for the reader to fall into, but it is an
error nevertheless. This array of food was not prepared
for a single family; but for a numerous
company, to be made up from many families in the
neighborhood. The truth was, Mr. Briggs was well
to do in the world, a circumstance owing to his long
course of patient industry and economical habits.
Several of his children were now nearly men and
women grown, full of life and fond of fun, as most
young folks are. Mrs. Briggs also was very fond of
society, and a little vain of her smart family of children,
as well as of her good cooking. From these
premises, a gathering of several of the neighbors at
Mr. Briggs's house, to eat a Christmas dinner, and a
still larger company of young folks towards night, to
spend a Christmas evening would not be a very

-- 035 --

[figure description] Page 035.[end figure description]

unnatural consequence. Such was the consequence,
as we shall presently see.

We shall not stop to give a particular account of
the dinner, as that was a transaction performed in the
daytime, openly and above-board, and could be seen
and understood by everybody; but the evening
company, and the supper, and the frolic, as they
were hid from the world by the darkness of the night,
need more elucidation. We must not dismiss the
dinner, however, without remarking that it fullfilled
every expectation, and gave entire satisfaction to all
parties. A table of extra length was spread in the
long dining hall, which was graced by a goodly circle
of elderly people, besides many of the middle-aged
and the young. And when we state that the loin of
beef was reduced to a skeleton; that two turkeys, one
goose, and five chickens, vanished in the twinkling of
a case-knife; that the large milk pan, containing the
chicken-pie, was explored and cleared to the very
bottom; and that three or four large puddings and a
couple of acres of “punkin pie” were among the
things lost in the dessert, we think it has been sufficiently
shown that due respect was paid to Mrs.
Briggs's dinner, and that her culinary skill should not
be called in question.

-- 036 --

[figure description] Page 036.[end figure description]

“Now, James, who's coming here to-night?” said
Susan, the eldest daughter, a bright, blue-eyed
girl of eighteen. “Who have you asked? Jest
name 'em over, will you?”

“Oh, I can't name 'em over,” said James; “jest
wait an hour or two and you'll see for yourself. I've
asked pretty much all the young folks within a mile
or two; as much as twenty of 'em I guess.”

“Well, have you asked Betsy Harlow?” said Susan.

“Yes, and Ivory too, if that's what you want to
know,” said James.

“Nobody said anything about Ivory,” said Susan,
as the color came to her cheek, and she turned to go
out of the room.

“Here, Suky, come back here,” said James, “I've
got something to tell you.”

“What is it?” said Susan, turning round at the
door, and waiting.

“They say Ivory is waiting on Harriet Gibbs;
what do you think of that?” said James.

“I don't believe a word of it,” said Susan, coloring
still more deeply.

“Well, Harriet will be here this evening,” said
James “and then may be you can judge for yourself.”

“Is her brother coming with her?” said Susan.

-- 037 --

[figure description] Page 037.[end figure description]

“George is coming,” said James, “but whether
she will come with him, or with Ivory Harlow,
remains to be seen.”

That Christmas was rather a cold day, and as night
approached, it grew still colder.

“Pile on more wood,” said Mr. Briggs, “get your
rooms warm, so there shan't be no shiverin' or
huddling about the fire this evening.”

The boys were never more ready to start promptly
at their father's bidding than they were on this occasion.
The large fire-place in the long dining-room
was piled full of round sticks of heavy wood almost
up to the mantel; and the fires in the “fore room”
and in the end room were renewed with equal bounty.
By early candle-light, the company began to drop in
one after another, and by twos and threes in pretty
frequent succession. There were stout boys in round
jackets, and stouter boys in long-tailed coats, and
rosy-cheeked girls in shawls, and blankets, and
cloaks, and muffs, and tippets. Some of the middle-aged
and elderly people who had remained to pass
the evening, sat in the “fore room” with Mr. and
Mrs. Briggs, while the young folks were huddled into
the end room, till the supper table should be spread
in the long dining-hall.

-- 038 --

[figure description] Page 038.[end figure description]

“There's Ivory Harlow's bells,” said James, as a
sleigh came with a merry gingle up to the door; and
instantly the windows were crowded with heads looking
out to see who had come with him. Ivory lived
about a mile and a half distant and was the only one
who came with a sleigh that evening, as most of the
others lived considerably nearer.

“Why, there's four of 'em, as true as I live,” said
Susan, as they crossed the stream of candle light,
that poured from the windows and spread across the
door yard. One of the younger boys had already
opened the door, and in a moment more the new
comers were ushered into the room, viz: Ivory Harlow
and his sister Betsy, and Harriet Gibbs, and a
strange gentleman, whom Ivory introduced to the
company as Mr. Stephen Long, the gentleman who
was engaged to keep the district school that winter.
And then he turned and whispered to James, and
told him that the master had arrived at their house
that afternoon, as he was to begin the school the next
day, so he thought he would bring him with him.

“That's jest right,” said James, “I'm glad you
did;” though at the same time his heart belied his
words, for he felt afraid it would spoil half the fun of
the evening. The boys and girls all at once put on

-- 039 --

[figure description] Page 039.[end figure description]

long and sober faces, and sat and stood round the
room as quiet as though they had been at a funeral.
Presently Susan whispered to James and told him he
ought to take the master into the “fore room,” and
introduce him to father and mother and the rest of
the folks. “And I'd leave him there, if I was you,”
she added in a very suppressed whisper, lest she
should be overheard.

James at once followed the suggestion of Susan,
and took Mr. Stephen Long into the other room and
introduced him to Mr. and Mrs. Briggs and the rest
of the company, and a chair was of course set for
Mr. Long, and he of course sat down in it and began
to talk about the weather and other subjects of like
interest, while James retreated back into the end
room. The moment the master had left the room the
boys and girls all began to breathe more freely, and
to bustle about, and talk and laugh as merry as
crickets. Not a few regrets were thrown out from
one and another, that the school-master had been
brought there to spend the evening, and some of
them thought “Ive Harlow ought to a-known better,
for he might know it would spoil half their play.”
But it seems they had not rightly estimated Mr.
Stephen Long's social and youthful qualities, who,

-- 040 --

[figure description] Page 040.[end figure description]

although two or three and twenty years old, was
almost as much of a boy as any in the room. He
had not been gone more than fifteen minutes before
he came back into the room with the young folks
again, much to the dismay of the whole company.

A cloud immediately settled upon their faces; all
were whist as mice, and sober as deacons, till Mr.
Stephen Long came across the room with an exceedingly
droll expression of merriment upon his face,
and gave James a hearty slap on the back, saying at
the same time:

“Well, now, what's the order of the day here
to-night? Dance, or forfeits, or blind man's bluff?
I'm for improving the time.”

At once the whole company burst out into a loud
laugh, and several of the juniors, feeling such a burden
suddenly removed from them, fell to pounding each
other's shoulders, probably to prevent them in their
lightness from flying of the handle.

“I guess we'll have something or other a going bime
by,” said James; “whatever the company likes best;
but I guess we'll have supper first, for that's about
ready.”

The words were but just uttered when the call for
supper was given, and the fore-room, and the end

-- 041 --

[figure description] Page 041.[end figure description]

room poured out their respective companies into
the long dining-hall. It was soon perceived that, long
as the table was, they could not all be seated at once,
and there began to be some canvassing to determine
who should wait. The elderly people must of course
sit down, and the school-master must of course sit
at the first table, and then it was decided that the
youngest of the young folks should sit down too,
because the eldest of the young folks chose to wait and
eat by themselves. To this last arrangement there
was one exception; for Miss Harriet Gibbs, when she
saw the school-master seated on one side of the table,
had somehow or other, inadvertently of course, taken a
seat on the other side directly opposite to him. And
when, as the young folks were retiring from the room,
Ivory Harlow looked at her and saw she had concluded
to remain, Susan thought she saw considerable
color come into Ivory's face.

When the first company at the table had eaten up
two rows of pies clear round the board, including
mince, apple and custard, and “punkin pies,” of the
largest class, together with a reasonable portion of
various kinds of cakes and sweetmeats, and had given
place to the second company at the table, who had
gone through similar operations to a similar extent,

-- 042 --

[figure description] Page 042.[end figure description]

the great dining-hall was speedily cleared of dishes,
and chairs, and tables, and all such sorts of trumpery,
that there might be nothing to impede the real business
of the evening.

The elderly people were again seated in the fore-room,
where a brisk fire was blazing so warmly that
they could sit back comfortably clear to the walls; and
around the hearth was a goodly array of mugs and
pitchers of cider, and bowls heaped with mellow
apples, red and yellow and green.

“Now, then, what shall we have to begin with?”
said James.

“Blind man's buff,” said George Gibbs.

“Suppose we have a quiet dance to begin with?”
said Susan.

“Oh, I'd rather have something that has more life
in it,” said Harriet Gibbs; “let's have `hunt the slipper,
' or `forfeits,' I don't care which.

“Oh get away with them small potatoes,” said Bill
Dingley; “let's go right into blind man's buff at
once; that's the stuff for Christmas.”

“You know we must please the ladies, Bill,” said
James Briggs, “I guess we'll have a sort of game at
forfeits first, as Miss Gibbs proposed it.”

“Well, agreed,” said all hands.

-- 043 --

[figure description] Page 043.[end figure description]

Accordingly the company arranged themselves in a
circle round the large hall, holding the palms of their
hands together, and James took a piece of money
between his hands and passed round to each one of
the company, and made the motion to drop the money
into the hands of each.

“Button, button, who's got the button?” said James
to the head one, when he had been round the circle.

“Harriet Gibbs,” was the reply.

“Button, button, who's got the button?” said James
to the next.

“Betsey Harlow,” answered the next.

At last, when James had been clear round the circle
and questioned each one in like manner, he called out,

“Them that's got it, rise.”

At once up hopped Sam Nelson, a sly little redheaded
fellow about a dozen years old, whom no one
suspected of having it, and of course no one had
guessed him. Every one of the company, therefore,
had to pay a forfeit.

“I move we redeem, before we go any further,”
said Ivory Harlow.

The motion was seconded all round, and the forfeits
were accordingly collected, and James selecting a
couple, held them over Harriet Gibbs's head.

-- 044 --

[figure description] Page 044.[end figure description]

“Whose two pawns are these?” said he, “and what
shall he and she do to redeem them?”

“The lady shall kiss the schoolmaster,” said Harriet,
“and the gentleman shall go into the fore-room
and kiss Mrs. Briggs.

“Miss Harriet Gibbs and Mr. Ivory Harlow go and
do it,” said James.

“Oh, la me! I shant do no sich thing,” said Harriet
with a half scream.

“Then you don't have your ring again,” said James.

“Well, then, I suppose I must do it, or I shall be
setting a bad example to the rest,” said Harriet. And
away she run across the room to Mr. Stephen Long,
and at once gave the whole company audible evidence
that she had fully redeemed her ring.

Ivory Harlow walked leisurely into the fore-room.
What he did there the young people could not certainly
say, but from the hearty laugh that came from the
elderly people there assembled, they inferred that he
did something, and on his return James gave him
up his pawn.

James then selected two more of the forfeits, and
held them over Bill Dingley's head.

“Whose two pawns are these, and what shall he
and she do to redeem them?” said James.

-- 045 --

[figure description] Page 045.[end figure description]

“They shall kiss each other through a chair back,”
said Bill.

“Miss Susan Briggs and Mr. Stephen Long have
got to do it,” said James.

Whereupon Mr. Stephen Long readily took a chair
and approached Miss Susan Briggs. But Miss Susan,
when she saw the school-master coming towards her,
holding a chair up to his face, and his lips poking
through the back of it, colored up to the eyes and
turned away.

“Do it, do it!” cried half the company, “or you
shan't have your hankerchief.”

Mr. Stephen Long seemed bent upon redeeming his
pawn at any rate, and he followed Miss Susan with
the chair with an earnestness that showed he did not
mean to be baffled. When Miss Susan found herself
cornered, and could retreat no further, she kissed her
hand and tossed it at the chair.

“That wont do,” cried half a dozen voices.

“I had to redeem mine,” said Harriet Gibbs, “and
it's no more than fair that she should redeem hers.”

“Well, you may redeem mine too, if you are a
mind to,” said Susan, pushing the chair from her
with her hand.

When Mr. Stephen Long found he could not

-- 046 --

[figure description] Page 046.[end figure description]

redeem his pawn through the chair, he declared he
would redeem it without the chair. So setting the
chair down, he commenced a fresh attack upon Miss
Susan, who held both hands tightly over her face.
After some violence, however, the company heard
the appropriate signal of triumph, but whether the
victory had been achieved upon cheek or hand,
always remained matter of doubt.

In redeeming the rest of the pawns, the penalties
were as various as the characters of the several persons
who stood judges. One had to measure half a
dozen yards of love ribbon. One had to hop across
the room on one foot backwards. Another had to
kneel to the prettiest, bow to the wittiest, and kiss
the one he loved best. But when Bill Dingley stood
as judge, he declared he wasn't in favor of any half-way
punishments, and he accordingly adjudged the
delinquents to kiss every lady and gentleman in the
room; that is, the lady to kiss the gentlemen, and the
gentleman to kiss the ladies, which penalties the
aforesaid delinquents performed according to the best
of their abilities.

When the game of pawns was over, the general
vote seemed to be in favor of blind man's buff.
James had to blind first, and he whirled about the

-- 047 --

[figure description] Page 047.[end figure description]

room, and flew from side to side, and corner to corner,
with as much ease and boldness as though he had
nothing over his eyes; and he kept the company
continually flying from one end of the hall to the
other, like a flock of frightened pigeons. He, however,
killed them off pretty fast, by catching one
after another, and sending them into the end room.
While they were running for their lives, this way and
that, Ivory Harlow couldn't help noticing that, somehow
or other, Harriet Gibbs most always blundered
into the same corner where the school-master was;
and sometimes she would run right against him
before she saw him; and then sometimes she would
almost fall down, and the school-master would have to
catch hold of her to keep her from falling. More
than once that evening, Ivory wished he had not
brought her, and more than twice he wished Susan
Briggs might forget that he did bring her.

The brisk running and bustle at blind man's buff
drew the elderly people to the door of the fore room,
where they stood and looked on. When James had
caught about half the company, Mrs. Briggs could
not stand it any longer. She slipped off her shoes,
and in she went right among them, and joined in the
game; and she ran about lighter and quicker than

-- 048 --

[figure description] Page 048.[end figure description]

any girl there. So much upon the alert was she, and
moved about with such noiseless and nimble footsteps,
that she was in fact the very last to be taken.
And when at last she was cornered and caught,
James was a little puzzled to know who it was, for
he felt almost sure he had caught all the large girls.
But when he put his hand upon her head, and face,
and neck, and shoulders, he exclaimed,

“Well done, mother; this is you. Now you shall
blind.”

“Oh, no, I can't do that, James,” said Mrs. Briggs,
retreating toward the fore-room.

“Yes, but you must,” said James, “you are the
last caught.”

“Yes, yes, you must, you must,” echoed the young
folks from all sides.

“Well,” said Mrs. Briggs at last, “if Mr. Briggs
and the rest of 'em will come out and run, I'll blind.”

The elderly people stood and looked at each other
a minute, and at last they haw hawed right out, and
then half a dozen of them came out upon the floor to
join the game. The handkerchief was put upon Mrs.
Briggs's eyes, and the old folks commenced running,
and the old folks stepped heavy, and the young folks
laughed loud, and there was a most decided racket.

-- 049 --

[figure description] Page 049.[end figure description]

Mrs. Briggs, however, soon cleared the coast, for she
was spry as a cat, and caught her prey as fast as that
useful animal would do when shut up in a room with
a flock of mice.

When this run was over, the play went back again
exclusively into the hands of the young folks, and after
several of them had been blinded, it came at last
to Bill Dingley's turn. Bill went into it like a day's
work. He leaped upon his prey like a tiger among
sheep. He ran over one, and tripped up another,
knocked one this way and another that, and caught
three or four in his arms at once. He made very quick
work of it, and caught them all off, but when he got
through, two or three were rubbing the bruises on
their heads, and one was bleeding at the nose. This
wound up the blind man's buff.

Mrs. Briggs then came out and told Susan to get a
table out in the middle of the room. She then
brought forward a couple of nice little loaves of
Christmas cake, and placed them on a couple of plates,
and cut them up into as many slices as there were
young folks present, men and women grown.

“Now,” said Mrs. Briggs, “we'll see which of you
is going to be married first. These two cakes have
each of 'em a Christmas ring in them; and

-- 050 --

[figure description] Page 050.[end figure description]

whichever gets the slice that has the ring in it, will be married
before the year is out. So all the gals over sixteen
years old stand up in a row on one side, and all
the young men over eighteen stand up in a row on
the other side, and I'll pass the cake round.”

She carried it round to the young men first, and
each took a slice and commenced eating to ascertain
who had the ring.

“By jings, I haven't got it,” said Billy Dingley,
swallowing his cake at three mouthfuls.

“May be you've swallowed it,” said George Gibbs.

“Well, them that's got it,” said Mrs. Briggs,
“please to keep quiet till we find out which of the
gals has the other.”

She then passed the cake round to the young ladies.
When she came to Susan, Harriet Gibbs, who was
standing by her side, said:

“It's no use for any of the rest of us to try, for
Susan knows which slice 'tis in, and she'll get it.”

“No, that isn't fair,” said Mrs. Briggs; “I put the
rings in myself, and nobody else knows anything
about it.”

The young ladies then took their slices, and Mrs.
Briggs passed on to Sally Dingley, Bill's sister, who
being on the wrong side of forty, did not stand in the

-- 051 --

[figure description] Page 051.[end figure description]

row, and rather declined taking the cake. Mrs. Briggs
urged her, and told her she must take some; when
Bill suddenly called out:

“Take hold, Sal, take hold and try your luck; as
long as there's life there's hope.”

Miss Sally Dingley run across the room and boxed
Bill's ears, and then came back and said she'd take a
piece of cake.

“For who knows,” said she, “but what I shall get
the ring; and who knows but what I shall be married
before any of you, now?”

After the young ladies had eaten their cake, Mrs.
Briggs called upon them that had the rings to step
forward into the floor. Upon which, Ivory Harlow
stepped out on one side, and Harriet Gibbs on the
other.

“Ah, that ain't fair; that's cheatin, that's cheatin,”
cried out little Sam Nelson.

“Why, what do you mean by that, Sam?” said Mrs.
Briggs.

“Cause,” said Sam, “I see Susan, when she was
eating the cake, take the ring out of her mouth, and
slip it into Harriet Gibbs's hand.”

At this Susan blushed, Harriet looked angry, and
the company laughed.

-- 052 --

[figure description] Page 052.[end figure description]

By this time it was twelve o'clock, and the elderly
people began to think it was time for them to be
moving homeward. And as soon as they were gone,
the young folks put on their shawls and cloaks and
hats, and prepared to follow them. Before they went,
however, Ivory Harlow got a chance to whisper to
Susan Briggs, and tell her, that he supposed he should
have to carry Harriet home this time, but it was the
last time he should ever carry her anywhere, as long
as his name was Ivory Harlow.

-- 053 --

p689-062 CHAPTER III. THE TOUGH YARN:

[figure description] Page 053.[end figure description]

Major Grant of Massachusetts was returning home
from Moosehead Lake, where he had been to look
after one of his newly-purchased townships, and to
sell stumpage to the loggers for the ensuing winter,
when he stopped for the night at a snug tavern in one
of the back towns in Maine, and having been to the
stable, and seen with his own eyes that his horse was
well provided with hay and grain, he returned to the
bar-room, laid aside his cloak, and took a seat by the
box stove, which was waging a hot war with the cold
and raw atmosphere of November.

The major was a large, portly man, well to do in
the world, and loved his comfort. Having called for
a mug of hot flip, he loaded his long pipe, and prepared
for a long and comfortable smoke. He was
also a very social man, and there being but one person
in the room with him, he invited him to join him in
a tumbler of flip. This gentleman was Doctor Snow,

-- 054 --

[figure description] Page 054.[end figure description]

an active member of a temperance society, and therefore
he politely begged to be excused; but having a
good share of the volubility natural to his profession,
he readily entered into conversation with the major,
answered many of his inquiries about the townships
in that section of the State, described minutely the
process of lumbering, explained how it might be made
profitable, and showed why it was often attended with
great loss. A half hour thus passed imperceptibly
away, and the doctor rose, drew his wrapper close
about him, and placed his cap on his head. The
major looked round the room with an air of uneasiness.

“What, going so soon, Doctor? No more company
here to-night, think? Dull business, Doctor, to sit
alone one of these long tedious evenings. Always
want somebody to talk with; man wasn't made to be
alone, you know.”

“True,” said the doctor, “and I should be happy
to spend the evening with you; but I have to go three
miles to see a patient yet to-night, and it's high time I
was off. But luckily, Major, you won't be left alone
after all, for there comes Jack Robinson, driving his
horse and wagon into the yard now; and I presume
he'll not only spend the evening with you, but stop
all night.”

-- 055 --

[figure description] Page 055.[end figure description]

“Well, that's good news,” said the Major, “if he'll
only talk. Will he talk, Doctor?”

“Talk? yes! till all is blue. He's the greatest
talker you ever met. I'll tell you what 'tis, Major, I'll
bet the price of your reckoning here to-night, that
you may ask him the most direct simple question you
please, and you shan't get an answer from him under
half an hour, and he shall keep talking a steady stream
the whole time, too.”

“Done,” said the major; “'tis a bet. Let us understand
it fairly, now. You say I may ask him any
simple, plain question I please, and he shall be half
an hour answering it, and talk all the time too; and
you will bet my night's reckoning of it.”

“That's the bet exactly,” said the doctor.

Here the parties shook hands upon it, just as the
door opened, and Mr. Jack Robinson came limping
into the room, supported by a crutch, and with something
of a bustling, care-for-nothing air, hobbled along
toward the fire. The doctor introduced Mr. Jack
Robinson to Major Grant, and after the usual salutations
and shaking of hands, Mr. Robinson took his
seat upon the other side of the stove, opposite the
major.

Mr. Jack Robinson was a small, brisk man, with

-- 056 --

[figure description] Page 056.[end figure description]

a grey twinkling eye, and a knowing expression of
countenance. As he carefully settled himself into his
chair, resting his lame limb against the edge of the
stove-hearth, he threw his hat carelessly upon the
floor, laid his crutch across his knee, and looked round
with a satisfied air, that seemed to say, “Now, gentlemen,
if you want to know the time of day, here's the
boy that can tell ye.”

“Allow me, Mr. Robinson, to help you to a
tumbler of hot flip,” said the major, raising the mug
from the stove.

“With all my heart, and thank ye too,” said
Robinson, taking a sip from the tumbler. “I believe
there's nothing better for a cold day than a hot flip.
I've known it to cure many a one who was thought to
be in a consumption. There's something so”—

“And I have known it,” said the doctor, shrugging
his shoulders, “to kill many a one that was
thought to have an excellent constitution and sound
health.”

“There's something so warming,” continued Mr.
Robinson, following up his own thoughts so earnestly
that he seemed not to have heard the remark of the
doctor, “there's something so warming and so nourishing
in hot flip, it seems to give new life to the

-- 057 --

[figure description] Page 057.[end figure description]

blood, and puts the insides all in good trim. And as
for cold weather, it will keep that out better than any
double-milled kersey or fearnot great coat that I ever
see.

“I could drive twenty miles in a cold day with a
good mug of hot flip easier than I could ten miles
without it. And this is a cold day, gentlemen, a real
cold day, there's no mistake about it. This norwester
cuts like a razor. But tain't nothing near so cold as
'twas a year ago, the twenty-second day of this
month. That day, it seemed as if your breath would
freeze stiff before it got an inch from your mouth. I
drove my little Canada grey in a sleigh that day
twelve miles in forty-five minutes, and froze two of
my toes on my lame leg as stiff as maggots. Them
toes chill a great deal quicker than they do on t'other
foot. In my well days I never froze the coldest day
that ever blew. But that cold snap, the twenty-second
day of last November, if my little grey
hadn't gone like a bird, would have done the job for
my poor lame foot. When I got home I found two
of my sheep dead, and they were under a good shed,
too. And one of my neighbors, poor fellow, went
into the woods after a load of wood, and we found
him next day froze to death, leaning up against a

-- 058 --

[figure description] Page 058.[end figure description]

beech tree as stiff as a stake. But his oxen was alive
and well. It's very wonderful how much longer a
brute critter will stan' the cold than a man will.
Them oxen didn't even shiver.”

“Perhaps,” said the doctor, standing with his
back towards Mr. Robinson, “perhaps the oxen had
taken a mug of hot flip before they went into the
woods.”

By this time Major Grant began to feel a little
suspicious that he might lose his bet, and was setting
all his wits to work to fix on a question so direct and
limited in its nature, that it could not fail to draw
from Mr. Robinson a pretty direct answer. He had
thought at first of making some simple inquiry about
the weather; but he now felt convinced that, with
Mr. Robinson, the weather was a very copious subject.
He had also several times thought of asking some
question in relation to the beverage they were drinking;
such as, whether Mr. Robinson preferred flip to
hot sling. And at first he could hardly perceive, if
the question were put direct, how it could fail to
bring out a direct yes or no. But the discursive
nature of Mr. Robinson's eloquence on flip had already
induced him to turn his thoughts in another direction
for a safe and suitable question. At last he thought

-- 059 --

[figure description] Page 059.[end figure description]

he would make his inquiry in reference to Mr. Robinson's
lameness. He would have asked the cause of
his lameness, but the thought occurred to him that
the cause might not be clearly known, or his lameness
might have been produced by a complication of
causes, that would allow too much latitude for a reply.
He resolved, therefore, simply to ask him whether his
lameness was in the leg or in the foot. That was a
question which it appeared to him required a short
answer. For if it were in the leg, Mr. Robinson
would say it was in his leg; and if it were in his
foot, he would at once reply, in his foot; and if it
were in both, what could be more natural than that
he should say, in both? and that would seem to be
the end of the story.

Having at length fully made up his mind as to the
point of attack, he prepared for the charge, and
taking a careless look at his watch, he gave the
doctor a sly wink. Doctor Snow, without turning or
scarce appearing to move, drew his watch from
beneath his wrapper so far as to see the hour, and
returned it again to his pocket.

“Mr. Robinson,” said the major, “if I may presume
to make the inquiry, is your lameness in the
leg or in the foot?”

-- 060 --

[figure description] Page 060.[end figure description]

“Well, that reminds me,” said Mr. Robinson,
taking a sip from the tumbler, which he still held in
his hand, “that reminds me of what my old father
said to me once when I was a boy. Says he, `Jack,
you blockhead, don't you never tell where anything
is, unless you can first tell how it come there.' The
reason of his saying it was this: Father and I was
coming in the steamboat from New York to Providence;
and they was all strangers on board—we
didn't know one of 'em from Adam; and on the
way, one of the passengers missed his pocket-book,
and begun to make a great outcry about it. He
called the captain, and said there must be a search.
The boat must be searched, and all the passengers
and all on board must be searched. Well, the captain
he agreed to it; and at it they went, and over-hauled
everything from one end of the boat to
t'other; but they couldn't find hide nor hair of it.
And they searched all the passengers and all the
hands, but they couldn't get no track on't. And the
man that lost the pocket-book took on and made a
great fuss. He said it wasn't so much on account of
the money, for there wasn't a great deal in it; but
the papers in it were of great consequence to him,
and he offered to give ten dollars to any body that

-- 061 --

[figure description] Page 061.[end figure description]

would find it. Pretty soon after that, I was fixin' up
father's berth a little, where he was going to sleep,
and I found the pocket-book under the clothes at the
head of the berth, where the thief had tucked it
away while the search was going on. So I took it,
tickled enough, and run to the man, and told him I
had found his pocket-book. He catched it out of my
hands, and says he, `Where did you find it?' Says
I, `Under the clothes in the head of my father's
berth.'

“`In your father's berth, did you?' says he, and he
give me a look and spoke so sharp, I jumped as if I
was going out of my skin.

“Says he, `Show me the place.'

“So I run and showed him the place.

“`Call your father here,' says he. So I run and
called father.

“`Now Mister,' says he to father, `I should like to
know how my pocket-book come in your berth.'

“`I don't know nothin' about it,' says father.

“Then he turned to me and says he, `Young man,
how came this pocket-book in your father's berth?'

“Says I, `I can't tell. I found it there, and that's
all I know about it.'

“Then he called the captain and asked him if he

-- 062 --

[figure description] Page 062.[end figure description]

knew us. The captain said he didn't. The man
looked at us mighty sharp, first to father, and then to
me, and eyed us from top to toe. We wasn't neither
of us dressed very slick, and we could tell by his looks
pretty well what he was thinking. At last he said
he would leave it to the passengers whether, under all
the circumstances, he should pay the boy the ten
dollars or not. I looked at father, and his face was
as red as a blaze, and I see his dander begun to rise.
He didn't wait for any of the passengers to give their
opinion about it, but says he to the man, “Dod-rot
your money! if you've got any more than you want,
you may throw it into the sea for what I care; but if
you offer any of it to my boy, I'll send you where a
streak of lightning wouldn't reach you in six
months.”

“That seemed to settle the business; the man didn't
say no more to father, and most of the passengers
begun to look as if they didn't believe father was
guilty. But a number of times after that, on the
passage, I see the man that lost the pocket-book whisper
to some of the passengers, and then turn and look
at father. And then father would look gritty enough
to bite a board-nail off. When we got ashore, as soon
as we got a little out of sight of folks, father catched

-- 063 --

[figure description] Page 063.[end figure description]

hold of my arm and gave it a most awful jerk, and
says he, “Jack you blockhead, don't you never tell
where any thing is again, unless you can first tell how
it come there.”

“Now it would be about as difficult,” continued
Mr. Robinson after a slight pause, which he employed
in taking a sip from his tumbler, “for me to tell to a
certainty how I come by this lameness, as it was to
tel how the pocket-book come in father's berth.
There was a hundred folks aboard, and we knew some
of 'em must a put it in; but which one 'twas, it would
have puzzled a Philadelphia lawyer to tell. Well,
it's pretty much so with my lameness. This poor leg
of mine has gone through some most awful sieges,
and it's a wonder there's an inch of it left. But it's a
pretty good leg yet; I can almost bear my weight
upon it; and with the help of a crutch you'd be surprised
to see how fast I can get over the ground.”

“Then your lameness is in the leg rather than in
the foot?” said Major Grant, taking advantage of a
short pause in Mr. Robinson's speech.

“Well, I was going on to tell you all the particulars,”
said Mr. Robinson. “You've no idea what
terrible narrow chances I've gone through with this
leg.”

-- 064 --

[figure description] Page 064.[end figure description]

“Then the difficulty is in the leg, is it not?” said
Major Grant.

“Well, after I tell you the particulars,” said Mr.
Robinson, “you can judge for yourself. The way it
first got hurt was going in a swimming, when I was
about twelve years old. I could swim like a duck,
and used to be in Uncle John's mill-pond along with
his Stephen half the time. Uncle John, he always
used to keep scolding at us and telling of us we should
get sucked into the floome bime-by, and break our
plaguy necks under the water-wheel. But we knew
better. We'd tried it so much we could tell jest how
near we could go to the gate and get away again without
being drawn through. But one day Steeve, jest to
plague me, threw my straw hat into the pond between
me and the gate. I was swimming about two rods from
the gate, and the hat was almost as near as we dared
to go, and the stream was sucking it down pretty fast;
so I sprung with all my might to catch the hat before
it should go through and get smashed under the water-wheel.
When I got within about half my length of
it, I found I was as near the gate as we ever dared to
go. But I hated to lose the hat, and I thought I might
venture to go a little nearer, so I fetched a spring with
all my might, and grabbed the hat and put it on my

-- 065 --

[figure description] Page 065.[end figure description]

head, and turned back and pulled for my life. At
first I thought I gained a little, and I made my hands
and feet fly as tight as I could spring. In about a
minute I found I didn't gain a bit one way nor t'other;
and then I sprung as if I would a tore my arms off;
and it seemed as if I could feel the sweat start all over
me right there in the water. I begun to feel all at
once as if death had me by the heels, and I screamed
for help. Stephen was on the shore watching me, but
he couldn't get near enough to help me. When he
see I couldn't gain any, and heard me scream, he was
about as scared as I was, and turned and run towards
the mill, and screamed for uncle as loud as he could
bawl. In a minute uncle come running to the mill-pond,
and got there jest time enough to see me going
through the gate feet foremost. Uncle said, if he
should live to be as old as Methuselah, he should never
forget what a beseeching look my eyes had as I lifted
up my hands towards him and then sunk guggling
into the floome. He knew I should be smashed all to
pieces under the great water-wheel: but he run round
as fast as he could to the tail of the mill to be ready
to pick up my mangled body when it got through, so
I might be carried home and buried. Presently he
see me drifting along in the white foam that came out

-- 066 --

[figure description] Page 066.[end figure description]

from under the mill, and he got a pole with a hook to
it and drawed me to the shore. He found I was not
jammed all to pieces as he expected, though he
couldn't see any signs of life. But having considerable
doctor skill, he went to work upon me, and rolled
me over, and rubbed me, and worked upon me, till
bime-by I began to groan and breathe. And at last
I come to, so I could speak. They carried me home
and sent for a doctor to examine me. My left foot and
leg was terribly bruised, and one of the bones broke,
and that was all the hurt there was on me. I must
have gone lengthways right in between two buckets
of the water-wheel, and that saved my life. But this
poor leg and foot got such a bruising I wasn't able to
go a step on it for three months, and never got entirely
over it to this day.”

“Then your lameness is in the leg and foot both, is
it not?” said Major Grant, hoping at this favorable
point to get an answer to this question.

“Oh, it wasn't that bruising under the mill-wheel,”
said Mr. Jack Robinson, “that caused this lameness,
though I've no doubt it caused a part of it and helps
to make it worse; but it wasn't the principal cause.
I've had tougher scrapes than that in my day, and I
was going on to tell you what I s'pose hurt my leg

-- 067 --

[figure description] Page 067.[end figure description]

more than anything else ever happened to it. When
I was about eighteen years old I was the greatest
hunter there was within twenty miles round. I had
a first-rate little fowling-piece; she would carry as
true as a hair. I could hit a squirrel fifty yards
twenty times running. And at all the thanksgiving
shooting-matches I used to pop off the geese and
turkeys so fast, it spoilt all their fun; and they got so
at last they wouldn't let me fire till all the rest had
fired round three times a piece. And when all of
'em had fired at a turkey three times and couldn't
hit it, they would say, `well, that turkey belongs to
Jack Robinson.' So I would up and fire and pop it
over. Well, I used to be almost everlastingly a
gunning; and father would fret and scold, because
whenever there was any work to do, Jack was always
off in the woods. One day I started to go over Bear
Mountain, about two miles from home, to see if I
couldn't kill some raccoons; and I took my brother
Ned, who was three years younger than myself, with
me to help bring home the game. We took some
bread and cheese and doughnuts in our pockets, for
we calculated to be gone all day, and I shouldered
my little fowling-piece, and took a plenty of powder
and shot and small bullets, and off we started through

-- 068 --

[figure description] Page 068.[end figure description]

the woods. When we got round the other side of
Bear Mountain, where I had always had the best luck
in hunting, it was about noon. On the way I had
killed a couple of grey squirrels, a large fat raccoon,
and a hedge-hog. We sot down under a large beech
tree to eat our bread and cheese. As we sot eating,
we looked up into the tree, and it was very full of
beechnuts. They were about ripe, but there had not
been frost enough to make them drop much from the
tree. So says I to Ned, Let us take some sticks and
climb this tree and beat off some nuts to carry home.
So we got some sticks, and up we went. We hadn't
but jest got cleverly up into the body of the tree,
before we heard something crackling among the
bushes a few rods off. We looked and listened, and
heard it again, louder and nearer. In a minute we
see the bushes moving, not three rods off from the
tree, and something black stirring about among them.
Then out come an awful great black bear, the ugliest-looking
feller that ever I laid my eyes on. He looked
up towards the tree we was on, and turned up his nose
as though he was snuffing something. I begun to
feel pretty streaked; I knew bears was terrible
climbers, and I'd a gin all the world if I'd only had
my gun in my hand, well loaded. But there was no

-- 069 --

[figure description] Page 069.[end figure description]

time to go down after it now, and I thought the only
way was to keep as still as possible, and perhaps he
might go off again about his business. So we didn't
stir nor hardly breathe. Whether the old feller smelt
us, or whether he was looking for beechnuts, I don't
know; but he reared right up on his hind legs and
walked as straight to the tree as a man could walk.
He walked round the tree twice, and turned his great
black nose up, and looked more like Old Nick than
anything I ever see before. Then he stuck his sharp
nails into the sides of the tree, and begun to hitch
himself up. I felt as if we had got into a bad scrape,
and wished we was out of it. Ned begun to cry.
But, says I to Ned, `It's no use to take on about it;
if he's coming up we must fight him off the best way
we can.' We climb'd up higher into the tree, and
the old bear come hitching along up after us. I
made Ned go up above me, and, as I had a pretty
good club in my hand, I thought I might be able to
keep the old feller down. He didn't seem to stop for
the beechnuts, but kept climbing right up towards
us. When he got up pretty near I poked my club at
him, and he showed his teeth and growled. Says I,
`Ned, scrabble up a little higher.' We clim up two
or three limbs higher, and the old bear followed close

-- 070 --

[figure description] Page 070.[end figure description]

after. When he got up so he could almost touch my
feet, I thought it was time to begin to fight. So I up
with my club and tried to fetch him a pelt over the
nose. And the very first blow he knocked the club
right out of my hand, with his great nigger paw, as
easy as I could knock it out of the hand of a baby a
year old. I begun to think then it was gone goose
with us. However, I took Ned's club, and thought
I'd try once more; but he knocked it out of my hand
like a feather, and made another hitch and grabbed
at my feet. We scrabbled up the tree, and he after
us, till we got almost to the top of the tree. At last
I had to stop a little for Ned, and the old bear
clinched my feet. First he stuck his claw into 'em,
and then he stuck his teeth into 'em, and begun to
naw. I felt as if 'twas a gone case, but I kicked and
fit, and told Ned to get up higher; and he did get up
a little higher, and I got up a little higher too, and
the old bear made another hitch and come up higher,
and begun to naw my heels again. And then the top
of the tree begun to bend, for we had got up so high
we was all on a single limb as 'twere; and it bent a
little more, and cracked and broke, and down we
went, bear and all, about thirty feet, to the ground.
At first I didn't know whether I was dead or alive. I

-- 071 --

[figure description] Page 071.[end figure description]

guess we all lay still as much as a minute before we
could make out to breathe. When I come to my feeling
a little, I found the bear had fell on my lame leg,
and give it another most awful crushing. Ned wasn't
hurt much. He fell on top of the bear, and the bear
fell partly on me. Ned sprung off and got out of the
way of the bear; and in about a minute more the
bear crawled up slowly on to his feet, and began to
walk off, without taking any notice of us, and I was
glad enough to see that he went rather lame. When
I come to try my legs I found one of 'em was terribly
smashed, and I couldn't walk a step on it. So I told
Ned to hand me my gun, and to go home as fast as
he could go, and get the horse and father, and come
and carry me home.

“Ned went off upon the quick trot, as if he was after
the doctor. But the blundering critter—Ned always
was a great blunderer—lost his way and wandered
about in the woods all night, and didn't get home till
sunrise next morning. The way I spent the night
wasn't very comfortable, I can tell ye. Jest before
dark it begun to rain, and I looked round to try to
find some kind of a shelter. At last I see a great tree,
lying on the ground a little ways off, that seemed to
be holler. I crawled along to it, and found there

-- 072 --

[figure description] Page 072.[end figure description]

was a holler in one end large enough for me to creep
into. So in I went, and in order to get entirely out
of the way of the spattering of the rain, and keep
myself dry, I crept in as much as ten feet. I laid
there and rested myself as well as I could, though my
leg pained me too much to sleep. Some time in the
night, all at once, I heerd a sort of rustling noise at
the end of the log where I come in. My hair stood
right on eend. It was dark as Egypt; I couldn't see
the least thing, but I could hear the rustling noise
again, and it sounded as if it was coming into the log.
I held my breath, but I could hear something breathing
heavily, and there seemed to be a sort of scratching
against the sides of the log, and it kept working
along in towards me. I clinched my fowling-piece
and held on to it. 'Twas well loaded with a brace of
balls and some shot besides. But whether to fire, or
what to do, I couldn't tell. I was sure there was some
terrible critter in the log, and the rustling noise kept
coming nearer and nearer to me. At last I heerd a
low kind of a growl. I thought if I was only dead
and decently buried somewhere I should be glad; for
to be eat up alive there by bears, or wolves, or catamounts,
I couldn't bear the idea of it. In a minute
more something made a horrible grab at my feet, and

-- 073 --

[figure description] Page 073.[end figure description]

begun to naw 'em. At first I crawled a little further
into the tree. But the critter was hold of my feet
again in a minute, and I found it was no use for me
to go in any farther. I didn't hardly dare to fire; for
I thought if I didn't kill the critter, it would only be
likely to make him fight the harder. And then again
I thought if I should kill him, and he should be as
large as I fancied him to be, I should never be able
to shove him out of the log, nor to get out by him.
While I was having these thoughts the old feller was
nawing and tearing my feet so bad, I found he would
soon kill me if I laid still. So I took my gun and
pointed down by my feet, as near the centre of the
holler log as I could, and let drive. The report
almost stunned me. But when I come to my hearing
again, I laid still and listened. Everything round
me was still as death; I couldn't hear the least sound.
I crawled back a few inches towards the mouth of the
log, and was stopt by something against my feet. I
pushed it. 'Twould give a little, but I couldn't move
it. I got my hand down far enough to reach,
and felt the fur and hair and ears of some terrible
animal.

“That was an awful long night. And when the
morning did come, the critter filled the holler up so

-- 074 --

[figure description] Page 074.[end figure description]

much, there was but very little light come in where
I was. I tried again to shove the animal towards the
mouth of the log, but I found 'twas no use,—I couldn't
move him. At last the light come in so much that I
felt pretty sure it was a monstrous great bear that I
had killed. But I begun to feel now as if I was buried
alive; for I was afraid our folks wouldn't find me,
and I was sure I never could get out myself. But
about two hours after sunrise, all at once I thought I
heered somebody holler “Jack.” I listened and I
heered it again, and I knew 'twas father's voice. I
answered as loud as I could holler. They kept hollering,
and I kept hollering. Sometimes they would go
further off and sometimes come nearer. My voice
sounded so queer they couldn't tell where it come from,
nor what to make of it. At last, by going round considerable,
they found my voice seemed to be some where
round the holler tree, and bime-by father come along
and put his head into the holler of the tree, and called
out, `Jack, are you here?' `Yes I be,' says I, `and I
wish you would pull this bear out, so I can get out
myself.' When they got us out, I was about as much
dead as alive; but they got me on to the horse, and
led me home and nursed me up, and had a doctor to
set my leg again; and it's a pretty good leg yet.”

-- 075 --

[figure description] Page 075.[end figure description]

Here, while Mr. Robinson was taking another sip
from his tumbler, Major Grant glanced at his watch,
and, looking up to Doctor Snow, said, with a grave,
quiet air, “Doctor, I give it up; the bet is yours.”

-- 076 --

p689-085 CHAPTER IV. CHRISTOPHER CROTCHET.

[figure description] Page 076.[end figure description]

Your New England country singing-master is a
peculiar character; who shall venture to describe
him? During his stay in a country village, he is the
most important personage in it. The common school-master,
to be sure, is a man of dignity and importance.
Children never pass him on the road without
turning square round, pulling off their hats, and
making one of their best and most profound bows.
He is looked up to with universal deference both by
young and old, and is often invited out to tea. Or,
if he “boards round,” great is the parade, and great
the preparation, by each family, when their “week
for boarding the master” draws near. Then not
unfrequently a well fatted porker is killed, and the
spare-ribs are duly hung round the pantry in readiness
for roasting. A half bushel of sausages are
made up into “links,” and suspended on a pole near
the ceiling from one end of the kitchen to the other.

-- 077 --

[figure description] Page 077.[end figure description]

And the Saturday beforehand, if the school-master is
to come on Monday, the work of preparation reaches
its crisis. Then it is, that the old oven, if it be not
“heaten seven times hotter than it is wont to be,” is
at least heated seven times; and apple-pies, and
pumpkin-pies, and mince-pies are turned out by
dozens, and packed away in closet and cellar for
the coming week. And the “fore room,” which has
not had a fire in it for the winter, is now duly washed
and scrubbed and put to rights, and wood is heaped
on the fire with a liberal hand, till the room itself
becomes almost another oven. George is up betimes
on Monday morning to go with his hand-sled and
bring the master's trunk; Betsey and Sally are rigged
out in their best calico gowns, the little ones have their
faces washed and their hair combed with more than
ordinary care, and the mother's cap has an extra
crimp. And all this stir and preparation for the
common school-master. And yet he is but an everyday
planet, that moves in a regular orbit, and comes
round at least every winter.

But the singing-master is your true comet.
Appearing at no regular intervals, he comes suddenly,
and often unexpected. Brilliant, mysterious
and erratic, no wonder that he attracts all eyes, and

-- 078 --

[figure description] Page 078.[end figure description]

produces a tremendous sensation. Not only the children,
but the whole family, flock to the windows
when he passes, and a face may be seen at every pane
of glass, eagerly peering out to catch a glimpse of
the singing-master. Even the very dogs seem to
partake of the awe he inspires, and bark with
uncommon fierceness whenever they meet him.

“O, father,” said little Jimmy Brown, as he came
running into the house on a cold December night,
with eyes staring wide open, and panting for breath.
“O, father, Mr. Christopher Crotchet from Quavertown,
is over to Mr. Gibbs' tavern, come to see about
keeping singing-school; and Mr. Gibbs, and a whole
parcel more of 'em, wants you to come right over
there, cause they're goin' to have a meeting this
evening to see about hiring of him.”

Squire Brown and his family, all except Jimmy,
were seated round the supper table when this interesting
piece of intelligence was announced. Every
one save Squire Brown himself, gave a sudden start,
and at once suspended operations; but the Squire,
who was a very moderate man, and never did anything
from impulse, ate on without turning his head,
or changing his position. After a short pause, however,
which was a moment of intense anxiety to some

-- 079 --

[figure description] Page 079.[end figure description]

members of the family, he replied to Jimmy as
follows:—

“I shan't do no sich thing; if they want a singing-school,
they may get it themselves. A singing-school
won't do us no good, and I've ways enough to spend
my money without paying it for singing.” Turning
his head round and casting a severe look upon
Jimmy, he proceeded with increasing energy:

“Now, sir, hang your hat up and set down and
eat your supper; I should like to know what sent
you off over to the tavern without leave.”

“I wanted to see the singing-master,” said Jimmy.
“Sam Gibbs said there was a singing-master over to
their house, and so I wanted to see him.”

“Well, I'll singing-master you,” said the Squire,
“if I catch you to go off so again without leave.
Come, don't stand there; set down and eat your
supper, or I'll trounce you in two minutes.”

“There, I declare,” said Mrs. Brown, “I do think
it too bad. I do wish I could live in peace one
moment of my life. The children will be spoilt and
ruined. They never can stir a step nor hardly
breathe, but what they must be scolded and fretted
to death.”

Squire Brown had been accustomed to these

-- 080 --

[figure description] Page 080.[end figure description]

sudden squalls about twenty-five years, they having
commenced some six months or so after his marriage;
and long experience had taught him, that the only
way to escape with safety, was to bear away immediately
and scud before the wind. Accordingly he
turned again to Jimmy, and with a much softened
tone addressed him as follows:—

“Come, Jimmy, my son, set down and eat your
supper, that's a good boy. You shouldn't go away
without asking your mother or me; but you'll try to
remember next time, won't you?”

Jimmy and his mother were both somewhat
soothed by this well-timed suavity, and the boy took
his seat at the table.

“Now, pa,” said Miss Jerusha Brown, “you will
go over and see about having a singing-school, won't
you? I want to go dreadfully?”

“Oh, I can't do anything about that,” said the
Squire; “it'll cost a good deal of money, and I can't
afford it. And besides, there's no use at all in it.
You can sing enough now, any of you; you are singing
half your time.”

“There,” said Mrs. Brown, “that's just the way.
Our children will never have a chance to be anything
as long as they live. Other folks' children have a

-- 081 --

[figure description] Page 081.[end figure description]

chance to go to singing-schools, and to see young
company, and to be something in the world. Here's
our Jerusha has got to be in her twenty-fifth year
now, and if she's ever going to have young company,
and have a chance to be anything, she must have it
soon; for she'll be past the time bime-by for sich
things. 'Tisn't as if we was poor and couldn't afford
it; for you know, Mr. Brown, you pay the largest tax
of anybody in the town, and can afford to give the
children a chance to be something in the world, as
well as not. And as for living in this kind of way
any longer, I've no notion on't.”

Mrs. Brown knew how to follow up an advantage.
She had got her husband upon the retreat in the onset
a moment before, in reference to Jimmy's absence,
and the closing part of this last speech was uttered
with an energy and determination, of which Squire
Brown knew too well the import to disregard it.
Perceiving that a storm was brewing that would
burst upon his head with tremendous power, if he
did not take care to avoid it, he finished his supper
with all convenient despatch, rose from the table, put
on his grea coat and hat, and marched deliberately
over to Gibbs' tavern. Mrs. Brown knew at once
that she had won the victory, and that they should

-- 082 --

[figure description] Page 082.[end figure description]

have a singing-school. The children also had become
so well versed in the science of their mother's tactics,
that they understood the same thing, and immediately
began to discuss matters preparatory to attending the
school.

Miss Jerusha said she must have her new calico
gown made right up the next day; and her mother
said she should, and David might go right over after
Betsey Davis to come to work on it the next
morning.

“How delightful it will be to have a singing
school,” said Miss Jerusha: “Jimmy, what sort of a
looking man is Mr. Crotchet?”

“Oh, he is a slick kind of a looking man,” said
Jimmy.

“Is he a young man, or a married man?” inquired
Miss Jerusha.

“Ho! married? no; I guess he isn't,” said Jimmy,
“I don't believe he's more than twenty years old.”

“Poh; I don't believe that story,” said Jerusha,
a singing-master must be as much as twenty-five
years old, I know! How is he dressed? Isn't he
dressed quite genteel?”

“Oh, he's dressed pretty slick,” said Jimmy.

“Well, that's what makes him look so young,” said

-- 083 --

[figure description] Page 083.[end figure description]

Miss Jerusha; “I dare say he's as much as twenty-five
years old; don't you think he is, mother?”

“Well, I think it's pretty likely he is,” said Mrs.
Brown; “singing-masters are generally about that age.”

“How does he look?” said Miss Jerusha; “is he
handsome?”

“He's handsome enough,” said Jimmy, “only he's
got a red head and freckly face.”

“Now, Jim, I don't believe a word you say. You
are saying this, only just to plague me.

To understand the propriety of this last remark of
Miss Jerusha, the reader should be informed, that for
the last ten years she had looked upon every young
man who came into the place, as her own peculiar
property. And in all cases, in order to obtain possession
of her aforesaid property, she had adopted
prompt measures, and pursued them with a diligence
worthy of all praise.

“No I ain't neither,” said Jimmy, “I say he has
got a red head and freckly face.”

“La, well,” said Mrs. Brown, “what if he has?
I'm sure a red head don't look bad; and one of the
handsomest men that ever I see, had a freckly face.”

“Well, Jimmy, how large is he? Is he a tall man
or a short man?” said Miss Jerusha.

-- 084 --

[figure description] Page 084.[end figure description]

“Why, he isn't bigger round than I be,” said
Jimmy; “and I guess he isn't quite as tall as a haypole;
but he's so tall he has to stoop when he goes
into the door.”

So far from adding to the shock, which Miss Jerusha's
nerves had already received from the account of
the red head and freckly face, this last piece of intelligence
was on the whole rather consolatory; for she
lacked but an inch and a half of six feet in height
herself.

“Well, Jimmy,” said Miss Jerusha, “when he
stands up, take him altogether, isn't he a good-looking
young man?”

“I don't know anything about that,” said Jimmy;
“he looks the most like the tongs in the riddle, of
anything I can think of:



`Long legs and crooked thighs,
Little head and no eyes.'”

“There, Jim, you little plague,” said Miss Jerusha,
“you shall go right off to bed if you don't leave off
your nonsense. I won't hear another word of it.”

“I don't care if you won't,” said Jimmy, “it's all
true, every word of it.”

“What! then the singing-master hasn't got no eyes,
has he?” said Miss Jerusha; “that's a pretty story.”

-- 085 --

[figure description] Page 085.[end figure description]

“I don't mean he hasn't got no eyes at all,” said
Jimmy, “only his eyes are dreadful little, and you
can't see but one of 'em to time neither, they're
twisted round so.”

“A little cross-eyed, I s'pose,” said Mrs. Brown,
“that's all; I don't think that hurts the looks of a
man a bit; it only makes him look a little sharper.”

While those things were transpiring at Mr. Brown's,
matters of weight and importance were being
discussed at the tavern. About a dozen of the
neighbors had collected there early in the evening,
and every one, as soon as he found that Mr. Christopher
Crotchet from Quavertown was in the village,
was for having a singing-school forthwith, cost what
it would. They accordingly proceeded at once to
ascertain Mr. Crotchet's terms. His proposals were,
to keep twenty evenings for twenty dollars and
“found,” or for thirty and board himself. The school
to be kept three evenings in the week. A subscription-paper
was opened, and the sum of fifteen dollars
was at last made up. But that was the extent to
which they could go; not another dollar could be
raised. Much anxiety was now felt for the arrival of
Squire Brown; for the question of school or no
school depended entirely on him.

-- 086 --

[figure description] Page 086.[end figure description]

“Squire Brown's got money enough,” said Mr.
Gibbs, “and if he only has the will, we shall have a
school.”

“Not exactly,” said Mr. Jones; “if Mrs. Brown
has the will, we shall have a school, let the Squire's
will be what it may.”

Before the laugh occasioned by this last remark
had fully subsided, Squire Brown entered, much to
the joy of the whole company.

“Squire Brown, I'm glad to see you,” said Mr.
Gibbs; “shall I introduce you to Mr. Christopher
Crotchet, singing-master from Quavertown?”

The Squire was a very short man, somewhat
inclined to corpulence, and Mr. Crotchet, according
to Jimmy's account, was not quite as tall as a haypole;
so that by dint of the Squire's throwing his
head back and looking up, and Mr. Crotchet's canting
his head on one side in order to bring one eye to
bear on the Squire, the parties were brought within
each other's field of vision. The Squire made a bow,
which was done by throwing his head upward,
and Mr. Crotchet returned the compliment by
extending his arm downward to the Squire and shaking
hands.

When the ceremony of introduction was over, Mr.

-- 087 --

[figure description] Page 087.[end figure description]

Gibbs laid the whole matter before Mr. Brown,
showed him the subscription-paper, and told him
they were all depending upon him to decide whether
they should have a singing-school or not. Squire
Brown put on his spectacles and read the subscription-paper
over two or three times, till he fully understood
the terms, and the deficiency in the amount
subscribed. Then without saying a word he took a
pen and deliberately subscribed five dollars. That
settled the business; the desired sum was raised, and
the school was to go ahead. It was agreed that
it should commence on the following evening, and
that Mr. Crotchet should board with Mr. Gibbs one
week, with the Squire the next, and so go round
through the neighborhood.

On the following day there was no small commotion
among the young folks of the village, in making preparation
for the evening school. New singing-books
were purchased, dresses were prepared, curling-tongs
and crimping-irons were put in requisition, and early
in the evening the long chamber in Gibbs' tavern,
which was called by way of eminence “the hall,”
was well filled by youth of both sexes, the old folks
not being allowed to attend that evening, lest the
`boys and gals” should be diffident about “

-- 088 --

[figure description] Page 088.[end figure description]

sounding the notes.” A range of long narrow tables was
placed round three sides of the hall, with benches
behind them, upon which the youth were seated. A
singing-book and a candle were shared by two, all
round the room, till you came to Miss Jerusha Brown,
who had taken the uppermost seat, and monopolized
a whole book and a whole candle to her own use.
Betsey Buck, a lively, reckless sort of a girl of sixteen,
who cared for nobody nor nothing in this world, but
was full of frolic and fun, had by chance taken a seat
next to Miss Jerusha. Miss Betsey had a slight inward
turn of one eye, just enough to give her a
roguish look, that comported well with her character.

While they were waiting for the entrance of the
master, many a suppressed laugh, and now and then
an audible giggle, passed round the room, the mere
ebullitions of buoyant spirits and contagious mirth,
without aim or object. Miss Jerusha, who was trying
to behave her prettiest, repeatedly chided their
rudeness, and more than once told Miss Betsey Buck,
that she ought to be ashamed to be laughing so much;
“for what would Mr. Crotchet think, if he should
come in and find them all of a giggle?”

After a while the door opened, and Mr. Christopher
Crotchet entered. He bent his body slightly,

-- 089 --

[figure description] Page 089.[end figure description]

as he passed the door, to prevent a concussion of his
head against the lintel, and then walked very erect
into the middle of the floor, and made a short speech
to his class. His grotesque appearance caused a slight
tittering round the room, and Miss Betsey was even
guilty of an incipient audible laugh, which, however,
she had the tact so far to turn into a cough as to save
appearances. Still it was observed by Miss Jerusha,
who told her again in a low whisper that she ought
to be ashamed, and added that “Mr. Crotchet was a
most splendid man; a beautiful man.”

After Mr. Crotchet had made his introductory
speech, he proceeded to try the voices of his pupils,
making each one alone follow him in rising and falling
the notes. He passed round without difficulty till
he came to Miss Betsey Buck. She rather hesitated
to let her voice be heard alone; but the master told
her she must sound, and holding his head down so
close to hers that they almost met, he commenced
pouring his faw, sole, law, into her ear. Miss Betsey
drew back a little, but followed with a low and somewhat
tremulous voice, till she had sounded three
or four notes, when her risible muscles got the
mastery, and she burst out in an unrestrained fit of
laughter.

-- 090 --

[figure description] Page 090.[end figure description]

The master looked confused and cross; and Miss
Jerusha even looked crosser than the master. She
again reproached Miss Betsey for her rudeness, and
told her in an emphatic whisper, which was intended
more especially for the master's ear, “that such conduct
was shameful, and if she couldn't behave better
she ought to stay at home.”

Miss Jerusha's turn to sound came next, and she
leaned her head full half-way across the table to meet
the master's, and sounded the notes clear through,
three or four times over, from bottom to top and
from top to bottom; and sounded them with a
loudness and trength fully equal to that of the
master.

When the process of sounding the voices separately
had been gone through with, they were called upon
to sound together; and before the close of the evening
they were allowed to commence the notes of some
easy tunes. It is unnecessary here to give a detailed
account of the progress that was made, or to attempt
to describe the jargon of strange sounds, with which
Gibbs' hall echoed that night. Suffice it to say, that
the proficiency of the pupils was so great, that on the
tenth evening, or when the school was half through,
the parents were permitted to be present, and were

-- 091 --

[figure description] Page 091.[end figure description]

delighted to hear their children sing Old Hundred,
Mear, St. Martin's, Northfield, and Hallowell, with so
much accuracy, that those who knew the tunes, could
readily tell, every time, which one was being performed.
Mrs. Brown was almost in ecstasies at
the performance, and sat the whole evening and
looked at Jerusha, who sung with great earnestness
and with a voice far above all the rest. Even
Squire Brown himself was so much softened that
evening, that his face wore a sort of smile, and he
told his wife “he didn't grudge his five dollars, a
bit.”

The school went on swimmingly. Mr. Crotchet
became the lion of the village; and Miss Jerusha
Brown “thought he improved upon acquaintance
astonishingly.” Great preparation was made at Squire
Brown's for the important week of boarding the singing-master.
They outdid all the village in the quantity
and variety of their eatables, and at every meal
Miss Jerusha was particularly assiduous in placing
all the good things in the neighborhood of Mr. Crotchet's
plate. In fact, so bountifully and regularly was
Mr. Crotchet stuffed during the week, that his lank
form began to assume a perceptible fulness. He evidently
seemed very fond of his boarding-place,

-- 092 --

[figure description] Page 092.[end figure description]

especially at meal time; and made himself so much at
home, that Mrs. Brown and Jerusha were in a state
of absolute felicity the whole week. It was true he
spent two evenings abroad during the week, and it
was reported that one of them was passed at Mr.
Buck's. But Miss Jerusha would not believe a word
of such a story. She said “there was no young folks
at Mr. Buck's except Betsey, and she was sure Mr.
Crotchet was a man of more sense than to spend his
evenings with such a wild, rude thing as Betsey
Buck.” Still, however, the report gave her a little
uneasiness; and when it was ascertained, that during
the week on which Mr. Crotchet boarded at Mr.
Buck's he spent every evening at home, except the
three devoted to the singing-school, Miss Jerusha's
uneasiness evidently increased. She resolved to make
a desperate effort to counteract these untoward influences,
and to teach Miss Betsey Buck not to interfere
with other folk's concerns. For this purpose she
made a grand evening party, and invited all the young
folks of the village, except Miss Buck, who was pointedly
left out. The treat was elaborate for a country
village, and Miss Jerusha was uncommonly assiduous
in her attentions to Mr. Crotchet during the evening.
But to her inexpressible surprise and chagrin, about

-- 093 --

[figure description] Page 093.[end figure description]

eight o'clock, Mr. Crotchet put on his hat and great
coat and bade the company good night. Mrs. Brown
looked very blue, and Miss Jerusha's nerves were in
a state of high excitement. What could it mean?
She would give anything in the world to know where
he had gone. She ran up into the chamber and
looked out from the window. The night was rather
dark, but she fancied she saw him making his way
toward Mr. Buck's. The company for the remainder
of the evening had rather a dull time; and Miss
Jerusha passed almost a sleepless night.

The next evening Miss Jerusha was early at the
singing-school. She took her seat with a disconsolate
air, opened her singing-book and commenced singing
Hallowell in the following words:



“As on some lonely building's top,
The sparrow tells her moan,
Far from the tents of joy and hope,
I sit and grieve alone.”

On former occasions, when the scholars were
singing before school commenced, the moment the
master opened the door they broke off short, even if
they were in the midst of a tune. But now, when
the master entered, Miss Jerusha kept on singing.
She went through the whole tune after Mr. Crotchet

-- 094 --

[figure description] Page 094.[end figure description]

came in, and went back and repeated the latter half
of it with a loud and full voice, which caused a laugh
among the scholars, and divers streaks of red to pass
over the master's face.

At the close of the evening's exercises Miss Jerusha
hurried on her shawl and bonnet, and watched
the movements of the master. She perceived he
went out directly after Betsey Buck, and she hastened
after them with becoming speed. She contrived to
get between Miss Buck and the master as they
walked along the road, and kept Mr. Crotchet in close
conversation with her, or rather kept herself in close
conversation with Mr. Crotchet, till they came to the
corner that turned down to Mr. Buck's house. Here
Mr. Crotchet left her somewhat abruptly, and walked
by the side of Miss Betsey towards Mr. Buck's.
This was more than Miss Jerusha's nerves could well
bear. She was under too much excitement to proceed
on her way home. She stopped and gazed after
the couple as they receded from her; and as their
forms became indistinct in the darkness of the night,
she turned and followed them, just keeping them in
view till they reached the house. The door opened,
and to her inexpressible horror, they both went in.
It was past ten o'clock, too! She was greatly

-- 095 --

[figure description] Page 095.[end figure description]

puzzled. The affair was entirely inexplicable to her.
It could not be, however, that he would stop many
minutes, and she waited to see the result. Presently
a light appeared in the “fore-room;” and from the
mellowness of that light, a fire was evidently kindled
there. Miss Jerusha approached the house and
reconnoitred. She tried to look in at the window,
but a thick curtain effectually prevented her from
seeing anything within. The curtain did not reach
quite to the top of the window, and she thought she
saw the shadows of two persons before the fire,
thrown against the ceiling. She was determined by
some means or other to know the worst of it. She
looked round the door-yard and found a long piece of
board. She thought by placing this against the house
by the side of the window, she might be able to
climb up and look over the top of the curtain. The
board was accordingly raised on one end and placed
carefully by the side of the window, and Miss Jerusha
eagerly commenced the task of climbing. She
had reached the top of the curtain and cast one
glance into the room, where, sure enough, she beheld
Mr. Crotchet seated close by the side of Miss Betsey.
At this interesting moment, from some cause or other,
either from her own trembling, for she was

-- 096 --

[figure description] Page 096.[end figure description]

exceedingly agitated, or from the board not being properly
supported at the bottom, it slipped and canted, and in
an instant one half of the window was dashed with a
tremendous crash into the room.

Miss Jerusha fell to the ground, but not being
much injured by the fall, she sprang to her feet and
ran with the fleetness of a wild deer. The door
opened, and out came Mr. Crotchet and Mr. Buck,
and started in the race. They thought they had a
glimpse of some person running up the road when
they first came out, and Mr. Crotchet's long legs
measured off the ground with remarkable velocity.
But the fright had added so essentially to Miss Jerusha's
powers of locomotion, that not even Mr.
Crotchet could overtake her, and her pursuers soon
lost sight of her in the darkness of the night, and
gave up the chase and returned home.

Miss Jerusha was not seen at the singing-school
after this, and Mrs. Brown said she stayed at home
because she had a cough. Notwithstanding there
were many rumors and surmises afloat, and some
slanderous insinuations thrown out against Miss Jerusha
Brown, yet it was never ascertained by the
neighbors, for a certainty, who it was that demolished
Mr. Buck's window.

-- 097 --

[figure description] Page 097.[end figure description]

One item farther remains to be added to this
veritable history; and that is, that in three months
from this memorable night, Miss Betsey Buck became
Mrs. Crotchet of Quavertown.

-- 098 --

CHAPTER V. POLLY GRAY AND THE DOCTORS.

[figure description] Page 098.[end figure description]

It was a dark, and rainy night in June, when Deacon
Gray, about ten o'clock in the evening, drove his
horse and wagon up to the door, on his return from
market.

“Oh dear, Mr. Gray!” exclaimed his wife, as she
met him at the door, “I'm dreadful glad you've come;
Polly's so sick, I'm afraid she won't live till mornin',
if something ain't done for her.”

“Polly is always ailing,” said the deacon, deliberately;
“I guess it's only some of her old aches and
pains. Just take this box of sugar in; it has been
raining on it this hour.”

“Well, do come right in, Mr. Gray, for you don't
know what a desput case she is in; I daren't leave her
a minute.”

“You are always scared half to death,” said the
deacon, “if anything ails Polly; but you know she
always gets over it again. Here's coffee and tea and

-- 099 --

p689-108 [figure description] Page 099.[end figure description]

some other notions rolled up in this bag,” handing her
another bundle to carry into the house.

“Well, but Mr. Gray, don't pray stop for bundles
or nothin' else. You must go right over after Doctor
Longley, and get him here as quick as you can.”

“Oh, if it's only Doctor Longley she wants,” said
the deacon carelessly, “I guess she aint so dangerous,
after all.”

“Now, Mr. Gray, jest because Doctor Longley is a
young man and about Polly's age, that you should
make such an unfeelin' expression as that, I think is
too bad.”

The deacon turned away without making a reply,
and began to move the harness from the horse.

“Mr. Gray, ain't you going after the doctor?” said
Mrs. Gray, with increasing impatience.

“I'm going to turn the horse into the pasture, and
then I'll come in and see about it,” said the deacon.

A loud groan from Polly drew Mrs. Gray hastily
into the house. The deacon led his horse a quarter
of a mile to the pasture; let down the bars and turned
him in; put all the bars carefully up; hunted
round and found a stick to drive in as a wedge to
fasten the top bar; went round the barn to see that
the doors were all closed; got an armful of dry straw

-- 100 --

[figure description] Page 100.[end figure description]

and threw it into the pig-pen; called the dog from his
kennel, patted him on his head, and went into the
house.

“I'm afraid she's dying,” said Mrs. Gray, as the
deacon entered.

“You are always scared half out of your wits,” said
the deacon, “if there's anything the matter. I'll
come in as soon as I've took off my coat and boots
and put on some dry ones.”

Mrs. Gray ran back to attend upon Polly; but before
the deacon had got ready to enter the room, Mrs.
Gray screamed again with the whole strength of her
lungs.

“Mr. Gray, Mr. Gray, do make haste, she's in a fit.”

This was the first sound that had given the deacon
any uneasiness about the matter. He had been accustomed
for years to hear his wife worry about
Polly, and had heard her predict her death so often
from very slight illness, that he had come to regard
such scenes and such predictions with as little attention
as he did the rain that pattered against the window.
But the word fit was something he had never
heard applied in these cases before, and the sound of
it gave him a strange feeling of apprehension. He
had just thrown off his boots and put his feet into dry

-- 101 --

[figure description] Page 101.[end figure description]

shoes, and held a dry coat in his hand, when this last
appeal came to his ear and caused him actually to
hasten into the room.

“Polly, what's the matter now?” said the deacon,
beginning to be somewhat agitated, as he approached
the bedside.

Polly was in violent spasms, and heeded not the
inquiry. The deacon took hold of her arm, and
repeated the question more earnestly and in a tender
tone.

“You may as well speak to the dead,” said Mrs.
Gray; “she's past hearing or speaking.”

The deacon's eyes looked wild, and his face grew
very long.

“Why didn't you tell me how sick she was when I
first got home?” said the deacon with a look of
rebuke.

“I did tell you when you first come,” said Mrs.
Gray, sharply, “and you didn't take no notice on
it.”

“You didn't tell me anything about how sick she
was,” said the deacon; “you only spoke jest as you
used to, when she wasn't hardly sick at all.”

The subject here seemed to subside by mutual
consent, and both stood with their eyes fixed upon

-- 102 --

[figure description] Page 102.[end figure description]

Polly, who was apparently struggling in the fierce
agonies of death. In a few minutes, however, she
came out of the spasm, breathed comparatively easy,
and lay perfectly quiet. The deacon spoke to her
again. She looked up with a wild delirious look, but
made no answer.

“I'll go for the doctor,” said the deacon, “It may
be he can do something for her, though she looks to
me as though it was gone goose with her.”

Saying this, he put on his hat and coat and started.
Having half a mile to go, and finding the doctor in
bed, it was half an hour before he returned with Doctor
Longley in his company. In the meantime Mrs.
Gray had called in old Mrs. Livermore, who lived
next door, and they had lifted Polly up and put a
clean pillow upon the bed, and a clean cap on her
head, and had been round and “slicked up” the
room a little, for Mrs. Livermore said, “Doctor Longley
was such a nice man she always loved to see
things look tidy where he was coming to.”

The deacon came in and hung his hat up behind
the door, and Doctor Longley followed with his hat
in his hand and a small pair of saddle-bags on his
arm. Mrs. Gray stood at one side of the bed, and
Mrs. Livermore at the other, and the doctor laid

-- 103 --

[figure description] Page 103.[end figure description]

his hat and saddle-bags on the table that stood by
the window, and stepped immediately to the bedside.

“Miss Gray, are you sick?” said the doctor,
taking the hand of the patient.

No answer or look from the patient gave any
indication that she heard the question.

“How long has she been ill?” said the doctor.

“Ever since mornin',” said Mrs. Gray. “She got
up with a head-ache, jest after her father went away
to market, and smart pains inside, and she's been
growing worse all day.”

“And what have you given her?” said the doctor.

“Nothing, but arb-drink,” said Mrs. Gray; “whenever
she felt worse, I made her take a good deal of
arb-drink, because that, you know, is always good,
doctor. And besides, when it can't do no good, it
would do no hurt.”

“But what sort of drinks have you given her?”
said the doctor.

“Well, I give her most all sorts, for we had a
plenty of 'em in the house,” said Mrs. Gray. “I
give her sage, and peppermint, and sparemint, and
cammermile, and pennyryal, and motherwort, and
balm; you know, balm is very coolin', doctor, and

-- 104 --

[figure description] Page 104.[end figure description]

sometimes she'd be very hot, and then I'd make her
drink a good dose of balm.”

“Give me a candle,” said the doctor.

The deacon brought a candle and held it over the
patient's head. The doctor opened her mouth and
examined it carefully for the space of a minute. He
felt her pulse another minute, and looked again into
her mouth.

“Low pulse, but heavy and labored respiration,”
said the doctor.

“What do you think ails her?” said Mrs. Gray.

The doctor shook his head.

“Do you think you can give her anything to help
her?” said the deacon, anxiously.

The doctor looked very grave, and fixed his eyes
thoughtfully on the patient for a minute, but made no
reply to the deacon's question.

“Why didn't you send for me sooner?” at last said
the doctor, turning to Mrs. Gray.

“Because I thought my arb-drink would help her,
and so I kept trying it all day till it got to be dark,
and then she got to be so bad I didn't dare to leave
her till Mr. Gray got home.”

“It's a great pity,” said the doctor, turning from
the bed to the table and opening his saddle-bags.

-- 105 --

[figure description] Page 105.[end figure description]

“Thousands and thousands of lives are lost only by
delaying to send for medical advice till it is too late;
thousands that might have been saved as well as not,
if only taken in season.”

“But doctor, you don't think it's too late for Polly,
do you?” said Mrs. Gray.

“I think her case, to say the least, is extremely
doubtful,” said the doctor. “Her appearance is very
remarkable. Whatever her disease is, it has made
such progress, and life is so nearly extinct, that it is
impossible to tell what were the original symptoms,
and consequently what applications are best to be
made.”

“Well, now, doctor,” said Mrs. Livermore, “excuse
me for speakin'; but I'm a good deal older than you
are, and have seen a great deal of sickness in my
day, and I've been in here with Polly a number of
times to-day, and sometimes this evening, and I'm
satisfied, doctor, there's something the matter of her
insides.”

“Undoubtedly,” said the doctor, looking very
grave.

This new hint from Mrs. Livermore seemed to
give Mrs. Gray new hope, and she appealed again to
the doctor.

-- 106 --

[figure description] Page 106.[end figure description]

“Well, now, doctor,” said she, “don't you think
Mrs. Livermore has the right of it?”

“Most unquestionably,” said the doctor.

“Well, then, doctor, if you should give her something
that's pretty powerful to operate inwardly,
don't you think it might help her?”

“It might, and it might not,” said the doctor;
“the powers of life are so nearly exhausted, I must
tell you frankly I have very little hope of being
able to rally them. There is not life enough left to
indicate the disease or show the remedies that are
wanted. Applications now must be made entirely
in the dark, and leave the effect to chance.”

At this, Mrs. Livermore took the candle and was
proceeding to remove it from the room, when the
doctor, perceiving her mistake, called her back.
He did not mean to administer the medicine literally
in a dark room, but simply in a state of darkness and
ignorance as to the nature of the disease. It was a
very strange case; it was certain life could hold out
but a short time longer; he felt bound to do something,
and therefore proceeded to prepare such applications
and remedies as his best judgment dictated.
These were administered without confidence, and
their effect awaited with painful solicitude. They

-- 107 --

[figure description] Page 107.[end figure description]

either produced no perceptible effect at all, or very
different from the ordinary results of such applications.

“I should like,” said Doctor Longley to the deacon,
“to have you call in Doctor Stubbs; this is a very
extraordinary case, and I should prefer that some
other medical practitioner might be present.”

The deacon accordingly hastened to call Doctor
Stubbs, a young man who had come into the place a
a short time before, with a high reputation, but not a
favorite with the deacon and his family, on account of
his being rather fresh from college, and full of modern
innovations.

After Doctor Stubbs had examined the patient, and
made various inquiries of the family, he and Doctor
Longley held a brief consultation. Their united wisdom,
however, was not sufficient to throw any light
upon the case or to afford any relief.

“Have you thought of poison?” said Doctor
Longley.

“Yes,” said Doctor Stubbs, “but there are certain
indications in the case, which forbid that altogether.
Indeed, I can form no satisfactory opinion about it;
it is the most anomalous case I ever knew.”

Before their conference was brought to a close, the

-- 108 --

[figure description] Page 108.[end figure description]

deacon called them, saying he believed Polly was a
going. They came into the room and hastened to
the bedside.

“Yes,” said Doctor Stubbs, looking at the patient,
“those are dying struggles; in a short time all her
troubles in this life will be over.”

The patient sunk gradually and quietly away, and
in the course of two hours after the arrival of Doctor
Stubbs, all signs of life were gone.

“The Lord's will be done,” said the deacon, as he
stood by the bed and saw her chest heave for the last
time.

Mrs. Gray sat in the corner of the room with her
apron to her face weeping aloud. Old Mrs. Livermore
and two other females, who had been called in
during the night, were already busily employed in
preparing for laying out the corpse.

It was about daybreak when the two doctors left
the house and started for home.

“Very singular case,” said Doctor Stubbs, who
spoke with more ease and freedom, now that they
were out of the way of the afflicted family. “We
ought not to give it up so, Doctor; we ought to follow
this case up till we ascertain what was the cause of
her death. What say to a post mortem examination?”

-- 109 --

[figure description] Page 109.[end figure description]

“I always dislike them,” said Doctor Longley;
“they are ugly uncomfortable jobs; and besides, I
doubt whether the deacon's folks would consent to it.”

“It is important for us, as well as for the cause of
the science,* said Doctor Stubbs, “that something
should be done about it. We are both young, and it
may have an injurious bearing upon our reputation
if we are not able to give any explanation of the case.
I consider my reputation at stake as well as yours, as
I was called in for consultation. There will doubtless
be an hundred rumors afloat, and the older physicians,
who look upon us, you know, with rather an
evil eye, will be pretty sure to lay hold of the matter
and turn it greatly to our disadvantage, if we cannot
show facts for our vindication. The deacon's folks
must consent, and you had better go down after breakfast
and have a talk with the deacon about it.”

Doctor Longley felt the force of the reasoning, and
consented to go. Accordingly, after breakfast, he
returned to Deacon Gray's, and kindly offered his
services, if there was any assistance he could render
in making preparations for the funeral. The deacon
felt much obliged to him, but didn't know as there
was anything for which they particularly needed his
assistance. The doctor then broached the subject of

-- 110 --

[figure description] Page 110.[end figure description]

the very sudden and singular death of Polly, and how
important it was for the living that the causes of such
a sudden death should, if possible, be ascertained, and
delicately hinted that the only means of obtaining
this information, so desirable for the benefit of the
science and so valuable for all living, was by opening
and examining the body after death.

At this the deacon looked up at him with such an
awful expression of holy horror, that the doctor saw
at once it would be altogether useless to pursue the
subject further. Accordingly, after advising, on
account of the warm weather and the patient dying
suddenly and in full blood, not to postpone the funeral
later than that afternoon, the doctor took his leave.

“Well, what is the result?” said Doctor Stubbs, as
Doctor Longley entered his door.

“Oh, as I expected,” said Doctor Longley. “The
moment I hinted at the subject to the deacon, I saw
by his looks, if it were to save his own life and the
lives of all his friends, he never would consent to it.”

“Well, 'tis astonishing,” said Doctor Stubbs, “that
people who have common sense should have so little
sense on a subject of this kind. I won't be baffled so,
Doctor Longley; I'll tell you what I'll do. What
time is she to be buried?”

-- 111 --

[figure description] Page 111.[end figure description]

“This afternoon,” said Doctor Longley.

“In the burying-ground by the old meeting-house
up the road, I suppose,” said Doctor Stubbs.

“Yes, undoubtedly,” replied Dr. Longley.

“Well, I'll have that corpse taken up this night,
and you may depend upon it,” said Doctor Stubbs,
“I'll not only ascertain the cause of her death, but I
want a subject for dissection, and she, having died so
suddenly, will make an excellent one.”

Doctor Longley shuddered a little at the bold project
of Doctor Stubbs. “You know, Doctor, there is
a law against it,” said he, “and besides, the burying-ground
is in such a lonely place and surrounded by
woods, I don't believe you can find anybody with
nerve enough to go there and take up a newly buried
corpse in the night.”

“Let me alone for that,” said Doctor Stubbs. “I
know a chap that would do it every night in the week
if I wanted him to; a friend of mine down there in
the college, in the senior class. He has nerve enough
to go anywhere, and is up to a job of this kind at any
time. The business is all arranged, Doctor, and I shall
go through with it. Joe Palmer is the man for it, and
Rufus Barnes will go with him. I'd go myself, but
it would be more prudent for me to be at home, for in

-- 112 --

[figure description] Page 112.[end figure description]

case of accident, and the thing should be discovered,
suspicion would be likely to fall on me, and it would
be important for me to be able to prove where I was.
Rufus must go to the funeral and see whereabouts the
corpse is buried, so he can find the place in a dark
night, and I shall have to go down to the college the
first of the evening after Joe myself, and get him
started, and then come right home, and stay at home,
so that I can prove an alibi in case of any questions.
Don't I understand it, Doctor?”

“Yes, full well enough,” said Doctor Longley,
“but I had rather you would be in the scrape than I
should.”

That evening, half an hour after dark, there was a
light rap at Joe Palmer's door in the third story of
one of the college buildings. The door was partly
open, and Joe said “Come in.” No one entered, but
in a few moments the rap was heard again. “Come
in,” said Joe. Still no one entered. Presently a
figure, concealed under a cloak and with muffled face,
appeared partly before the door, and said something
in a low voice. Joe looked wild and agitated. Some
college scrape, he thought, but what was the nature of
it he could not divine. The figure looked mysterious.
Presently the voice was heard again, and understood

-- 113 --

[figure description] Page 113.[end figure description]

to utter the word Palmer. Joe was still more agitated,
and looked at his chum most inquiringly. His chum
stepped to the door and asked what was wanting.
The figure drew back into the darkness of the hall,
and answered in a faint voice, that he wanted Palmer.
At last Palmer screwed his resolution up to the sticking
point and ventured as far as the door, while his
chum stepped back into the room. The figure again
came forward and whispered to Palmer to come out,
for he wanted to speak with him.

“But who are you?” said Palmer.

The figure partially uncovered his face, and
whispered “Doctor Stubbs.”

Palmer at once recognized him, and stepped back
as bold as a lion, and took his hat and went out. In
a few minutes he returned and told his chum, with
rather a mysterious air, that he was going out with a
friend to be gone two or three hours, that he need not
feel uneasy about him, and might leave the door
unfastened for him till he returned.

Doctor Stubbs, having given Joe and Rufus full
directions how to proceed, telling them to get a
large wide chaise, so that they could manage to carry
the corpse conveniently, and informing them where
they could find spades and shovels deposited by the

-- 114 --

[figure description] Page 114.[end figure description]

side of the road for the purpose, left them and hastened
home.

“Well now, Rufe,” said Joe, “we'll just go over
to Jake Rider's and get one of his horses and chaise.
But we needn't be in a hurry, for we don't want to
get there much before midnight; and we'll go into
the store here and get a drink of brandy to begin
with, for this kind of business needs a little stimulus.”

Having braced their nerves with a drink of brandy,
they proceeded to Jacob Rider's.

“Jake, give us a horse and chaise to take a ride
three or four hours,” said Joe. You needn't mind
setting up for us; we'll put the horse up when we
come back, and take good care of him; we know
where to put him. We don't want a nag; an old
steady horse that will give us an easy, pleasant ride.”

“Old Tom is jest the horse you want,” said Jacob,
“and there's a good easy going chaise.”

“That chaise isn't wide enough,” said Joe; “give
us the widest one you've got.”

“But that's plenty wide enough for two to ride
in,” said Jacob; “I don't see what you want a wider
chaise than that for.”

“Oh, I like to have plenty of elbow room,” said
Joe.

-- 115 --

[figure description] Page 115.[end figure description]

“Maybe you are going to have a lady to ride
with you,” said Jacob.

Joe laughed, and whispered to Rufus that Jake
had hit nearer the mark than he was aware of.

Jacob selected another chaise. “There is one,”
said he “wide enough for three to ride in, and even
four upon a pinch.”

“That'll do,” said Joe; “now put in old Tom.”

The horse was soon harnessed, and Joe and Rufus
jumped into the chaise and drove off.

“Confound these college chaps,” said Jacob to
himself as they drove out of the yard; “they are
always a sky-larkin' somewhere or other. There's
one thing in it, though, they pay me well for my
horses. But these two fellows wanting such a
broad chaise; they are going to have a real frolic
somewhere to night. I've a plaguy good mind to
jump on to one of the horses and follow, and see
what sort of snuff they are up to. It's so dark I
could do it just as well as not, without the least
danger of their seeing me.”

No sooner thought than done. Jake at once
mounted one of his horses, and followed the chaise.
There was no moon, and the night was cloudy and
dark; but a slight rattle in one of the wheels of the

-- 116 --

[figure description] Page 116.[end figure description]

chaise enabled him easily to follow it, though
entirely out of sight. Having gone about two miles
the chaise stopped at the corner, about a hundred
rods from the house of Dr. Stubbs. Jake got off
and hitched his horse, and crept carefully along by
the side of the fence to see what was done there.
By stooping down and looking up against a clear
patch of sky, he could see one of the two leave the
chaise and go to the fence by the side of the road,
and return again, carrying something in his arms to
the chaise. He repeated this operation twice; but
what he carried Jake could not discern. Perhaps
it might be some baskets of refreshments. They
were going off to some house to have a frolic. The
chaise moved on again, and Jake mounted his horse
and followed. They went up the road till they
came to the old meeting-house; they passed it a
little, and came against the old burying-ground.
The chaise stopped and Jake stopped. The chaise
stood still for the space of about five minutes, and
there was not the least sound to be heard in any
direction. At last, from the little rattle of the chaise
wheel, he perceived they were moving at a moderate
walk. They came to the corner of the burying-ground,
and turned a little out of the road and

-- 117 --

[figure description] Page 117.[end figure description]

stopped the chaise under the shadow of a large
spreading tree, where it could not be perceived by
any one passing in the road, even should the clouds
brush away and leave it starlight.

“It is very odd,” thought Jake, “that they should
stop at such a place as this in a dark night; the last
place in the world I should think of stopping at.”

Jake dismounted and hitched his horse a little distance,
and crept carefully up to watch their movements.
They took something out of the chaise,
passed along by the fence, went through the little
gate, and entered the burying-ground. Here a new
light seemed to flash upon Jake's mind.

“I hope no murder has been committed,” thought
he to himself; “but it's pretty clear something is to
be buried here to-night that the world must know
nothing about.”

Jake was perplexed, and in doubt as to what he
should do. He had some conscience, and felt as
though he ought to investigate the matter, and put a
stop to the business if anything very wicked was
going on. But then there were other considerations
that weighed on the other side. If murder had been
committed, it was within the range of possibility, and
not very unreasonable to suppose, that murder might

-- 118 --

[figure description] Page 118.[end figure description]

be committed again to conceal it. There were two
of them, and he was alone. It might not be entirely
safe for him to interfere. He would hardly care to
be thrown into a grave and buried there that night.
And then, again, Jake was avaricious, and wouldn't
care to break friends with those college fellows, for
they paid him a good deal of money. On the whole,
he was resolved to keep quiet and see the end of the
matter.

Joe and Rufus walked two-thirds of the way
across the burying-ground and stopped. Jake followed
at a careful distance, and when he found they
had stopped, he crept slowly up on the darkest side,
so near that, partly by sight and partly by sound, he
could discover what took place. There was not a
loud word spoken, though he occasionally heard them
whisper to each other. Then he heard the sound of
shovels and the moving of the gravel.

“It is true,” said Jake to himself, “they are digging
a grave!” and the cold sweat started on his forehead.
Still he resolved to be quiet and see it all
through. Once or twice they stopped and seemed to
be listening, as though they thought they heard some
noise. Then he could hear them whisper to each
other, but could not understand what they said. After

-- 119 --

[figure description] Page 119.[end figure description]

they had been digging and throwing out gravel some
time, he heard a sound like the light knock of a shovel
upon the lid of a coffin.

“Take care,” said Joe, in a very loud whisper,
“it'll never do to make such a noise as that; it
could be heard almost half a mile; do be more careful.”

Again they pursued their work, and occasionally a
hollow sound like a shovel scraping over a coffin was
heard. At length their work of throwing out gravel
seemed to be completed; and then there was a pause
for some time, interrupted occasionally by sounds of
screwing, and wedging, and wrenching; and at last
they seemed to be lifting some heavy substance out
of the grave. They carried it toward the gate. Jake
was lying almost upon the ground, and as they passed
near him, he could perceive they were carrying some
white object about the length and size of a corpse.
They went out at the gate and round to the chaise;
and presently they returned again, and appeared by
their motions and the sound to be filling up the grave.
Jake took this opportunity to go and examine the
chaise; and sure enough he found there a full-sized
corpse, wrapped in a white sheet, lying in the centre
of the chaise, the feet resting on the floor, the body

-- 120 --

[figure description] Page 120.[end figure description]

leaning across the seat, and the head resting against
the centre of the back part of the chaise.

“Only some scrape of the doctor's after all,” said
Jake to himself, who now began to breathe somewhat
easier than he had done for some time past. “But
it's rather shameful business, though; this must be
Deacon Gray's daughter, I'm sure; and it's a shame
to treat the old man in this shabby kind of way. I'll
put a stop to this, anyhow. Polly Gray was too good
a sort of a gal to be chopped up like a quarter of beef,
according to my way of thinking, and it shan't be.”

Jake then lifted the corpse out of the chaise, carried
it a few rods farther from the road, laid it down,
took off the winding-sheet, wrapped it carefully round
himself, went back and got into the chaise, and placed
himself exactly in the position in which the corpse
had been left. He had remained in that situation but
a short time before Joe and Rufus, having filled up
the grave and made all right there, came and seated
themselves in the chaise, one on each side of the
corpse, and drove slowly and quietly off.

“I'm glad it's over,” said Rufus, fetching a long
breath. “My heart's been in my mouth the whole
time. I thought I heard somebody coming half a
dozen times; and then it's such a dismal gloomy place

-- 121 --

[figure description] Page 121.[end figure description]

too. You would n't catch me there again, in such a
scrape, I can tell you..”

“Well, I was calm as clock-work the whole time,”
said Joe. “You should have such pluck as I've got,
Rufe; nothing ever frightens me.”

At that moment the chaise wheel struck a stone,
and caused the corpse to roll suddenly against Joe.
He clapped up his hand to push it a little back, and
instead of a cold clammy corpse, he felt his hand
pressed against a warm face of live flesh. As quick
as though he had been struck by lightning, Joe
dropped the reins, and with one bound sprang a rod
from the chaise and ran for his life. Rufus, without
knowing the cause of this strange and sudden movement,
sprang from the other side with almost equal
agility, and followed Joe with his utmost speed. They
scarcely stopped to take breath till they had run two
miles and got into Joe's room at the college, and shut
the door and locked themselves in. Here, having
sworn Joe's chum to secresy, they began to discuss
the matter. But concerning the very strange warmth
of the corpse they could come to no satisfactory conclusion.
Whether it could be, that they had not
actually taken up the corpse from the grave, but
before they had got down to it some evil spirit had

-- 122 --

[figure description] Page 122.[end figure description]

come in the shape of the corpse and deceived them,
or whether it was actually the corpse, and it had come
to life, or whether it was the ghost of Polly Gray,
were questions they could not decide. They agreed,
however, to go the next morning by sunrise on to the
ground, and see what discoveries they could make.

When Jacob Rider found himself alone in the
chaise, being convinced that Joe and Rufus would
not come back to trouble him that night, he turned
about and drove back to the burying-ground.

“Now,” said Jake, “I think the best thing I can
do, for all concerned, is to put Polly Gray back
where she belongs, and there let her rest.”

Accordingly Jake went to work and opened the
grave again, carried the corpse and replaced it as
well as he could; and filled up the grave and rounded
it off in good order. He then took his horse and
chaise and returned home, well satisfied with his
night's work.

The next morning, some time before sunrise, and
before any one was stirring in the neighborhood,
Joe and Rufus were at the old burying-ground.
They went round the inclosure, went to the tree
where they had fastened their horse, and looked on
every side, but discovered nothing. They went

-- 123 --

[figure description] Page 123.[end figure description]

through the gate, and across to the grave where
they had been the night before. The grave looked
all right, as though it had not been touched since
the funeral. They could see nothing of the horse
or chaise, and they concluded if the corpse or evil
spirit, or whatever it was in the chaise, had left the
horse to himself, he probably found his way directly
home. They thought it best therefore immediately
to go and see Jake, and make some kind of an
explanation. So they went over immediately to
Jake's stable, and found the horse safe in his stall.
Presently Jake made his appearance.

“Well, your confounded old horse,” said Joe,
“would n't stay hitched last night. He left us in the
lurch, and we had to come home afoot. I see he's
come home, though. Chaise all right, I hope?”

“Yes, all right,” said Jake.

“Well, how much for the ride,” said Joe, “seeing
we did n't ride but one way?”

“Seeing you rode part way back,” said Jake, “I
shall charge you fifty dollars.”

Joe started and looked round, but a knowing leer
in Jake's eye convinced him it was no joke. He
handed Jake the fifty dollars, at the same time
placing his finger emphatically across his lips; and

-- 124 --

[figure description] Page 124.[end figure description]

Jake took the fifty dollars, whispering in Joe's ear,
“dead folks tell no tales.” Jake then put his finger
across his lips, and Joe and Rufus bade him good
morning.

-- 125 --

p689-134 CHAPTER VI. JERRY GUTTRIDGE.

[figure description] Page 125.[end figure description]

Oh, for `the good old days of Adam and Eve!”
when vagabond idlers were not; or the good old days
of the pilgrim fathers of New England, when they
were suitably rewarded! That idlers could not bide
those days, there is extant the following testimony.
In the early court records of that portion of the old
Bay State called the District of Maine, in the year
1656, we have the following entry of a presentment
by a grand jury:—

“We present Jerry Guttridge for an idle person,
and not providing for his family, and for giving
reproachful language to Mr. Nat. Frier, when he
reproved him for his idleness.

“The Court, for his offence, adjudges the delinquent
to have twenty lashes on his back, and to bring security
to the Court to be of better behavior in providing
for his family.”—[A True Extract from the Court
Records.
]

-- 126 --

[figure description] Page 126.[end figure description]

The whole history of this affair, thus faintly shadowed
forth in these few lines, has recently come to
light, and is now published for the benefit of the
world, as hereafter followeth.

“What shall we have for dinner, Mr. Guttridge?”
said the wife of Jerry Guttridge, in a sad, desponding
tone, as her husband came into their log hovel, from
a neighboring grog-shop, about twelve o'clock on a
hot July day.

“Oh, pick up something,” said Jerry, “and I wish
you would be spry and get it ready, for I'm hungry
now, and I want to go back to the shop; for Sam Willard
and Seth Harmon are coming over, by an' by, to
swop horses, and they'll want me to ride 'em. Come,
stir around; I can't wait.”

“We have n't got anything at all in the house to
eat,” said Mrs. Guttridge. “What shall I get?”

“Well, cook something,” said Jerry; “no matter
what it is.”

“But, Mr. Guttridge, we have n't got the least thing
in the house to cook.”

“Well, well, pick up something,” said Jerry, rather
snappishly, “for I'm in a hurry.”

-- 127 --

[figure description] Page 127.[end figure description]

“I can't make victuals out of nothing,” said the
wife; “if you'll only bring me anything in the world
into the house to cook, I'll cook it. But I tell you we
have n't got a mouthful of meat in the house, nor a
mouthful of bread, nor a speck of meal; and the last
potatoes we had in the house, we ate for breakfast;
and you know we didn't have more than half enough
for breakfast, neither.”

“Well, what have you been doing all this forenoon,”
said Jerry, “that you have n't picked up something?
Why did n't you go over to Mr. Whitman's
and borrow some meal?”

“Because,” said Mrs. Guttridge, “we've borrowed
meal there three times that is n't returned yet; and I
was ashamed to go again till that was paid. And
beside, the baby's cried so, I've had to 'tend him the
whole forenoon, and could n't go out.”

“Then you a'n't a-goin' to give us any dinner, are
you?” said Jerry, with a reproachful tone and look.
“I pity the man that has a helpless, shiftless wife; he
has a hard row to hoe. What's become of that fish I
brought in yesterday?”

“Why, Mr. Guttridge,” said his wife, with tears in
her eyes, “you and the children ate that fish for your
supper last night. I never tasted a morsel of it, and

-- 128 --

[figure description] Page 128.[end figure description]

have n't tasted anything but potatoe sthese two days;
and I'm so faint now I can hardly stand.”

“Always a-grumblin',” said Jerry; “I can't never
come into the house but what I must hear a fuss about
something or other. What's this boy snivelling
about?” he continued, turning to little Bobby, his
oldest boy, a little ragged, dirty-faced, sickly-looking
thing, about six years old; at the same time giving
the child a box on the ear, which laid him his length
on the floor. “Now shet up!” said Jerry, “or I'll
larn you to be crying about all day for nothing.”

The tears rolled afresh down the cheeks of Mrs.
Guttridge; she sighed heavily as she raised the child
from the floor, and seated him on a bench on the opposite
side of the room.

“What is Bob crying about?” said Jerry, fretfully.

“Why, Mr. Guttridge,” said his wife, sinking upon
the bench beside her little boy, and wiping the tears
with her apron, “the poor child has been crying for a
piece of bread these two hours. He's eat nothing to-day
but one potatoe, and I s'pose the poor thing is
half starved.”

At this moment their neighbor, Mr. Nat. Frier, a
substantial farmer, and a worthy man, made his appearance
at the door; and as it was wide open, he

-- 129 --

[figure description] Page 129.[end figure description]

walked in and took a seat. He knew the destitute
condition of Guttridge's family, and had often relieved
their distresses. His visit at the present time was
partly an errand of charity; for, being in want of
some extra labor in his haying field that afternoon,
and knowing that Jerry was doing nothing, while his
family was starving, he thought he would endeavor to
get him to work for him, and pay him in provisions.

Jerry seated himself rather sullenly on a broken
backed chair, the only sound one in the house being
occupied by Mr. Frier, toward whom he cast sundry
gruff looks and surly glances. The truth was, Jerry
had not received the visits of his neighbors, of late
years, with a very gracious welcome. He regarded
them rather as spies, who came to search out the nakedness
of the land, than as neighborly visitors, calling
to exchange friendly salutations. He said not a word;
and the first address of Mr. Frier was to little Bobby.

“What's the matter with little Bobby?” said he, in
a gentle tone; “come, my little fellow, come here
and tell me what's the matter.”

“Go, run, Bobby; go and see Mr. Frier,” said the
mother, slightly pushing him forward with her hand.

The boy, with one finger in his mouth, and the tears
still rolling over his dirty face, edged along sidewise

-- 130 --

[figure description] Page 130.[end figure description]

up to Mr. Frier, who took him in his lap, and asked
him again what was the matter.

“I want a piece of bread!” said Bobby.

“And won't your mother give you some?” said
Mr. Frier, tenderly.

“She ha'n't got none,” replied Bobby, “nor 'taters
too.” Mrs. Guttridge's tears told the rest of the
story. The worthy farmer knew they were entirely
out of provisions again, and he forbore to ask any
further questions; but told Bobby if he would go
over to his house, he would give him something to
eat. Then turning to Jerry, said he:—

“Neighbor Guttridge, I've got four tons of hay
down, that needs to go in this afternoon, for it looks
as if we should have rain to-morrow; and I've come
over to see if I can get you to go and help me. If
you'll go this afternoon, and assist me to get it in, I'll
give you a bushel of meal, or a half bushel of meal
and a bushel of potatoes, and two pounds of
pork.”

“I can't go,” said Jerry, “I've got something else
to do.”

“Oh, well,” said Mr Frier, “if you've got anything
else to do that will be more profitable, I'm glad of it,
for there's enough hands that I can get; only I

-- 131 --

[figure description] Page 131.[end figure description]

thought you might like to go, bein' you was scant of
provisions.”

“Do pray go, Mr. Guttridge!” said his wife, with
a beseeching look, “for you are only going over to
the shop to ride them horses, and that won't do no
good; you'll only spend all the afternoon for nothin',
and then we shall have to go to bed without our supper,
again. Do pray go, Mr. Guttridge, do!”

“I wish you would hold your everlasting clack;”
said Jerry; “you are always full of complainings.
It's got to be a fine time of day, if the women are
a-goin' to rule the roast. I shall go over and ride them
horses, and it's no business to you nor nobody else;
and if you are too lazy to get your own supper, you
may go without it; that's all I've got to say.”

With that he aimed for the door, when Mr. Frier
addressed him as follows:—

“Now I must say, neighbor Guttridge, if you are
going to spend the afternoon over to the shop, to ride
horses for them jockeys, and leave your family without
provisions, when you have a good chance to 'arn
enough this afternoon to last them nigh about a week,
I must say, neighbor Guttridge, that I think you are
not in the way of your duty.”

Upon this Jerry whirled round, and looked Mr.

-- 132 --

[figure description] Page 132.[end figure description]

Frier full in the face, “grinning horribly a ghastly
smile,” and said he,

“You old, miserable, dirty, meddling vagabond!
you are a scoundrel and a scape-gallows, and an
infernal small piece of a man, I think! I've as good
a mind to kick you out of doors, as ever I had to eat!
Who made you a master over me, to be telling me
what's my duty? You better go home and take care
of your own brats, and let your neighbors' alone!”

Mr. Frier sat and looked Jerry calmly in the face,
without uttering a syllable; while he, having blown
his blast, marched out of doors, and steered directly
for the grog-shop, leaving his wife to “pick up something,”
if she could, to keep herself and children from
absolute starvation.

Mr. Frier was a benevolent man and a Christian,
and in the true spirit of Christianity he always sought
to relieve distress wherever he found it. He was
endowed, too, with a good share of plain common
sense, and knew something of human nature; and as
he was well aware that Mrs. Guttridge really loved
her husband, notwithstanding his idle habits, and
cold, brutal treatment to his family, he forebore to
remark upon the scene which had just passed; but
telling the afflicted woman he would send her

-- 133 --

[figure description] Page 133.[end figure description]

something to eat, he took little Bobby by the hand, and
led him home. A plate of victuals was set before the
child, who devoured it with a greediness that was
piteous to behold.

“Poor cre'tur!” said Mrs. Frier, “why, he's half
starved! Betsey, bring him a dish of bread and
milk; that will set the best on his poor, empty,
starved stomach.”

Betsey ran and got the bowl of bread and milk, and
little Bobby's hand soon began to move from the dish
to his mouth, with a motion as steady and rapid as
the pendulum of a clock. The whole family stood
and looked on, with pity and surprise, until he had
finished his meal, or rather until he had eaten as
much as they dared allow him to eat at once; for
although he had devoured a large plate of meat and
vegetables, and two dishes of bread and milk, his
appetite seemed as ravenous as when he first began;
and he still, like the memorable Oliver Twist, “asked
for more.”

While Bobby had been eating, Mr. Frier had been
relating to his family the events which had occurred at
Guttridge's house, and the starving condition of the
inmates; and it was at once agreed that something
should be sent over immediately; for they all said

-- 134 --

[figure description] Page 134.[end figure description]

“Mrs. Guttridge was a clever woman, and it was a
shame that she should be left to suffer so.”

Accordingly, a basket was filled with bread, a jug
of milk, and some meat and vegetables, ready cooked,
which had been left from their dinner; and Betsey
ran and brought a pie, made from their last year's
dried pumpkins, and asked her mother if she might
not put that in, “so the poor starving cre'turs might
have a little taste of something that was good.”

“Yes,” said her mother, “and put in a bit of
cheese with it; I don't think we shall be any the
poorer for it; for `he that giveth to the poor lendeth
to the Lord.'”

“Yes, yes,” said Mr. Frier, “and I guess you may
as well put in a little dried pumpkin; she can stew it
up for the little ones, and it'll be good for 'em.
We've got a plenty of green stuff a-growin', to last
till pumpkins come again.” So a quantity of dried
pumpkin was also packed in the basket, and the pie
laid on the top, and George was despatched, in company
with little Bobby, to carry it over.

Mr. Frier's benevolent feelings had become highly
excited. He forgot his four tons of hay, and sat
down to consult with his wife about what could be
done for the Guttridge family. Something must be

-- 135 --

[figure description] Page 135.[end figure description]

done soon; he was not able to support them all the
time; and if they were left alone much longer they
would starve. He told his wife he “had a good mind
to go and enter a complaint to the grand jury agin'
Jerry, for a lazy, idle person, that did n't provide for
his family. The court sets at Saco to-morrow, and
don't you think, wife, I had better go and do it?”

His wife thought he had better go over first and
talk with Mrs. Guttridge about it; and if she was
willing he had better do it. Mr. Frier said, he
“could go over and talk with her, but he did n't think
it would be the least use, for she loved Jerry, ugly as
he was, and he did n't believe she would be willing to
have him punished by the court.”

However, after due consultation, he concluded to
go over and have a talk with Mrs. Guttridge about
the matter. Accordingly, he took his hat and walked
over. He found the door open, as usual, and walked
in without ceremony. Here he beheld the whole
family, including Jerry himself, seated at their little
pine table, doing ample justice to their basket of provisions
which he had just before sent them. He
observed the pie had been cut into pieces, and one
half of it, and he thought rather the largest half, was
laid on Jerry's plate, the rest being cut up into small

-- 136 --

[figure description] Page 136.[end figure description]

bits, and divided among the children. Mrs. Guttridge
had reserved none to herself, except a small
spoonful of the soft part with which she was trying
to feed the baby. The other eatables seemed to be
distributed very much in the same proportion.

Mr. Frier was a cool, considerate man, whose passions
were always under the most perfect control;
but he always confessed, for years afterwards, “that
for a minute or two, he thought he felt a little something
like anger rising up in his stomach!”

He sat and looked on until they had finished their
meal, and Jerry had eaten bread, and meat, and
vegetables enough for two common men's dinner, and
swallowed his half of the pie, and a large slice of
cheese by way of dessert; and then rose, took his
hat, and without saying a word, marched deliberately
out of the house, directing his course again to the
grog-shop.

Mr. Frier now broached the subject of his errand
to Mrs. Guttridge. He told her the neighbors could
not afford to support her family much longer, and
unless her husband went to work he did n't see but
they would have to starve.

Mrs. Guttridge began to cry. She said “she did n't
know what they should do; she had talked as long as

-- 137 --

[figure description] Page 137.[end figure description]

talking would do any good; but somehow Mr. Guttridge
did n't seem to love work. She believed it
was n't his natur' to work.”

“Well, Mrs. Guttridge, do you believe the Scriptures?”
said Mr. Frier, solemnly.

“I'm sure I do,” said Mrs. Guttridge; “I believe
all there is in the Bible.”

“And don't you know,” said Mr. Frier, “the Bible
says, `He that will not work, neither shall he eat.'”

“I know there's something in the Bible like that,”
said Mrs. Guttridge, with a very serious look.

“Then do you think it right,” said Mr. Frier,
“when your neighbors send you in a basket of provisions,
do you think it right that Mr. Guttridge, who
won't work and 'arn a mouthful himself, should sit
down and eat more than all the rest of you, and pick
out the best part of it, too?”

“Well, I don't suppose it's right,” said Mrs. Guttridge,
thoughtfully; “but somehow, Mr. Guttridge is
so hearty, it seems as if he would faint away, if he
didn 't have more than the rest of us to eat.”

“Well, are you willing to go on in this way?” continued
Mr. Frier, “in open violation of the Scriptures,
and keep yourself and children every day in danger
of starving?”

-- 138 --

[figure description] Page 138.[end figure description]

“What can I do, Mr. Frier?” said Mrs. Guttridge,
bursting into a flood of tears; “I've talked, and it's
no use; Mr. Guttridge, won't work; it don't seem to
be in him. Maybe if you should talk to him, Mr.
Frier, he might do better.”

“No, that would be no use,” said Mr. Frier.
“When I was over here before, you see how he took
it, jest because I spoke to him about going over to the
shop, when he ought to be to work, to get something
for his family to eat. You see how mad he was, and
how provoking he talked to me. It's no use for me
to say anything to him; but I think, Mrs. Guttridge,
if somebody should complain to the Grand Jury
about him, the Court would make him go to work.
And if you are willing for it, I think I should feel it
my duty to go and complain of him.”

“Well, I don't know but it would be best,” said
Mrs. Guttridge, “and if you think it would make him
go to work, I'm willing you should. When will the
Court sit?”

“To-morrow,” said Mr. Frier; “and I'll give up
all other business, and go and attend to it.”

“But what will the Court do to him, Mr. Frier?”
asked Mrs. Guttridge.

“Well, I don't know,” said Mr. Frier, “but I

-- 139 --

[figure description] Page 139.[end figure description]

expect they'll punish him; and I know they'll make him
go to work.”

“Punish him!” exclaimed Mrs. Guttridge, with a
troubled air. “Seems to me I don't want to have him
punished. But do you think, Mr. Frier, they will
hurt him any?”

“Well, I think it's likely,” said Mr. Frier, “they
will hurt him some; but you must remember, Mrs.
Guttridge, it is better once to smart than always to
ache. Remember, too, you'll be out of provisions
again by to-morrow. Your neighbors can't support
your family all the time; and if your husband don't
go to work, you'll be starving again.”

“Oh dear—well, I don't know!” said Mrs. Guttridge,
with tears in her eyes. “You may do jest as
you think best about it, Mr. Frier; that is, if you
don't think they'll hurt him.”

Mr. Frier returned home; but the afternoon was so
far spent that he was able to get in only one ton of
his hay, leaving the other three tons out, to take the
chance of the weather. He and his wife spent the
evening in discussing what course was best to pursue
with regard to the complaint against Mr. Guttridge;
but, notwithstanding his wife was decidedly in favor
of his going the next morning and entering the

-- 140 --

[figure description] Page 140.[end figure description]

complaint, since Mrs. Guttridge had consented, yet Mr.
Frier was undecided. He did not like to do it; Mr.
Guttridge was a neighbor, and it was an unpleasant
business. But when he arose the next morning, looked
out, and beheld his three tons of hay drenched with
a heavy rain, and a prospect of a continued storm, he
was not long in making up his mind.

“Here,” said he, “I spent a good part of the day,
yesterday, in looking after Guttridge's family, to keep
them from starving; and now, by this means, I've
nigh about as good as lost three tons of hay. I
don't think it's my duty to put up with it any
longer.”

Accordingly, as soon as breakfast was over, Mr.
Frier was out, spattering along in the mud and rain,
with his old great-coat thrown over his shoulders, the
sleeves flapping loosely down by his side, and his
drooping hat twisted awry, wending his way to Court,
to appear before the Grand Jury.

“Well, Mr. Frier, what do you want?” asked the
foreman, as the complainant entered the room.

“I come to complain of Jerry Guttridge to the
Grand Jury,” replied Mr. Frier, taking off his hat,
and shaking the rain from it.

“Why, what has Jerry Guttridge done?” said the

-- 141 --

[figure description] Page 141.[end figure description]

foreman. “I didn't think he had life enough to do
anything worth complaining of to the Grand
Jury.”

“It's because he has n't got life enough to do anything,”
said Mr. Frier, “that I've come to complain
of him. The fact is, Mr. Foreman, he's a lazy, idle
fellow, and won't work, nor provide nothin' for his
family to eat; and they've been half starving this
long time; and the neighbors have had to keep
sending in something all the time, to keep 'em
alive.”

“But,” said the foreman, “Jerry's a peaceable kind
of a chap, Mr. Frier; has anybody ever talked to him
about it in a neighborly way, and advised him to do
differently? And maybe he has no chance to work
where he could get anything for it.”

“I am sorry to say,” replied Mr. Frier, “that he's
been talked to a great deal, and it don't do no good;
and I tried hard to get him to work for me yesterday
afternoon, and offered to give him victuals enough to
last his family 'most a week, but I couldn't get him
to, and he went off to the grog-shop to see some
jockeys swop horses. And when I told him, calmly,
I did n't think he was in the way of his duty, he flew
in a passion, and called me an old, miserable, dirty,

-- 142 --

[figure description] Page 142.[end figure description]

meddling vagabond, and a scoundrel, and a scape-gallows,
and an infernal small piece of a man!”

“Abominable!” exclaimed one of the jury; “who
ever heard of such outrageous conduct?”

“What a vile, blasphemous wretch!” exclaimed
another; “I shouldn't a wondered if he'd a fell dead
on the spot.”

The foreman asked Mr. Frier if Jerry had “used
them very words.”

“Exactly them words, every one of 'em,” said Mr.
Frier.

“Well,” said the foreman, “then there is no more
to be said. Jerry certainly deserves to be indicted,
if anybody in this world ever did.”

Accordingly the indictment was drawn up, a warrant
was issued, and the next day Jerry was brought
before the Court to answer to the charges preferred
against him. Mrs. Sally Guttridge and Mr. Nat.
Frier were summoned as witnesses. When the
honorable Court was ready to hear the case, the clerk
called Jerry Guttridge, and bade him to hearken to
an indictment found against him by the grand inquest
for the District of Maine, now sitting at Saco, in the
words following, viz:—

“We present Jerry Guttridge for an idle person,

-- 143 --

[figure description] Page 143.[end figure description]

and not providing for his family; and giving
reproachful language to Mr. Nat. Frier, when he
reproved him for his idleness.” “Jerry Guttridge,
what say you to this indictment? Are you guilty
thereof, or not guilty?”

“Not guilty,” said Jerry, “and here's my wife can
tell you the same any day. Sally, have n't I always
provided for my family?”

“Why, yes,” said Mrs. Guttridge, “I don't know
but you have as well as”—

“Stop, stop!” said the Judge, looking down over
the top of his spectacles at the witness; “stop, Mrs.
Guttridge; you must not answer questions until you
have been sworn.”

The Court then directed the clerk to swear the witnesses;
whereupon, he called Nat. Frier and Sally
Guttridge to come forward, and hold up their right
hands. Mr. Frier advanced, with a ready, honest air,
and held up his hand. Mrs. Guttridge lingered a
little behind; but when at last she faltered along,
with feeble and hesitating step, and held up her thin,
trembling hand, and raised her pale blue eyes, half
swimming in tears, towards the Court, and exhibited
her care-worn features, which, though sun-burned,
were pale and sickly, the Judge had in his own mind

-- 144 --

[figure description] Page 144.[end figure description]

more than half decided the case against Jerry. The
witnesses having been sworn, Mrs. Guttridge was
called to the stand.

“Now, Mrs. Guttridge,” said the Judge, “you are
not obliged to testify against your husband any more
than you choose; your testimony must be voluntary.
The Court will ask you questions touching the case,
and you may answer them or not, as you think best.
And, in the first place, I will ask you whether your
husband neglects to provide for the necessary wants
of his family; and whether you do, or do not, have comfortable
food and clothing for yourself and children?”

“Well, we go pretty hungry a good deal of the
time,” said Mrs. Guttridge, trembling; “but I don't
know but Mr. Guttridge does the best he can about
it. There don't seem to be any victuals that he can
get, a good deal of the time.”

“Well, is he, or is he not, in the habit of spending
his time idly when he might be at work, and earning
something for his family to live upon?”

“Why, as to that,” replied the witness, “Mr. Guttridge
don't work much; but I don't know as he can
help it; it does n't seem to be his natur' to work.
Somehow, he don't seem to be made like other folks;
for if he tries ever so much, he can't never work but

-- 145 --

[figure description] Page 145.[end figure description]

a few minutes at a time; the natur' don't seem to be
in him.”

“Well, well,” said the Judge, casting a dignified
and judicial glance at the culprit, who stood with his
mouth wide open, and eyes fixed on the Court with an
intentness that showed he began to take some interest
in the matter; “well, well, perhaps the Court will be
able to put the natur' in him.”

Mrs. Guttridge was directed to step aside, and Mr.
Nat. Frier was called to the stand. His testimony
was very much to the point; clear and conclusive.
But as the reader is already in possession of the substance
of it, it is unnecessary to recapitulate it.
Suffice it to say, that when he was called upon to
repeat the reproachful language which Jerry had
bestowed upon the witness, there was much shuddering,
and an awful rolling of eyes, throughout the
court room. Even the prisoner's face kindled almost
up to a blaze, and thick drops of sweat were seen to
start from his forehead. The Judge, to be sure,
retained a dignified self-possession, and settling back
in his chair, said it was not necessary to question the
witness any further; the case was clearly made out;
Jerry Guttridge was unquestionably guilty of the
charges preferred against him.

-- 146 --

[figure description] Page 146.[end figure description]

The Court, out of delicacy toward the feelings of
his wife, refrained from pronouncing sentence until
she had retired, which she did on an intimation being
given her that the case was closed, and she could
return home. Jerry was then called and ordered to
hearken to his sentence, as the Court had recorded it.

Jerry stood up and faced the Court, with fixed eyes
and gaping mouth, and the clerk repeated as follows:—

“Jerry Guttridge! you have been found guilty of
being an idle and lazy person, and not providing for
your family, and giving reproachful language to Mr.
Nat. Frier, when he reproved you for your idleness.
The Court orders that you receive twenty smart lashes,
with the cat-o'-nine-tails, upon your naked back, and
that this sentence be executed forthwith, by the constables,
at the whipping-post in the yard adjoining
the court-house.”

Jerry dropped his head, and his face assumed divers
deep colors, sometimes red, and sometimes shading
upon the blue. He tried to glance round upon the
assembled multitude, but his look was very sheepish;
and, unable to stand the gaze of the hundreds of eyes
that were upon him, he settled back on a bench, leaned
his head on his hand, and looked steadily upon the

-- 147 --

[figure description] Page 147.[end figure description]

floor. The constables having been directed by the
Court to proceed forthwith to execute the sentence,
they led him out into the yard, put his arms round
the whipping-post, and tied his hands together. He
submitted without resistance; but when they commenced
tying his hands round the post, he began to
cry and beg, and promised better fashions if they
would only let him go this time. But the constables
told him it was too late now; the sentence of the Court
had been passed, and the punishment must be inflicted.
The whole throng of spectators had issued from
the court-house, and stood round in a large ring, to
see the sentence enforced. The Judge himself had
stepped to a side window, which commanded a view
of the yard, and stood peering solemnly through his
spectacles to see that the ceremony was duly performed.
All things being in readiness, the stoutest constable
took the cat-o'-nine-tails, and laid the blows
heavily across the naked back of the victim. Nearly
every blow brought blood, and as they successively
fell, Jerry jumped and screamed, so that he might
have been heard well-nigh a mile. When the twenty
blows were counted, and the ceremony was ended, he
was loosed from his confinement, and told that he
might go. He put on his garments, with a sullen but

-- 148 --

[figure description] Page 148.[end figure description]

subdued air, and without stopping to pay his respects
to the Court, or even to bid any one good-by, he
straightened for home as fast as he could go.

Mrs. Guttridge met him at the door, with a kind
and piteous look, and asked him if they hurt him.
He made no reply, but pushed along into the house.
There he found the table set, and well supplied, for
dinner; for Mrs. Guttridge, partly through the kindness
of Mr. Frier, and partly from her own exertions,
had managed to “pick up something” that served to
make quite a comfortable meal. Jerry ate his dinner
in silence, but his wife thought he manifested more
tenderness and less selfishness than she had known
him to exhibit for several years; for, instead of appropriating
the most and the best of the food to himself,
he several times placed fair proportions of it upon the
plates of his wife and each of the children.

The next morning, before the sun had dried the dew
from the grass, whoever passed the haying field of
Mr. Nat. Frier might have beheld Jerry Guttridge
busily at work, shaking out the wet hay to the sun;
and for a month afterward the passer-by might have
seen him every day, early and late, in that and the
adjoining fields, a perfect pattern of industry.

A change soon became perceptible in the condition

-- 149 --

[figure description] Page 149.[end figure description]

and circumstances of his family. His house began to
wear more of an air of comfort, outside and in. His
wife improved in health and spirits, and little Bobby
became a fat, hearty boy, and grew like a pumpkin.
And years afterward Mrs. Guttridge was heard to say
that, “somehow, ever since that 'ere trial, Mr. Guttridge's
natur' seemed to be entirely changed.”

-- 150 --

p689-159 CHAPTER VII. SEATING THE PARISH.

“Order, is Heaven's first law; and this confess'd,
Some are, and must be, greater than the rest.”

[figure description] Page 150.[end figure description]

So thought the good people of the old town of
Brookhaven, about a hundred and forty years ago,
when they enacted the law for for seating the parish
at church.
Do any of our distant readers want information
as to the locality and geography of Brookhaven?
We may as well premise in the outset, that it is on
Long island, some sixty miles or so from the city of
New York, and is the largest town in territory in
Suffolk County, containing more than a hundred
thousand acres, and stretching across the whole width
of the island. It contains seven or eight thousand
inhabitants, who are distributed in several villages
along the shores of the Sound and the Atlantic, while the
middle portions of the town still remain covered with
pine forests, abounding with deer and other wild game.

The early settlers of this part of Long Island were

-- 151 --

[figure description] Page 151.[end figure description]

mostly from New England, and the inhabitants still
retain much of the primitive Puritan character of
their forefathers. A company from Boston and its
vicinity, commenced a settlement in Brookhaven as
early as sixteen hundred and fifty-five; and in ten
years the settlement had increased so much, that they
called a minister of the gospel to come and reside
among them. Their choice of pastor was, of course,
from the good old Pilgrim stock; for where else could
they go? There was no other race among men or
under heaven, according to their ideas, “whereby they
could be saved.” Accordingly, they settled as their first
minister, Rev. Nathan Brewster, a grandson of Elder
William Brewster, who came over in the May Flower.

Thus having proved the origin of the good people
of Brookhaven, it follows as a matter of course, that
they were not only a pious people, a church-going
people, but also great lovers of order and decorum.
Happily, so important a conclusion does not rest for
its authority on mere inference alone; it is sustained
by ample and positive proof in the shape of duly
authenticated records.

Like most new and remote settlements, the town
might, for some time, be regarded as a sort of independent
democracy. The people met together in a

-- 152 --

[figure description] Page 152.[end figure description]

body, and adopted rules, and made laws, and elected
magistrates and other officers, to see the laws properly
executed. Their attendance at church, also, was, for
many years, conducted very much on the democratic
principle. Indeed this is most usually the case with
churches in all new settlements. The meeting-house,
as well as the nation, experiences its revolutions, and
in the progress of society, passes through all the regular
forms of government.

It has its period of pure democracy; when the temple
is a humble, unfinished structure, with open doors
and windows, and the people come and go at all times
during the hours of worship, as best suits their pleasure.
Then it is, that the congregation sit on stout
longitudinal planks supported by blocks of wood, and
on transverse boards resting on the aforesaid planks.
These planks and boards being common property, vested
in the body politic, the respective seats, on the Sabbath,
are seized and rightfully held, like a newly discovered
country, by the first occupant; thus affording
a practical illustration at the same time both of their
political and religious faith, viz.:—that the people of
the parish are all equal, and that God is no respecter
of persons.

In progress of time, the meeting-house glides

-- 153 --

[figure description] Page 153.[end figure description]

naturally into the aristocratic form of government. Wealth
has begun to make distinctions in society. A better
building is erected, or the old one repaired and put in
a condition more suitable to the times. Permanent
fixtures take the place of the loose planks and boards,
and low partition walls divide the floor into distinct
compartments. This revolution has been brought on
and carried out by the wealth of the few who had the
means to sustain it, and they in return receive the
honors and distinctions usually bestowed on the successful
leaders of a revolution. The many look up to
them with reverence, and stand back and give place
to them whenever they appear. The affairs of the
meeting-house are now principally under their management
and control, and having taken possession of the
most honorable seats, and provided that the most
respectable among the mass should take the seats of
the next highest grade, the remainder of the house is
left free for promiscuous occupation.

Years pass on; and by the diffusion of wealth and
knowledge, and the increase of numbers, the society
becomes ripe for another revolution. Then perhaps
comes on a sort of constitutional government, not
unlike that of our great Republican Union. A tasteful
and costly church is erected, and the snug and

-- 154 --

[figure description] Page 154.[end figure description]

elegant family pew succeeds to the former rude
compartments. Each pew, like a sovereign and
independent State, is governed by the head of the
family, who has entire control over all matters of its
internal police, subject, however, at all times, to the
general and common laws of the society.

The illustration of our subject, drawn from the
history of the good old town of Brookhaven, is
derived from that period when the meeting-house was
undergoing a change from a democratic to an aristocratic
form of government. The building had been
much improved, mainly by the generous liberality of
Colonel Smith, who had poured out his treasure like
water, to accomplish so laudable an object. By the
thorough renovation it underwent at this time, including
the applications of yellow ochre and oil, and the
change of loose planks and boards for permanent
seats, the meeting-house was much modernized, and
exhibited a very respectable appearance. In front of
the pulpit stood a large table of about twelve feet by
four, around which, on communion days, the church
gathered to partake of the supper. At the regular
Sabbath services, the upper members of the parish,
including, of course, Colonel Smith and his family,
seated themselves at the table, as being the most

-- 155 --

[figure description] Page 155.[end figure description]

honorable seat, on account of its vicinity to the pulpit,
and the convenience it afforded as a resting-place
for psalm-books and psalters. The rest of the floor
of the meeting-house was divided into fifteen different
apartments, of an oblong, bed-room sort of size and
shape, which were denominated pews.

But it is hard to bring the mass of community to
adopt great changes or innovations in government, or
the habits of society. When our excellent federal
Constitution was framed, it was a long time before a
majority of the people of all the States could be
induced to fall in with it, and receive it as their form
of government. So it was with the parish of Brookhaven.
They had been accustomed, from time
immemorial, to sit promiscuously in all parts of the
meeting-house wherever they pleased, and there
seemed to be but little disposition on the part of the
mass of the parish, to break over the old habit. The
society had become numerous, and contained many
noisy and roguish boys, and not a few thoughtless and
frolicking young men. Scenes of indecorum and
confusion occurred almost every Sabbath, greatly to
the annoyance of the more sober part of the congregation,
and sometimes to the interruption of the
ceremonial of worship.

-- 156 --

[figure description] Page 156.[end figure description]

At last good Parson Phillips had to stop short one
day in the midst of his sermon. He stood silent for
the space of a minute, looking sternly at pews
number four and six, and then, shaking his finger
solemnly in that direction, he said:

“If the boys in pew number four will stop that
crowding and shuffling their feet, and the young men
in pew number six will cease their whispering with
the young women, the sermon can go on; if not, not.”

The whole congregation looked thunderstruck.
The old men turned their heads towards the two pews
and then towards the minister, and then towards the
pews again. Deacon Jones, coloring with indignation,
rose on his feet, and glanced round with a look
of awful rebuke upon pew number six; and Mr.
Wigglesworth, who was seated at the table, went
directly into pew number four, and seizing two of
the boys by the shoulders in the thickest of the
crowd, dragged them out of the pew, and set them
down at the foot of the pulpit stairs. These decided
demonstrations in favor of good order were not without
their influence, and the services again proceeded
without any material interruption till the close.
When Parson Phillips was about to pronounce the
benediction, Deacon Jones was observed to rise sooner

-- 157 --

[figure description] Page 157.[end figure description]

than he was accustomed to do, and before any of the
rest of the congregation; and he was observed, also,
to stand during that ceremony, with his back to the
minister, and looking round upon the audience, a
thing which he was never seen to do before. The
congregation, therefore, were prepared to expect
something out of the usual course, from Deacon
Jones. As soon as the amen had dropped from the
minister's lips, the deacon stretched out his hand, and
began to address the audience.

“I think,” said he, “the scenes we have witnessed
here to-day, as well as on several Sabbaths
heretofore, admonish us that we have a duty to perform
which has been too long neglected. If we have
any regard for our character, as an orderly and wellbehaved
people; if we have any respect for the house
of God, and the holy religion we profess, I think it is
high time we took a decided stand, and adopted some
strong measures to secure order and decorum during
the hours of public worship. I feel impelled by a
sense of duty to invite a general meeting to be held
at this place to-morrow, to take the subject into consideration.
And I hope that all the heads of families
in town, and all who vote and pay taxes, will meet
here to-morrow at ten o'clock for this purpose.”

-- 158 --

[figure description] Page 158.[end figure description]

Colonel Smith spoke, and said he approved of the
suggestion of Deacon Jones, and hoped there would
be a general attendance. The congregation then dispersed,
some moving silently and thoughtfully homeward,
and some loitering by the way and leaning over
the fences, in companies of three or four together, and
discussing earnestly the events of the day, and proposing
plans to be presented at the meeting to-morrow.

Punctually at ten o'clock, the next day, there was
a very general gathering of the inhabitants at the
meeting-house. On motion of Deacon Jones, Colonel
Smith was unanimously appointed “moderator,” or
chairman of the meeting, and on assuming the chair,
he stated in a few pertinent remarks, the general
object of the meeting, and said they were now ready
to hear any observations or suggestions on the subject.
A minute or two passed in perfect silence, and no one
seemed disposed to rise. At last, the chairman said,
perhaps Squire Tallmadge would favor the meeting
with his views of the matter. The eyes of all were
now turned toward Squire Tallmadge, who after a
little pause, rose slowly, and addressed the chair as
follows.

“For one, Mr. Moderator, I feel the importance of

-- 159 --

[figure description] Page 159.[end figure description]

the subject upon which we are met; and for one, I
am prepared to go into strong measures to remedy
the evil, which has been so common of late. The
evil is great, and must be corrected. We had a
specimen yesterday of the noise and indecorum which
sometimes interrupts the course of worship. And
that is not all, nor the worst of it. The young men
and the boys have got in the habit of going in early
sometimes, before services begin, and crowding into
the best seats, and occupying the chairs round the
table; so that the older people, the pillars of the
church, and those who bear most of the expense of
supporting the gospel, have to go into the back seats
or stow themselves round in the corners, wherever
they can find a chance. This is the difficulty, and it
seems to me the remedy would lie in some entirely
new arrangement for seating the parish. I think the
inhabitants should be properly divided into classes,
and each class assigned to a different pew, having
reference to the rank and respectability of each class,
and the respective proportions they contribute to the
support of the gospel.”

As Squire Tallmadge sat down, Mr. Wigglesworth
and Doctor Wetmore rose nearly at the same time.
The chair finally decided that Mr. Wigglesworth had

-- 160 --

[figure description] Page 160.[end figure description]

the floor, whereupon Mr. Wigglesworth made the
following remarks.

“Mr. Moderator; I agree with all that Squire
Tallmadge has said, exactly; only I don't think he's
stated the audacious conduct half strong enough. I
think, if the young men have courting to do, they
should do it at home and not in church. Why, Mr.
Moderator, I've seen a young man, that I won't call
by name, now, though he's here in this meeting,
set with his arm round the girl that sot next to
him half sermon time.” Here the heads of the
audience were turned in various directions, 'till
their eyes rested on four or five young men, who,
with unusual modesty, had taken some of the back
seats, and one of whom was observed to color
deeply.

“I think,” continued Mr. Wigglesworth, “the
people at church ought to be sifted out, and divided,
each sort by itself. What's the use of having these
'ere pews, if it aint to divide the people into them
according to their sorts? I have a calf-pen and a
sheep-pen in my barn-yard, and I put the calves into
one, and the sheep into 'tother, and then I put the
bars up, and don't let 'em run back and forth into
each other's pen, jest as they are a mind to. I've

-- 161 --

[figure description] Page 161.[end figure description]

no more to say, Mr. Moderator, only I hope
now we've begun, we shall make thorough work
of it.”

Doctor Wetmore then rose, and made a few remarks.
He fully agreed with the suggestions thrown out by
Squire Tallmadge. He had witnessed the evils complained
of, and had been mortified by them a good
many times; and he believed the proper remedy
would be, as Squire Tallmadge suggested, in some
thorough change and some regular system, with
regard to seating the parish at church. He would
move therefore, that the subject be referred to the
trustees, or selectmen of the town, and that they be
requested to draw up an ordinance, to be adopted as a
town law for seating the people in a proper and
orderly manner at church, according to their proper
rank, and also having special reference to the
sums contributed by each for the support of the
gospel.

Mr. Wigglesworth seconded the motion, and it was
put and carried unanimously. Deacon Jones then
moved that the trustees be requested to give thorough
attention to the work the present week, and bring
their ordinance in the next Sabbath morning, and
have it read from the pulpit, and go into immediate

-- 162 --

[figure description] Page 162.[end figure description]

operation. This motion was also seconded and carried,
and the meeting adjourned.

This week was an anxious week at Brookhaven, and
one on which an unusual amount of talking was done.
The subject was canvassed and discussed in every possible
shape by all classes and in all families. The old
ladies were rejoicing at the prospect of more quiet
and orderly meetings, and the young ladies were in
fidgets to know where they were to sit. Several persons
came forward with surprising liberality during
this week, and added ten, fifteen, and some as high as
twenty shillings, to their annual subscription, for the
support of the ministry.

At last, the important Sunday morning came round.
It was a pleasant morning, and the people went
uncommonly early to church, and the meeting-house
was fuller than it had been seen for many months
before. None, however, seemed disposed to take
seats as they entered, and all were standing, when
Parson Phillips came in. When the Reverend gentleman
came up to the pulpit, the chairman of the
trustees handed him the ordinance, and requested him
to read it from the pulpit, in order that the parish
might be seated accordingly before the services commenced.

-- 163 --

[figure description] Page 163.[end figure description]

Parson Phillips accordingly ascended the pulpit,
and unfolded the paper, and while the whole congregation
stood in profound silence, with their eyes fixed
on the speaker, he read as follows.

“At a meeting of the Trustees of Brookhaven,
August 6, one thousand seven hundred and three:
Whereas, there hath been several rude actions of late
happened in our church by reason of people not being
seated, which is much to the dishonor of God and the
discouragement of virtue; For preventing the like
again, it is ordered, that the inhabitants be seated
after the manner and form following: All freeholders
that have or shall subscribe within a month to pay
forty shillings to Mr. Phillips towards his salary shall
be seated at the table, and that no women are permitted
to set there, except Colonel Smith's lady, nor any
woman kind; And that the President for the time
being shall sit in the right-hand seat under the pulpit,
and the clerk on the left; the trustees in the front
seat, and the Justices that are inhabitants of the town
are to be seated at the table, whether they pay forty
shillings or less. And the pew number one, all such
persons as have or shall subscribe twenty shillings; and
the pew number two, such as subscribe to pay fifteen

-- 164 --

[figure description] Page 164.[end figure description]

shillings; in pew number three, such as subscribe to
pay ten shillings; number four, eight shillings; number
five, twelve shillings; number six, nine shillings;
number seven, for the young men; number eight, for
the boys; number nine, for ministers' widows and
wives; and for those women whose husbands pay
forty shillings, to sit according to their age; number
eleven, for those men's wives that pay from twenty
to fifteen shillings. The alley fronting the pews to be
for such maids whose parents or selves shall subscribe,
for two, six shillings; number twelve, for those men's
wives who pay from ten to fifteen shillings; number
thirteen, for maids; number fourteen, for girls; and
number fifteen, for any. Captain Clark and Joseph
Tooker to settle the inhabitants according to the above
orders.”*

When the reading was finished, Captain Clark and
Mr. Tooker entered upon the duties of their office;
and after about an hour's marching and counter-marching,
and whispering, and pulling and hauling,
and referring to the parish subscription books, the
congregation was seated, quiet was restored, and the
services of the day were performed without

-- 165 --

[figure description] Page 165.[end figure description]

interruption. The next Sabbath, each one knew his own
place, and the new order of things was found to work
well, and answered a good purpose for many long
years after that, 'till in the progress of human events
the parish became ripe for another reform.

eaf689n1

* True extract from old records.

-- 166 --

p689-175 CHAPTER VIII. THE MONEY-DIGGERS AND OLD NICK.

[figure description] Page 166.[end figure description]

This is a money digging world of ours; and, as it
is said, “there are more ways than one to skin a cat,”
so are there more ways than one of digging for money.
But, in some mode or other, this seems to be the universal
occupation of the sons of Adam. Show me
the man who does not spend one half of his life long
in digging for money, and I will show you an anomaly
in the human species. “Hunger will break through
a stone wall,” but love of money will compass earth
and sea, and even brave heaven and hell, in pursuit
of its object. The dark and bloody highwayman, in
the silent hours of night, seeks a lonely pass on the
public road, waits the approach of the coming traveller,
puts a pistol to his breast and a hand to his pocket,
takes his treasure, and flies to seek another spot and
another opportunity for a repetition of his crime, and
that is his mode of digging for money. The less daring
robber takes his false keys, and makes his way at

-- 167 --

[figure description] Page 167.[end figure description]

midnight into the store of the merchant, or the vaults
of the bank, bears away his booty, and hides it in the
earth; then, pale and haggard, creeps away to his restless
couch, and rises in the morning to tremble at
every sound he hears, and to read suspicion on the
countenance of every one that approaches him—and
that is his mode of digging for money.

Step with me into the courts of justice. Listen to
that learned barrister, pleading for his client. What
eloquence! what zeal! what power! How admirably
does he “make the worse appear the better reason!”
The patient judges sit from morning till night, waiting
for his conclusion, and still it comes not. The evening
waxeth late, and still he goes on citing case after case,
and rule after rule, diving into huge piles of old
volumes and musty records of the law, as eagerly as
if his own life depended on the issue of the trial.
What is it that impels him to all this exertion? I
trow he is digging for money.

And then, do you see that restless politician? The
whole weight of the government is resting on his
shoulders. The salvation of the country depends
upon the election of his candidates. How he rides
from town to town, stirring up the voters! How he
claps the speakers at the public caucus, and with what

-- 168 --

[figure description] Page 168.[end figure description]

assiduity does he seize his neighbor by the button and
lead him to the polls! What is it that gives such fire
to his patriotic zeal, and keeps him in such continual
commotion? The answer is short; he is only digging
for money.

And so it is with all; the merchant in his counting-house,
the mechanic in his workshop, and the farmer
in his field, all are digging for money.

But, laying aside all figures of speech, and all circumlocution,
let us speak of money-diggers proper—
bonâ fide money-diggers—men who dig holes in the
ground, and delve deep into the bowels of the earth,
in search of pots of money and kettles of gold and
silver coin. For such there are, and probably have
been in all countries and all ages.

On the rough and rocky coast of Maine, about ten
miles to the eastward of Portland harbor, lies Jewell's
Island. It is a bright and beautiful gem on the ocean's
breast, full of various and romantic scenery. It has
its green pastures, its cultivated fields, and its dark
shaggy forests. Its seaward shore is a high and precipitous
mass of rock, rough, and ragged, and projecting
in a thousand shapes into the chafing ocean, whose
broken waves dash and roll into its deep fissures, and
roar and growl like distant thunder. On the inland

-- 169 --

[figure description] Page 169.[end figure description]

side of the island, there is a grassy slope down to the
water's edge, and here is a little, round, quiet, harbor,
where boats can ride at anchor, or rest on the sandy
beach in in perfect security. The island has been
inhabited by a few fishermen, probably for a century,
and, recently works have been erected upon it for the
manufacture of copperas and alum, the mineral from
which these articles are produced having been found
there in great abundance.

This island has been renowned as a place for money-digging
ever since the first settlements were planted
along the coast; and wild and romantic are the legends
related by the old dames, in the cottages of the fishermen,
when some wind-bound passenger, who has
left his vessel to spend the evening on shore, happens
to make any inquiry about the money-diggers. But of
all these wild legendary narratives, probably there is
none more authentic, or supported by stronger or
more undoubted testimony, than the veritable history
herein recorded and preserved.

Soon after the close of the revolutionary war, when
the country began to breathe somewhat freely again,
after its long deathlike struggle, and the industry of
the inhabitants was settling down into its accustomed
channels, a sailor, who had wandered from Portland

-- 170 --

[figure description] Page 170.[end figure description]

harbor some forty or fifty miles back into the country,
called at the house of Jonathan Rider, and asked for
some dinner. “But shiver my timbers,” he added,
“if I've got a stiver of money to pay for it with. The
last shot I had in the locker went to pay for my
breakfast.”

“Well, never mind that,” said Jonathan, “I never
lets a fellow creetur go away hungry as long as I've
got anything to eat myself. Come, haul up to the
table here, and take a little of such pot-luck as we've
got. Patty, hand on another plate, and dip up a little
more soup.”

The sailor threw his tarpaulin cap upon the floor,
gave a hitch at his waistband, and took a seat at the
table with the family, who had already nearly finished
their repast.

“What may I call your name, sir, if I may be so
bold?” said Jonathan, at the same time handing a
bowl of soup to the sailor.

“My name is Bill Stanwood, the world over, fair
weather or foul; I was born and brought up in old
Marblehead, and followed fishing till I was twenty
years old, and for the last ten years I've been foreign
viges all over the world.”

“And how happens you to get away so far from the

-- 171 --

[figure description] Page 171.[end figure description]

sea now, jest as the times is growing better, and trade
is increasing?”

“Oh, I had a bit of a notion,” said Bill, “to take a
land tack a few days up round in these parts.”

“Maybe you've got some relations up this way,”
said Jonathan, “that you are going to visit?”

“Oh no,” said Bill, “I haint got a relation on the
face of the arth, as I know on. I never had any
father, nor mother, nor brother, nor sister. An old
aunt, that I lived with when I was a little boy, was
all the mother that ever I had; and she died when I
was on my last fishing cruise; and there was n't nobody
left that I cared a stiver for, so I thought I might as
well haul up line and be off. So I took to foreign
viges at once, and since that I have been all round the
West Indies, and to England, and France, and Russia,
and South America, and up the Meditterranean, and
clear round the Cape of Good Hope to China, and
the deuce knows where.”

“But you say you haint got no relations up this
way?”

“No.”

“Nor acquaintances nother?”

“No.”

“Then, if I may be so bold, what sent you on a

-- 172 --

[figure description] Page 172.[end figure description]

cruise so fur back in the country, afoot and alone, as
the gal went to be married?”

“Oh, no boldness at all,” said Bill; “ask again, if
you like. Howsomever,” he added, giving a knowing
wink with one eye, “I come on a piece of business
of a very particular kind, that I don't tell to everybody.”

“I want to know!” said Jonathan, his eyes and
mouth beginning to dilate a little. “Maybe, if you
should tell me what 'tis, I might give you a lift about
it.”

“By the great hocus pocus!” said Bill, looking his
host full in the face, “If I thought you could, I'd be
your servant the longest day I live.”

“You don't say so?” said Jonathan, with increasing
interest; “it must be something pretty particular
then. I should like mighty well to know what 'tis.
Maybe I might help you about it.”

“Well, then,” said Bill, “I'll jest ask you one
question. Do you know anything of an old school-master,
about in these parts, by the name of Solomon
Bradman?”

“No—why?”

“Never heard anything of him?” said Bill, with
earnestness.

-- 173 --

[figure description] Page 173.[end figure description]

“Not a word,” said Jonathan? “why, what about
him?”

“It is deuced strange,” said Bill, “that I never
can hear a word of that man. I'd work like a slave
a whole year for the sake of finding him only one
hour. I was told, the last he was heard on, he was
in some of these towns round here, keeping school.”

“Well, I never heard of him before,” said Jonathan;
“but what makes you so mighty anxious to find him?
Did you go to school to him once, and have you owed
him a licking ever since? Or does he owe you some
money?”

“No, I never set eyes on him in my life,” said Bill;
“but there's nobody in the world I'd give half so
much to see. And now we've got along so fur, jest
between you and me, I'll ask you one more question;
but I would n't have you name it to anybody for
nothing.”

“No, by jings,” said Jonathan, “if you're a mind
to tell me, I'll be as whist about it as a mouse.”

“Well, then,” said Bill, “I want to know, if you
know of anybody, that knows how to work brandy-way?

“Brandy-way? what's that?” said Jonathan. “If
you mean anybody that can drink brandy-way, I

-- 174 --

[figure description] Page 174.[end figure description]

guess I can show you one,” he continued, turning to
a stout, red-faced, blowzy looking man, who sat at his
right hand at table. “Here's my neighbor, Asa
Sampson, I guess can do that are sort of business as
fast as anybody you can find. Don't you think you
can, Asa?”

Asa Sampson was a hard one. He was helping
Mr. Rider do his haying. He had been swinging the
scythe, through a field of stout clover, all the forenoon,
during which time he had taken a full pint of
strong brandy, and now had just finished a hearty hot
dinner. Mr. Sampson's face, therefore, it may well
be supposed, was already in rather a high glow. But
at this sudden sally of Mr. Rider, the red in Asa's
visage grew darker and deeper, till it seemed almost
ready to burst out into a blue flame. He choked and
stammered, and tried to speak. And at last he did
speak, and says he:—

“Why, yes, Mr. Rider, I guess so; and if you'll
jest bring your brandy bottle on, I'll try to show you
how well I can do that are sort of business.”

Mr. Rider, thinking his joke upon Asa was rather
a hard one, as the most ready means of atoning for
it, called upon Mrs. Rider to bring forward the bottle
at once.

-- 175 --

[figure description] Page 175.[end figure description]

“Come,” said Mr. Rider, “let's take a drop,” turning
out a glass himself, and then passing the bottle to
the sailor and Mr. Sampson.

“I can drink brandy all weathers,” said Bill Stanwood,
filling up a good stiff glass; “but if I could
only jest find somebody that could show me how to
work brandy-way, I should rather have it than all
the brandy that ever was made in the world.”

“But what do you mean by this brandy-way you
talk about?” said Jonathan. “Seems to me that's a
new kind of a wrinkle; I don't understand it.”

“Why, I mean,” said Bill, “I want to know how
to measure brandy-way; that is, how to measure off
so many rods on the ground brandy-way. I never
heard of but one man that fully understood it, and
that was Master Bradman; and I've been told that he
knew it as well as he did the multiplication table.
I've been hunting for that man a fortnight, all round
in these towns about here, and it's plaguey strange I
can't hear nothing of him.”

“Well, I don't know anything about your measuring
brandy-way,” said Jonathan, “and as for Master
Bradman, I'm sure there haint nobody by that name
kept school in this town these twenty years. For I've
lived here twenty years, and know every schoolmaster

-- 176 --

[figure description] Page 176.[end figure description]

that's kept school here since I came into the town.
But, if I may be so bold, what makes you so anxious
to learn about this brandy-way business?”

“Why, I've reasons enough,” said Bill; “I'll tell
you what 'tis, shipmate,” he added, giving Jonathan
a familiar slap on the shoulder, “if I could only learn
how to measure fifteen rods brandy-way, I would n't
thank king George to be my grandfather. I should
have as much money as I should want, if I should
live to be as old as Methusaleh.”

“You don't say so?” said Jonathan, his eyes evidently
growing larger at the recital. “I should like
mighty well to know how that's done.”

“Well, I should a good deal rather see the money
than hear about it,” said Asa Sampson, whose ideas
were somewhat waked up by the effects of the brandy.

“Then you don't believe it, do you?” said Bill. “I
could convince you of it in five minutes, if I'd a mind
to; for I've got the evidence of it in my pocket. If
I could only measure brandy-way, I know where I
could go and dig up lots and lots of money, that have
been buried in the earth by pirates.”

“Are you in arnest?” said Jonathan.

“To be sure I am; I never was more in arnest in
my life.”

-- 177 --

[figure description] Page 177.[end figure description]

“Well, now do tell us all about it, for if it's true,
and you'll give me a share of it, I would n't valley
taking my old horse and wagon, and going round a
few days with you to help hunt up Master Bradman.
And if we can't find him, perhaps we can find somebody
else that knows how to do it. But do you know
pretty near where the money is?”

“Yes, I know within fifteen rods of the very
spot.”

“And you are sure there's money buried there?”

“Yes, I'm sure of it. I've got the documents here
in my pocket that tells all about it. I'm most tired of
hunting alone for it, and, if you're a mind to take
hold and follow it up with me, I've a good mind
to let you into the secret, and let you go snacks with
me; for, somehow or other, I kind of take a liking
to you, and don't believe I shall find a cleverer fellow
if I sail the world over.”

“That's what you wont,” said Mrs. Rider, who
began to feel a strong interest in the conversation of
the sailor. “I've summered and wintered Mr. Rider,
and know just what he is; and I don't think you'll
find anybody that would help you more in looking
for the money, or any cleverer man to have a share
of it after you've found it.”

-- 178 --

[figure description] Page 178.[end figure description]

“Well, that's jest what I want,” said Bill; “so, if
you say so, it's a bargain.”

“Well, I say so,” said Jonathan; “now let's see
your documents.”

Bill Stanwood deliberately drew from his pocket an
old rusty pocket-book, carefully tied together with a
piece of twine. He opened it, and took from its
inmost fold a paper much worn and soiled.

“There,” said he, “that's the secret charm. That's
worth more than King George's crown; if 'twas n't
for that plaguey little botheration about measuring
fifteen rods brandy-way. Now I'll tell you how I
come by this ere paper. About three years ago, we
was on a vige round the Cape of Good Hope, and we
had an old Spanish sailor with us that was a real dark
faced old bruiser. He was full of odd ways. It
seemed as if he'd got tired of the world and every
body in it, and did n't care for nobody nor nothin'.
And every soul on board almost hated him, he was so
crabbed-like. At last he was took sick, and grew
very bad. Day after day he lay in his berth, and
only grew worse. The captain used to send him some
medicine every day, but never would go near him,
and none of the hands did n't go nigh him, only jest
to hand him the medicine when the captain sent it.

-- 179 --

[figure description] Page 179.[end figure description]

And he would take the medicine without saying a
word, and then lay down again, and you wouldn't
know but what he was dead all day, if it was n't once
in a while you would hear him fetch a hard breath,
or a groan. I began to pity him, and I went and
stood, and looked on him. The cold sweat stood in
drops on his forehead, he was in so much distress.
And says I, `Diego, can't I do something for you?'
And I s'pose I looked kind of pitiful on him, for he
opened his eyes and stared in my face a minute, as if
he heard some strange sound, and then the tears
come into his eyes, and his chin quivered, and says
he,

“`Bill, if you'll only jest get me a drink of cold
water, for I'm all burning up inside.'

“And I went and got him some water, and he
drinked it, and it seemed to revive him a little. And
says he to me, `Bill, I'm jest going off upon my last
long vige.' And then he put his hand in his pocket,
and took out this very paper, and handed it to me;
and says he,

“`I meant to have kept this in my pocket, and let
it be throwed with my old carcase into the sea; but
you have been kind to me, and you may have it; and
if ever you go into that part of the world again, it

-- 180 --

[figure description] Page 180.[end figure description]

will show you where you can get as much money as
you want.'

“That night poor Diego died, and we took and
wrapped him in his blanket, and put a stone to his
feet, and threw him overboard; and that was the end
of poor Diego.”

“Poor soul,” said Mrs. Rider, brushing a tear from
her eye, “how could you bear to throw him overboard?”

“Oh, we could n't do nothin' else with him, away
off there to sea. When a poor fellow dies a thousand
miles from land, there's no other way but to souse
him over, and let him go. I pitied the creetur at the
last, but no doubt he'd been a wicked wretch, and I
suppose had lived among pirates. He had scars on
his face and arms, that showed he'd been in some
terrible battles.”

“Well, what was in the paper?” said Jonathan,
beginning to grow a little impatient for the documents.

“I'll read it to you,” said Bill.

So saying, he opened the paper, which was so much
worn at the folds as to drop into several pieces, and
read from it as follows:—

In the name of Captain Kidd, Amen.—On Jewell's

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

So saying, he opened the paper, which was so much worn at the folds as to drop into several pieces, and read from it as follows:-- PAGE 180. [figure description] Illustration page. A man sits at a table and reads from a piece of paper. Two other men are looking on listening as he reads the paper. One is stting at the table and the other is standing hunched over the table, leaning forward. There is a woman standing behind the table who is listening in as well. [end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- 181 --

[figure description] Page 181.[end figure description]

Island, near the harbor of Falmouth, in the District
of Maine, is buried a large iron pot full of gold, with
an iron cover over it, and also two large iron pots full
of silver dollars and half dollars, with iron covers
over them; and also one other large iron pot, with an
iron cover over it, full of rich jewels, and gold rings
and necklaces, and gold watches of great value. In
this last pot is the paper containing the agreement of
the four persons who buried these treasures, and the
name of each one is signed to it with his own blood.
In that agreement it is stated that this property
belongs equally to the four persons who buried it, and
is not to be dug up or disturbed while the whole four
are living, except they be all present. And in case it
shall not be reclaimed during the lifetime of the four,
it shall belong equally to the survivors, who shall be
bound to each other in the same manner as the four
were bound. And in case this property shall never
be dug up by the four, or any of them, the last survivor
shall have a right to reveal the place where it is
hid, and to make such disposition of it as he may
think proper. And in that same paper, the evil spirit
of darkness is invoked to keep watch over this
money, and to visit with sudden destruction any one
of the four who may violate his agreement. This

-- 182 --

[figure description] Page 182.[end figure description]

property was buried at the hour of midnight, and only
at the hour of midnight can it ever be reclaimed.
And it can be obtained only in the most profound
silence on the part of those who are digging for it.
Not a word or syllable must be uttered from the time
the first spade is struck in the ground, till a handful
of the money is taken out of one of the pots. This
arrangement was entered into with the spirit of darkness,
in order to prevent any unauthorized persons
from obtaining the money. I am the last survivor of
the four. If I shall dispose of this paper to any one
before my death, or leave it to any one after I am
gone, he may obtain possession of this great treasure
by observing the following directions. Go to the
north side of the island, where there is a little cove,
or harbor, and a good landing on a sandy beach.
Take your compass and run by it due south a half a
mile, measuring from high-water mark. Then run
fifty rods east by compass, and there you will find a
blue stone, about two feet long, set endwise into the
ground. From this stone, measure fifteen rods
brandy-way, and there, at the depth of five feet from
the surface of the ground, you will find the pots of
money.

(Signed)
Diego Zevola.

-- 183 --

[figure description] Page 183.[end figure description]

When Bill Stanwood had finished reading his
`document,' there was silence in the room for the
space of two minutes. Jonathan's eyes were fixed in
a sort of bewildered amazement upon the sailor, and
Mrs. Rider's were riveted intently upon her husband;
while Asa Sampson's were rolling about with a strange
wildness, and his mouth was stretched open wide
enough to swallow the brandy bottle whole. At last,
says Bill,

“There you have it in black and white, and there's
no mistake about it. It's all as true as the book of
Genesis. I've been on to the ground, and I've
measured off the half a mile south, and I've measured
the fifty rods east, and I've found the blue stone, but
how to measure the fifteen rods brandy-way, I'll die
if I can tell.”

“Well, that's a tremendous great story,” said Asa
Sampson; “but, according to my way of thinking, I
should rather have it in black and white, than to
have it in red and white. Somehow or other, I never
should want to have anything to do with papers that
are signed with men's blood. I should n't like to be
handling that paper that's buried up in one of them
pots.”

“Poh, that paper's nothing to us,” said Bill; “we

-- 184 --

[figure description] Page 184.[end figure description]

did n't write it. I should as lives take that paper up
and read it, as to read the prayer-book.”

“Mercy on us,” said Mrs. Rider; “read a paper
that's writ with men's blood, and when the old Nick
is set to watch it too? I would n't do it for all the
world, and husband shan't do it neither.”

“But does it say we must have anything to do
with the paper, in order to get the money?” said
Jonathan.

“Not a word,” said Bill. “I tell you that paper
has no more to do with us, than it has with the man
in the moon.”

“But,” said Mrs. Rider, “it does say the old evil
one is set there to watch the money. And do you
think I'd have my husband go and dig for money
right in the face and eyes of old Nick himself? I
should rather be as poor as Job's cat all the days of
my life.”

“There's no trouble about that,” said Bill; “all
we've got to do is to hold our tongues, while we're
digging, and the old feller 'll keep his distance, and
won't say a word to us. At any rate, I'm determined
to have the money, if I can find it, devil or no
devil.

“But that confounded brandy-way, I don't know

-- 185 --

[figure description] Page 185.[end figure description]

how to get over that. That's worse than forty Old
Nicks to get along with.”

“Well, I'll tell you what 'tis,” said Jonathan, “if
you can get within fifteen rods of the money, I can
find it without any help of your brandy-way, that you
tell about.”

“You can?” said Bill, eagerly.

“Yes; if you'll carry me within fifteen rods of
where the money is, I'll engage to find the very spot
where it is buried in less than one hour.”

“You will?” said Bill, springing on his feet, and
giving Jonathan a slap on his shoulder, “Can you
do it? Do tell us how.”

“Yes, I can find it with a mineral rod.”

“What's a mineral rod?” said Bill. “Now none
of your humbugs; but if you can do it, tell us how.”

“There's no humbug about it,” said Jonathan,
tartly. “I know how to work a mineral rod, and I
believe I can find the money.”

“But what is a mineral rod?” said Bill.

“Why, don't you know? It's a green crotched
branch of witch-hazel, cut off about a foot and a half
or two foot long. And them that has the power to
work 'em, takes the ends of the branches in each hand,
and holds the other end, where the branches are

-- 186 --

[figure description] Page 186.[end figure description]

joined together, pointing up to the sky. And when
they come near where there's minerals, or gold, or
silver, buried in the ground, the rod will bend that
way; and when they get right over the spot, the rod
will bend right down and point towards the ground.”

“Now, is that true?” said Bill.

“True? yes, every word of it. I've seen it done
many a time, and I've done it myself. The mineral
rod won't work in everybody's hands, but it 'll work
in mine, and once I found a broad-axe by it that was
lost in the meadow.”

“Well, then,” said Bill, “let us be off forthwith,
and not let that money lie rusting in the ground any
longer. Why not start off to-night?”

“Well, I don't know but we could start towards
night,” said Jonathan; “but I shall have to go out
first and hunt up a witch-hazel tree to get some
mineral rods.”

“It's my opinion,” said Asa Sampson, “you had
better wait a day or two, and finish getting in your
hay before you go; for if you should come back with
your wagon filled with money, you'll be too confounded
lazy ever to get it in afterwards.”

“No, you shan't stir one step,” said Mrs. Rider,
“till that hay is all got in. There's two loads out

-- 187 --

[figure description] Page 187.[end figure description]

that's made enough to get in now, and you know
there's as much as one load to mow yet.”

Mrs. Rider's will was all the law or gospel there
was about the house. Of course her husband did not
undertake to gainsay her dictum, but told Bill they
could not possibly get ready to start before the next
night, as that hay would have to be taken care of
first.

“Well, then,” said Bill, “call all hands, and let's
go at it. Come, where's your scythe? I'll go and
finish mowing that grass down in the first place.”

“But can you mow?” said Jonathan, doubtingly.

“Mow? I guess you'd think so, if you should see
me at it. I worked on a farm six weeks once, when
I was a boy, and learnt to pull every rope in the
ship.”

All hands repaired to the field. Bill Stanwood took
a scythe and went to thrashing about as though he
were killing rattlesnakes. He soon battered up one
scythe against the rocks, and presently broke another
by sticking it into a stump. It was then agreed that
he should change works with Asa Sampson, and help
get the hay into the barn, while Asa mowed. The
business then went on briskly. The boys and girls
were out spreading and raking hay, and Mrs. Rider

-- 188 --

[figure description] Page 188.[end figure description]

herself went on to the mow in the barn to help stow
it away. The next day the haying was finished, and
all things were in preparation to start for Jewell's
Island. Mrs. Rider, however, whose imagination had
been excited by the idea of Old Nick being set to
guard the money, was still unwilling her husband
should go; and it was not till he had solemnly
promised to bring her home a new silk gown, and a
new pair of morocco shoes, and some stuff to make
her a new silk bonnet, that she finally gave her consent.
When the matter was finished, she took a large
firkin and filled it with bread and cheese, and boiled
beef, and doughnuts, for them to eat on their way;
and Bill said there was a great plenty to last till they
got down to the pots of money, and after that they
could buy what they wanted.

Asa Sampson, who was at work for Mr. Rider,
agreed to go with them for his regular daily pay, with
this proviso: if they got the money, they were to
make him a present outright of a hundred dollars,
which he said would be as much money as he should
ever know what to do with.

As a parting caution, Mrs. Rider charged them to
remember and not speak while they were digging,
and told them, lest some word might slip out before

-- 189 --

[figure description] Page 189.[end figure description]

they thought of it, they had better each of them tie a
handkerchief over their mouths when they begun to
dig, and not take it off till they got down to the
money. They all agreed that it would be an excellent
plan, and they would certainly do it.

Mr. Rider's old horse was tackled into the wagon,
the baggage was put on board, and the three fortune-hunters
jumped in and drove off for Falmouth. It
was a long and lonesome road, but the bright visions
of the future, that were dancing before their eyes,
made it seem to them like a journey to Paradise.

“Now, Mr. Rider,” said Bill, “what do you mean
to do with your half of the money, when we get it?”

“Well, I think I shall take two thousand dollars of
it,” said Jonathan, “and buy Squire Dickinson's
farm, that lives next neighbor to me. He's always
looked down upon me with a kind of contempt, because
I was n't so well off in the world as he was; and
I should like mighty well to get him out of the neighborhood.
And I guess he's drove for money too, and
would be glad to sell out. And now, neighbor Stanwood,
I'll tell you what I think you better do. You
better buy a good farm right up there alongside of
me, and we'll build each of us a large nice house, just
alike, and get each of us a first rate horse, and we'll

-- 190 --

[figure description] Page 190.[end figure description]

live together there, and ride about and take comfort.”

“By the hocus pocus!” said Bill, “I hope you don't
call that taking comfort. No, none of your land-lubber
viges for me. I'll tell you what I mean to do.
As soon as I get my money I mean to go right to
Boston and buy the prettiest ship I can find—one
that will sail like the wind—and I'll have three
mates, so I shan't have to stand no watch, but go
below just when I like; and I'll go cap'n of her, and
go away up the Mediterranian, and up the Baltic.
And then I'll make a vige straight round the world,
and if I don't beat Captain Cook all to nothin', I think
it's a pity. And now you better sell out your old
farm up there among the bushes, and go with me.
I'll tell you what 'tis, shipmate, you'd take more comfort
in one month aboard a good vessel, than you
could on a farm in a whole year. What comfort is
there to be found on a farm, where you never see any
thing new, but have the same thing over and over
forever? No variety, no change but everything
always the same—I should get as tired as death in a
month.”

“Well, now, neighbor,” said Jonathan, “you are
as much mistaken, as if you had burnt your shirt.

-- 191 --

[figure description] Page 191.[end figure description]

There's no business in the world that has so much
variety and so many new things all the time, as
farming. In the first place, in the spring comes
ploughing time, and then comes planting time, and
after that hoeing and weeding; and then comes haying
time; and then reaping time; and then getting in the
corn and potatoes. And then, to fill up with a little
fun once in a while, we have sheep washing in the
spring, and huskings in the fall, and breaking out the
roads after a snow storm in the winter; and something
or other new most all the time. When your
crops are growing, even your fields look new every
morning; while at sea you have nothing new, but
the same things over and over, every day from morning
till night. You do nothing but sail, sail, all the
time, and have nothing to look at but water from one
week's end to another.”

Here Bill Stanwood burst into a broad loud laugh,
and says he:—

“Well done, shipmate. I must say you are the
greenest horn I've met with this long time. No
variety and nothing new to be seen in going to sea!
If that aint a good one! The very place, too, to see
everything new and to learn everything that there
is in the world. Why, only jest in working the ship

-- 192 --

[figure description] Page 192.[end figure description]

there's more variety and more to be seen than there
is in working a whole farm, to say nothing about going
all over the world, and seeing everything else. Even
in a dead calm you can see the whales spouting and
the porpoises rolling about. And when the wind is
slack, you have enough to do to stick on your canvas.
You run up your topgallan-sels, and your rials, and
out with your studden-sels, and trim your sheets, and
make all the sails draw. And then you walk the
deck and watch the changes of the wind, and if a
vessel heaves in sight what a pleasure there is in
taking your spy-glass and watching her motions till
she's out of sight again; or, if she comes near enough,
how delightful 'tis to hail her and learn where she's
from, and where she's bound, and what her captain's
name is! And when it comes on a blow, what a
stirring time there is! All hands are out to take in
the light sails; down goes the topgallan' yards; and
if the wind increases you begin to reef; and if it
comes on to blow a real snorter, you furl all sails and
scud away under bare poles. And sometimes, when
the storm is over, you come across some poor fellows
on a wreck, half starved or half froze to death, and
then you out with your boat and go and take 'em off,
and nurse 'em up and bring 'em to. Now here's some

-- 193 --

[figure description] Page 193.[end figure description]

life in all this business, some variety, and something
interesting, compared with what there is on a farm.
You better pull up stakes when we get our money,
sell your old farm and go to sea along with me.”

“Well,” said Jonathan, “I'll tell you what 'tis
neighbor, I'll leave it out to Mr. Sampson here to say
which is the best and pleasantest business, farming or
going to sea. If he says farming, you shall pay the
toddy at the next tavern, and if he says going to sea,
I'll pay it.”

“Done,” said Bill. “Now, Asa, give us your
opinion.”

“Well,” said Asa, “all I can say is, if going to sea
isn't pleasanter business than farming there isn't much
pleasure in it, that's all.”

“But that aint deciding anything at all,” said Bill;
“you must tell us right up and down which is the best
business.”

“Well, if I must say,” said Asa, “I should say
going to sea was the best and the pleasantest.”

“There, I told you so,” said Bill. “Now how fur
is it to the next tavern? I want that toddy.”

“It's jest to the top of this hill,” said Jonathan;
“and bein' the hill's pretty steep, we'll jump out and
walk up, and give the old horse a chance to breathe.”

-- 194 --

[figure description] Page 194.[end figure description]

So out they jumped, and Jonathan drove the horse
up the hill, while Bill and Asa loitered along a little
behind.

“How upon arth,” said Bill, “come you to decide
in favor of going to sea? Did you ever go to sea?”

“I? No I never set foot aboard a vessel in all my
life.”

“Then how come you to know so much about going
to sea?”

“Poh!” said Asa, “all I knew about it was, I knew
Mr. Rider had some money, and I knew you had n't,
and I wanted the toddy. How could I decide any
other way?”

“True enough,” said Bill; “you was exactly right.”

When they reached the tavern, Mr. Rider paid the
toddy, and, after giving the old horse a little provender
and a little time to breathe, the trio pursued their
journey with renewed spirits and livelier hopes.
When they reached the sea-shore at Falmouth, the
sun was about an hour high. They immediately hired
a small row boat for two or three days, leaving their
horse and wagon in pawn for it, and prepared to
embark for Jewell's Island, which was about ten miles
distant. Jonathan was a little fearful about being out
upon the water in the night, and was for waiting till

-- 195 --

[figure description] Page 195.[end figure description]

next morning and taking the day before them for the
voyage to the island. But Bill said no, “they could
go half the distance before sunset, and as there was a
good moon, there would be no difficulty in going the
other half after sunset; and he was determined to be
on the island that night, let the consequence be what
'twould.”

They accordingly put their baggage on board, and
jumped in, and rowed off. Bill first took the helm,
and Jonathan and Asa sat down to the oars. But
being totally unaccustomed to a boat, they made sad
work of rowing, and in spite of all of Bill's teaching
and preaching, scolding and swearing, their oars
splashed up and down alternately in the water, resembling
more in their operation two flails upon the barn
floor than two oars upon the ocean. Their little bark
made but slow headway, and Bill soon got out of
patience, and told Jonathan to take the helm and he
would row himself. Jonathan, however, succeeded
no better at the helm than at the oar; for the boat
was soon heading in all directions, and making as
crooked a track as was ever made by the veritable
sea-serpent himself. So that Bill was obliged to call
Jonathan from the helm, and manage to keep the boat
as straight as he could by rowing. The slow progress

-- 196 --

[figure description] Page 196.[end figure description]

they made under all these disadvantages brought it to
midnight before they reached the island. They however
succeeded at last in gaining the little harbor, and
it being about high water they drew their boat upon
the beach, and walked up on the island towards a
fisherman's hut, which Bill had frequented upon his
former visit to the place. The moon had set, and the
night was now somewhat dark. As they wound their
way along through the bushes and under the tall trees,
not a sound was to be heard, save the low sullen roar
of the ocean, which came like delicious music to the
ears of Bill Stanwood, while to Jonathan and Asa it
added a still deeper gloom to the silence and darkness
of the night.

They had walked but a short distance when a dim
light glittered through the trees, and told them that
the fisherman's hut was near.

“Ah,” said Bill, “old Mother Newbegin is up. I
believe she never goes to bed; for go there what time
of night you will, you will always find her padding
about the room with an old black night-cap on, putting
dishes to rights in the closet, or sweeping up the floor,
or sitting down and mending her husband's clothes.
She looks more like a witch than she does like a
human creetur, and sometimes I've almost thought

-- 197 --

[figure description] Page 197.[end figure description]

she had something to do about guarding the money
that's buried on the island.”

“Well, ain't there some other house about here,”
said Asa, “that we can go to? Somehow, it seems to
me I should n't like to get quite so near that old hag,
if there's any witchcraft about her.”

“There's no other house very near,” said Bill;
“and, besides, I think it's best to go in and see old
Mother Newbegin. For if she is a witch, it's no use
to try to keep out of the way of her; and if we keep
the right side of her and don't get her mad, maybe
she may help us a little about finding the money.”

They approached the house, and as they passed the
little low window, they saw by the red light of a pitch
knot, that was burning on the hearth, the old woman
sitting and roasting coffee, which she was stirring
with a stout iron spoon. They stopped a little and
reconnoitered. The glare of the light fell full on the
old woman's face, showing her features sharp and
wrinkled, her skin brown, and her eyes black and fiery.
Her chin was leaning on one hand, and the other was
busily employed in stirring the coffee, while she was
talking to herself with a solemn air, and apparently
with much earnestness. Her black night-cap was on,
and fastened with a piece of twine under her chin,

-- 198 --

[figure description] Page 198.[end figure description]

and the tight sleeves of her frock sat close to her long
bony arms, while her bare feet and bird-claw toes
projected out in full view below the bottom of her dress.

“I swow,” said Asa, “I believe she has got a cloven
foot. Let's be off; I should rather go back and sleep
in the boat than to go in here to-night.”

“Poh!” said Bill, “that's only the shadow of her
foot you see on the floor; she has n't got any more of
a cloven foot than you have. Come, I'm going in
whether or no.”

With that he gave a loud rap at the door.

“Who's there?” screamed the old woman.

“A friend,” said Bill.

“Well, who be ye? What's your name? I shan't
open the door till I know who you be.”

“Bill Stanwood,” said the sailor.

“Oh, is it you, Bill? Come in then,” said the old
woman unfastening the door, and throwing it open.

“So you're after money again, aint ye?” said the
old woman, as they entered the house; “and you've
brought these two men with you to help you, and
that's what you are here for this time of night.”

“I swow,” said Asa, whispering to Bill Stanwood,
“let's be off, she knows all about it.”

“Hold your tongue, you fool,” said Bill; “if she

-- 199 --

[figure description] Page 199.[end figure description]

knows all about us we may as well be here as any
where else.”

Asa trembled a little, but finally took a seat on a
bench near the door, ready to run, in case matters
should grow desperate.

“Well,” said the old woman, “if you get the money,
you'll have to work hard for it. There's been a good
many tried for it before you; and there's been two
men here hunting all over the island since you was
here before. They dug round in a good many places,
and my old man thinks they found some, for they
give him half a dollar for fetching their boat back
when she went adrift, and he said the half dollar was
kind of rusty, and looked as though it had been buried
in the ground. But I've no idea they got a dollar.
It isn't so easy a matter; Old Nick takes better care
of his money than all that comes to.”

“Where is your old man,” said Bill. “Seems to
me he's always away when I come.”

“The Lord knows where he is,” said the old
woman; “he's been out a fishing this three days, and
was to a been home last night. I've been down to the
shore three times to day to see if his boat was in sight,
but could n't see nothin' of him.”

“Well, aint you afraid he's lost?” said Bill.

-- 200 --

[figure description] Page 200.[end figure description]

“What! old Mike Newbegin, my old man, lost?
No, not he. The wind always favors him when he
gets ready to come home, let it be blowing which
way 'twill. If it's blowing right dead ahead, and he
pulls up anchor and starts for home, it will come
round in five minutes and blow a fair wind till he
gets clear into the harbor.”

Here Asa whispered to Bill again, declaring his
opinion that the old woman was a witch, if nothing
worse, and proposing to leave the house and seek
shelter for the night somewhere else. But Bill resolutely
opposed all propositions of the kind, and Asa,
being too timid to go alone, was compelled to stay
and make the best of it.”

“Well, come, old lady,” said Bill, “you can give
us a berth to lay down and take a nap till morning.”

“Why, yes,” said the old woman, “there's room
enough in 'tother room. If anybody wants to sleep,
I always let 'em, though, for my part, I can't see
what good it does 'em. I think it's throwing away
time. I don't think there's any need of any body's
sleeping more than once or twice a week, and then
not more than an hour at once; an hour of sleep is as
good as a month at any time.”

This strange doctrine about sleep caused Asa's

-- 201 --

[figure description] Page 201.[end figure description]

knees to tremble worse than ever, as he followed Bill
and Jonathan into the other room, where they found
a mattress of straw and some blankets, and laid down
to rest. Bill and Jonathan soon fell into a comfortable
snore, but Asa thought if there was no sleep for
Mother Newbegin there was none for him. At least
he felt little inclined to trust himself asleep in the
house while she was awake. Accordingly he turned
and rolled from side to side, for two long hours, but
could get no rest. He sat up in bed. By a crack
under the door he perceived there was a faint light
still glimmering in the other room. He walked softly
towards the door and listened. He could occasionally
hear the catlike footsteps of the old woman padding
across the floor. Once he thought she came
close to the door, and he drew back lightly on his tiptoes
to the bedside. He wondered how Bill and
Jonathan could sleep so quietly, and stepping to the
other side of the room, he seated himself on a chest
by a low window containing three panes of seven by
nine glass, the rest of the space being filled up with
boards. Here he sat revolving over in his mind the
events of the day, and of the night thus far, and more
and more wishing himself safely at home, money or
no money The night was still dark and gloomy, but

-- 202 --

[figure description] Page 202.[end figure description]

he could now and then see a star as he looked from
the little window, and—



Oft to the east his weary eyes he cast,
And wish'd the lingering dawn would glimmer forth at last.

And at last it did glimmer forth; and presently the
grey twilight began to creep into the room, and trees,
and bushes, and rocks, as he looked from the window,
began to appear with distinctness. Asa roused his
companions, and they prepared to sally forth for their
day's enterprise. In leaving the house, they had to
go through the room in which they had left mother
Newbegin when they retired. On entering this room
they found the old woman appearing precisely as they
had left her, gliding about like a spirit, apparently
busy, though they could hardly tell what she was
doing. She seemed a little surprised at their rising
so early, and told them if they would wait half an
hour she would have some breakfast for them. They
gave her many thanks, but told her they had provisions
with them, and, as their business was important,
they must be moving.

“Ah, that money, that money,” said the old woman
shaking her head; “look out sharp, or Old Nick will
make a supper of one of you to-night.”

-- 203 --

[figure description] Page 203.[end figure description]

The party left the house and started for the little
harbor. Asa seemed rather wild at this last remark
of the old woman, and looked back over his shoulder
as they departed, till they had gone several rods from
the house. When they reached the harbor, they
found the boat and all things as they had left them,
and proceeded forthwith to commence the important
work of the day. They set their compass at high-water
mark at the highest point of the harbor, and
took a rod pole and measured off half a mile from
that point due south. They then set their compass at
this place and measured off fifty rods due east. And
here they found the blue stone, as described in the
“documents” which Bill Stanwood had received
from the pirate. The eyes of the whole party brightened
as they came to it.

“There 'tis,” said Bill, “so fur, exact as I told you,
aint it?”

“Yes, fact, to a hair's breadth,” said Jonathan.

“Well, now if you can get the fifteen rods brandy-way,
you'll find the rest jest as I told you,” said Bill.

They then measured of fifteen rods from the blue
stone in various directions, and set up little stakes,
forming a sort of circle round the stone at fifteen rods
distance from it.

-- 204 --

[figure description] Page 204.[end figure description]

“Now,” said Jonathan, “I'll take my mineral rod
and walk round on this ring, and if the money is here
I shall find the spot.”

He then took his green crotched witch-hazel bough,
and holding the top ends of the twigs in his hand, so
that the part where they joined would point upward,
began his mysterious march round the circle, while
Bill and Asa walked, one on each side of him, at a
little distance, and watched the mineral rod. Sometimes
it would seem to incline a little one way, and
sometimes a little the other, but nothing very remarkable
occurred till they had gone about three-quarters
round the circle, when the rod seemed to be agitated
somewhat violently, and began to bend perceptibly
towards the ground, and at last it bent directly downwards.

“There,” said Jonathan, “do you see that? My
gracious, how strong it pulls! Here's the place for
bargains; drive down a stake.”

“I swow,” said Asa, “I never see the like of that
before. I begin to think there's something in it
now.”

“Something in it!” said Bill Stanwood, slapping
his hands together; “did n't I tell you if we could
only find the fifteen rods brandy-way, I would n't

-- 205 --

[figure description] Page 205.[end figure description]

thank King George to be my grandfather? Now, Mr.
Rider, jest hand out your brandy bottle. We have n't
had a drop to-day; and since we've worked brandy-way
so well your way, I should like now to work it
in Asa's way a little.”

“I second that motion,” said Asa, “for I'm as dry
as a herrin'.”

They accordingly took a social drink of brandy and
water, and drank health and success to him who
should first hit the pot of money; and having sat
down under a tree and eaten a hearty meal from their
basket, they returned to mother Newbegin's to prepare
for the labors of the coming night. They
brought from their boat three shovels, a pick-axe, and
a crowbar. The old woman eyed these preparations
askance, and as she turned away, Asa thought he
could discern on her features the deep workings of a
suppressed laugh. The afternoon wore away slowly,
for they were impatient to behold their treasures; and
twice they walked to the spot, which was to be the
scene of their operations, to consult and decide on
the details to be observed. They concluded, in order
to be sure of hitting the pots, it would be best to
make their excavation at least ten or twelve feet in
diameter, and in order to afford ample time to get

-- 206 --

[figure description] Page 206.[end figure description]

down to them at about midnight, they decided to
commence operations soon after dark.

“And now, about not speaking after we begin to
dig,” said Bill; “how shall we work it about that?
for, you know, if one of us happens to speak a word,
the jig is up with us.”

“I think the safest way would be,” said Asa, “to
cut our tongues out, and then we shall be sure not to
speak. Howsomever, whether we cut our tongues
out or not, if you won't speak, I'll promise you I
won't; for I've no idea of giving the old feller a
chance to carry me off, I can tell you.”

“Well,” said Jonathan, “I guess we better tie
some handkerchiefs tight round our mouths, as my
wife said, and we shan't be so likely to forget ourselves.”

This arrangement was finally concluded upon, and
they returned to the house. That night they took
supper with mother Newbegin, and endeavored, by
paying her a liberal sum for the meal, and by various
acts of courtesy, to secure her good graces. She
seemed more social than she had been before, and
even, at times, a sort of benevolent expression
beamed from her countenance, which caused Asa to
pluck up a comfortable degree of courage. But

-- 207 --

[figure description] Page 207.[end figure description]

when it became dark, and they shouldered their tools
to depart, the old woman fixed her sharp eyes upon
them with such a wild sort of a look, that Asa began
to cringe and edge along towards the door, and when
she added, with a grave shake of the head, that they
had better look out sharp, or the Old Nick would have
them before morning, his knees trembled, and he
once more wished himself at home.

The party arrived at the spot. And first, according
to previous arrangements, they tied handkerchiefs
over their mouths. They then measured a circle
round the stake, of twelve feet in diameter, and took
their shovels and commenced throwing out the earth.
The night was still and calm, and though the atmosphere
was not perfectly clear, the starlight was sufficient
to enable them to pursue their labors with
facility. They soon broke ground over the whole
area which they had marked out, and diligently,
shovelful by shovelful, they raised the gravelly soil
and threw it beyond the circle. In half an hour they
had sunk their whole shaft nearly two feet, and were
getting along so far quite comfortably, with bright
hopes and tolerably quiet nerves. No sound broke
upon the stilness around them, save the sound of
their own shovels against the stones and gravel, and

-- 208 --

[figure description] Page 208.[end figure description]

the distant roar of the chafing ocean. But at this
moment there rose a wild and powerful wind, which
brushed down upon them like a tornado. The trees
bent and quivered before it, the leaves flew, and dust
and gravel, and light substances on the ground, were
whirled into the air, and carried aloft and abroad
with great rapidity. Among the rest, Asa Sampson's
straw hat was snatched from his head and flew away
like a bird in the air. Asa dropt his shovel, and
sprang from the pit, and gave chase with all his
might. After following it about fifty rods, it touched
the ground, and he had the good fortune to catch it.
He returned to his companions, whom he found standing
awe-struck, holding their own hats on, and rubbing
the dust from their eyes. It was but a few
minutes, however, before the extreme violence of the
wind began to abate and they were enabled to pursue
their labors. Still the wind was wild and gusty.
They had never known it to act so strangely, or to cut
up such mad pranks before. Sometimes it would be
blowing strongly in one direction, and in one minute
it would change and blow as powerfully in the other;
and sometimes it would whisk round and round them
like a whirlwind, making the gravel they had thrown
but fly like hailstones. Black, heavy, and angry

-- 209 --

[figure description] Page 209.[end figure description]

looking clouds kept floating by, and sometimes they heard
the distant rumbling of thunder. They had never
seen such clouds before. They appeared to them like
huge living animals, that glared at them, as they flew
over, with a hundred eyes. Asa sometimes thought
they looked like monstrous great sea-turtles, and he
fancied he could see huge legs and claws extending
from their sides; and once he was just on the point
of exclaiming to his companions, and telling them to
look out, or that monstrous turtle would hit them with
his claw as he went over; but the handkerchief over
his mouth checked him, and reminded him that he
must not speak, and he only sank down close to the
bank where he was digging. The clouds grew thicker
and darker, but instead of adding to the darkness of
the night, they seemed to emit a sort of broken, flickering
twilight, sufficient to enable them to see the
changes in each other's countenances, and to behold
objects rather indistinctly at some rods' distance.
Each perceived that the others were pale and trembling,
and each endeavored, by signs and gestures,
and plying his shovel with firmness and resolution, to
encourage his fellows to perseverance.

It was now about eleven o'clock, and having measured
the depth they had gone they found it to be

-- 210 --

[figure description] Page 210.[end figure description]

good four feet. One foot more would bring them to
the money; and they fell to work with increased
vigor. At this moment a heavy crash of thunder
broke over their heads, and big drops of rain began
to spatter down. Though nearly stunned by the
report, they recovered in a minute and pursued their
labors. The rain increased rapidly, and now began
to pour down almost in one continued sheet.
Although the earth below them was loose and open,
and drank in the water very fast, still so powerfully
did the rain continue to descend, that in a short time
they found it standing six inches round their feet.
One of them now took a pail and dipped out water,
while the others continued to shovel gravel. Their
resolution seemed to increase in proportion to the
obstacles they met, and gravel and water were thrown
out in rapid succession. The force of the rain soon
began to abate, and they would in a short time have
accomplished the other foot of digging, had not the
loose soil on the sides of the shaft begun to come in by
means of the wet, and accumulate at the bottom faster
than they could throw it out. Several times it gained
upon them, in this way, to the depth of some inches.
While they were battling with this difficulty, and
looking up at the bank to see where it would come in

-- 211 --

[figure description] Page 211.[end figure description]

next, a tremendously great black dog came and stood
upon the brink, and opened his deep red jaws, and
began to bark with terrific power. They shrunk
back from the hideous animal, and raised their shovels
to fright him off; but a second thought told them
they had better let him alone and stick to their work.

They measured their depth again, and found it in
some places four feet and a half, and in others almost
five. They again plied their shovels with all diligence,
and as they stepped to and fro at their work,
that deep-mouthed dog kept up his deafening bark,
and leaping round the verge of the pit, and keeping
on the side nearest them, whenever they approached
the side to throw out a shovelful of earth, he would
spring and snap at their heads like a hungry lion.
Asa seized the pickaxe, partly with a view of defending
himself against the dog, and partly for the purpose
of striking it down to see if he could hit the
pots. He commenced driving the sharp point of it
into the earth, passing round from one side of the pit
to the other, till at last he hit a solid stone; and
striking round for some distance they perceived the
stone was large and flat. Bill and Jonathan made
their shovels fly, and soon began to lay the surface of
the stone bare. They noticed when they first struck

-- 212 --

[figure description] Page 212.[end figure description]

the stone that the dog began to bark with redoubled
fierceness, and as they proceeded to uncover it, he
seemed to grow more and more enraged. As he did
not jump down into the pit, however, they continued
to keep out of his reach and pursue their work.
Having laid the stone bare, and dug the earth away
from the edges, they found it to be smooth and flat,
about four feet square, and six or eight inches in
thickness. They got the crow-bar under one side,
and found they could pry it up. They gradually
raised it about six inches, and putting something under
to hold it, they began, by means of a stick, to explore
the cavity beneath it. In moving the stick round
amongst the loose sand under the stone, they soon felt
four hard round substances, which they were sure
must be the four iron pots. Presently they were
enabled to rattle the iron covers, which gave a sound
that could not be mistaken. At last they got the
stick under one of the covers and shoved it into the
pot, and they heard the jingle of money. Each one
took hold of the stick and tried it; there was no mistake;
they all poked the money with the stick, and
they all heard it jingle. All that now remained was
to remove the great stone. It was very heavy, but
they seized it with resolute determination, and all got

-- 213 --

[figure description] Page 213.[end figure description]

hold on one side with the intention of turning it up
on the edge. They lifted with all their might, and
were but just able to start it. They however made
out to raise it slowly till they could rest it a little on
their knees, where it became stationary. It seemed
doubtful whether they would possibly be able to raise
it on the edge, and it seemed almost equally difficult to
let it down without crushing their own feet. To add
to their embarrassment, the dog was barking and snapping
more fiercely than ever, and seemed just upon
the point of springing upon them. At this critical
moment, a person came up to the edge of the pit, and
bid the dog “Get out.” The dog was hushed, and
drew back.

“I say, neighbors,” continued the stranger, “shall
I give you a lift there?”

“Yes, quick,” said Asa, “I can't hold on another
minute.”

The stranger jumped down behind them and put
his hand against the stone. In a moment the ponderous
weight of the stone was changed to the lightness
of a dry pine board, and it flew out of the pit, carrying
the three money diggers with it, head over heels,
to the distance of two rods.

They picked themselves up as speedily as they

-- 214 --

[figure description] Page 214.[end figure description]

could, and ran for their lives towards the house
When they arrived they found mother Newbegin up,
as usual, and trotting about the room. They called
to her and begged her to open the door as quick as
possible. As the old woman let them in, she fixed
her sharp eyes upon them and exclaimed,

“Well, if you've got away alive you may thank
me for it. I've kept the Bible open for you, and a
candle burning before it, ever since you left the house;
and I knew while the candle was shining on the Bible
for you he could n't touch you.”

They were too much agitated to enter into conversation
on the subject, and being exceedingly
exhausted, they laid down to rest, but not to sleep.
The night passed wearily away, and morning came.
The weather was clear and pleasant, and after taking
some refreshments they concluded to repair again to
the scene of their labors, and see if the money was
still there and could be obtained. Asa was very
reluctant to go, “He did n't believe there was a
single dollar left.” But Bill Stanwood was resolute.
Go he would. Jonathan said “he might as well die
one way as another, for he never should dare to go
home again without carrying his wife's new gown
and morocco shoes.”

-- 215 --

[figure description] Page 215.[end figure description]

So, after due consultation, they started again for
the money-hole. On arriving there, they found their
tools and the general appearance of the place just as
they had left them. There was the great flat stone,
lying about two rods from the pit. And on looking
into the pit, they observed, under the place where the
stone had laid, four large round holes in the sand, all
of which were much stained with iron rust. They
got down and examined the place. There had evidently
been iron vessels there; but they were gone,
money and all.

“Come,” said Asa, “this place smells rather too
strong of brimstone; let us be going.”

-- 216 --

p689-229 CHAPTER IX. PETER PUNCTUAL.

The names used in the following narrative are of course fictitious;
but the incidents all occurred substantially as here related, and the
parties are respectable gentlemen recently living and doing business
in this bustling city of New York. The writer had the account
directly from the lips of the principal actor.

[figure description] Page 216.[end figure description]

Some few years ago, Peter Punctual, an honest and
industrious young fellow from Yankee land—I say
Yankee land, but I freely confess that is merely an
inference of mine, drawn from circumstances of this
story itself; but if my readers, after perusing it, do
not come to the same conclusion, they may set him
down as coming from any other land they please; but
for myself, were I on a jury, and under oath, I would
bring him in a Yankee. This same Peter Punctual,
some few years ago, came into New York, and
attempted to turn a penny and get an honest living by
procuring subscribers to various magazines and periodicals,
on his own hook. That is, he would receive a
quantity of magazines from a distant publisher, at a

-- 217 --

[figure description] Page 217.[end figure description]

discount, and get up his own list of subscribers about
the city, and serve them through the year at the
regular subscription price, which would leave the
amount of the said discount a clear profit in his
pocket, or rather a compensation for his time and
labor. There are many persons in this city who
obtain a livelihood in the same way.

Peter's commissions being small, and his capital
still smaller, he was obliged to transact his business
with great care and circumspection, in order to make
both ends meet. He adopted a rule, therefore, to
make all his subscribers pay their year's subscription
in advance. Such things could be done in those days
when business was brisk, and the people were
strangers to “hard times.” In canvassing for subscribers,
one day, through the lower part of the city,
and in the principal business streets, he observed a
store which had the air of doing a heavy business, and
read upon the sign over the door, “Solomon Sharp,
Importer.” The field looked inviting, and in Peter
went with his samples under his arm, and inquired
for Mr. Sharp. The gentleman was pointed out to
him by the clerks, and Peter stepped up and asked
him if he would not like to subscribe for some magazines.

-- 218 --

[figure description] Page 218.[end figure description]

“What sort of ones have you got there?” said
Mr. S.

“Three or four different kinds,” said Peter, laying
the specimens on the desk before him—“please to
look at them and suit yourself.”

Sharp tumbled them over and examined them one
after another, and at last took up “Buckingham's
New England Magazine,” published at Boston.

“What are your terms for this?” said he; “I don't
know but I would subscribe for this.”

“Five dollars a year in advance,” said Peter, “to
be delivered carefully every month at your store or
house.”

“But I never pay in advance for these things,” said
Sharp. “It's time enough to pay for a thing when
you get it. I'll subscribe for it, if you have a mind
to receive your pay at the end of the year, and not
otherwise.”

“That's against my rule,” said Peter; “I have all
my subscribers pay in advance.”

“Well, it's against my rule to pay for anything
before I get it,” said Sharp; “so if you have n't a
mind to take my subscription, to be paid at the end
of the year, you won't get it at all. That's the long
and the short of the matter.”

-- 219 --

[figure description] Page 219.[end figure description]

Peter paused a little, and queried with himself as
to what he had better do. The man was evidently
doing a large business, and was undoubtedly rich—a
wholesale dealer and an importer—there could not
possibly be any danger of losing the subscription in
such a case: and would it not be better to break over
his rule for once, than to lose so good a subscriber.

“Well, what say?” said Sharp; “do as you like;
but those are my only terms. I will not pay for a
thing before I get it.”

“On the whole,” said Peter, “I have a good mind
to break over my rule this time, for I don't like to
lose a good subscriber when I can find one. I believe
I'll put your name down, sir. Where will you have
it left?”

“At my house,” said Mr. Sharp, which was about
a mile and a half from his store, away up town.

The business being thus concluded, Peter took up
his magazines, bade Mr. Sharp good morning, and
left the store. No further personal intercourse
occurred between them during the year. But Peter,
who was his own carrier, as well as canvasser, regularly
every month delivered the New England Magazine
at Mr. Sharp's door. And in a few days after
the year expired, he made out his bill for the five

-- 220 --

[figure description] Page 220.[end figure description]

dollars, and called at Mr. Sharp's store for the money.
He entered with as much confidence that he should
receive the chink at once, as he would have had in
going with a check for the like sum into the Bank of
the United States, during that institution's palmiest
days. He found Mr. Sharp at his desk, and presented
him the bill. That gentleman took it and looked at
it, and then looked at Peter.

“Oh! ah, good morning,” said he, “you are the
young man who called here on this business nearly a
year ago. Well, the year has come round, has it?”

“Yes, I believe it has,” said Peter.

“Well, bills of this kind,” said Mr. Sharp, “are
paid at the house. We don't attend to them here;
you just take it to the house, any time when you are
passing, and it will be settled.”

“Oh, very well, sir,” said Peter, bowing, and left
the store. “Doing too large a business at the store,
I suppose,” he continued, to himself, as he walked up
the street, “to attend to little things of this kind.
Don't like to be bothered with 'em, probably.”

But Peter thought he might as well make a finish
of the business, now he was out; so he went directly
to the house, and rung at the door. The servant girl
soon made her appearance.

-- 221 --

[figure description] Page 221.[end figure description]

“Mrs. Sharp within?” said Peter.

“Yes, sir,” said the girl.

“Jest carry this bill to her, if you please, and ask
her if she will hand you the money for it.”

The girl took the bill into the house, and presently
returned with the answer, that “Mrs. Sharp says she
does n't pay none of these 'ere things here—you must
carry it to the store.”

“Please to carry it back to Mrs. Sharp,” said
Peter, “and tell her Mr. Sharp desired me to bring
the bill here, and said it would be paid at the house.”

This message brought Mrs. Sharp herself to the door,
to whom Peter raised his hat and bowed very politely.

“I have n't nothing at all to do with the bills here
at the house,” said the lady; `they must be carried
to the store—that's the place to attend to them.”

“Well, ma'am,” said Peter, “I carried it to the
store, and presented it to Mr. Sharp, and he told me
to bring it to the house and you would pay it here,
and that he could n't attend to it at the store.”

“But he could n't mean that I should pay it,” said
Mrs. Sharp, “for he knows I have n't the money.”

“But he said so,” said Peter.

“Well then there must be some mistake about it,”
said the lady.

-- 222 --

[figure description] Page 222.[end figure description]

“I beg your pardon, ma'am,” said Peter, “it's
possible there may be,” and he put the bill in his
pocket, bowed, and left the house.

“It is very queer,” thought Peter to himself as he
walked away a little vexed. “I can't conceive how
there could be any mistake about it, though it is possible
there may be. There could n't be any mistake
on my part, for I'm sure I understood him. Maybe
he thought she had money at the house when she
had n't. I guess it will all come out right enough in
the end.”

Consoling himself with these reflections, Peter
Punctual thought he would let Mr. Sharp rest two or
three days, and not show any anxiety by calling again
in a hurry. He would not be so unwise as to offend
a good subscriber, and run the hazard of losing him,
by an appearance of too much haste in presenting his
bills. Accordingly, in about three days, he called
again at Mr. Sharp's store, and asked him in a low
voice, so that no one should overhear, if it was convenient
for him to take that little bill for the magazine
to-day.

“But I told you,” said Mr. Sharp, “to carry that
bill to the house; I can't attend to it here.”

“Yes, sir, so I understood you,” said Peter, “and I

-- 223 --

[figure description] Page 223.[end figure description]

carried it to the house, and Mrs. Sharp said she
could n't pay it there, for she had no money, and I
must bring it to the store.”

“Oh, strange!” said Mr. Sharp; “well, she did n't
properly understand it then. But I am too much
engaged to attend to you to-day; you call again, or
call at the house sometime, when I am there.”

Upon this, he turned to his desk and began to
write with great earnestness, and Peter left the store.
The affair began to grow a little vexations, and
Peter felt a little nettled. Still, he supposed that
people doing such very large business did find it difficult
to attend to these little matters, and doubtless it
would be set right when he should call again.

After waiting patiently a couple of weeks, Peter
called again at Mr. Sharp's store. When he entered
the door, Mr. Sharp was looking at a newspaper; but
on glancing at Peter, he instantly dropped the paper,
and fell to writing at his desk with great rapidity.
Peter waited respectfully a few minutes, unwilling to
disturb the gentleman till he should appear to be a
little more at leisure. But after waiting some time
without seeing any prospect of Mr. Sharp's completing
the very pressing business before him, he approached
him with deference, and asked if it would be

-- 224 --

[figure description] Page 224.[end figure description]

convenient for him to take that little bill for the magazine
to-day. Sharp turned and looked at Peter very sternly.

“I can't be bothered with these little things,” said
he “when I am so much engaged. I am exceedingly
busy to-day—a good many heavy orders waiting—
you must call at the house, and hand the bill to me or
my wife, no matter which.” And he turned to his
desk, and continued to write, without saying anything
more.

Peter began to think he had got hold of a hard
customer: but he had no idea of giving up the chase.

He called at the house several times afterward, but
Mr. Sharp never happened to be at home. Once he
ventured to send the bill again by the girl to Mrs.
Sharp, who returned for answer, that she had nothing
to do with such bills; he must carry it to the store.

At last, after repeated calls, he found Mr. Sharp
one day at home. He came to the door, and Peter
presented the bill. Mr. Sharp expressed some surprise
and regret that he had come away from the
store, and forgot to put any money in his pocket.
Peter would have to call some other day. Accordingly,
Peter Punctual retired, with a full determination
to call some other day, and that not very far
distant; for it had now been several months that he

-- 225 --

[figure description] Page 225.[end figure description]

had been beaten back and forth like a shuttle-cock
between Mr. Sharp's store and Mr. Sharp's house,
and he was getting to be rather tired of the game.

Having ascertained from the girl at what hour the
family dined, he called the next day precisely at the
dinner hour. He rung at the door, and when the
girl opened it, Peter stepped into the hall.

“Is Mr. Sharp in?” said Peter.

“Yes, sir,” said the girl; “he's up stairs. I'll
speak to him if you want to see him.”

“Yes,” said Peter, “and I'll take a seat in the
parlor till he comes down.”

As he said this, Peter walked into the parlor and
seated himself upon an elegant sofa. The parlor was
richly furnished with Brussels carpet, the best of
mahogany furniture, a splendid piano, &c., &c.; and
in the back parlor, to which folding doors were open,
everything appeared with corresponding elegance.
A table was there spread, upon which dinner seemed
to be nearly ready. Presently the girl returned from
the chamber, and informed Peter, that Mr. Sharp
said “it was jest the dinner hour now, and he would
have to call again.”

“Please to go and tell Mr. Sharp,” said Peter, “that
I must see him, and I'll wait till he comes down.”

-- 226 --

[figure description] Page 226.[end figure description]

The girl carried the message, and Mr. Sharp soon
made his appearance in the parlor. A frown passed
over his brow as he looked at Peter and saw him sitting
so much at ease, and apparently so much at
home, upon the sofa. Peter rose and asked him
politely if it was convenient for him to take that little
bill to-day.

“No,” said Sharp, “it is not; and if it was, I
would n't take it at this hour. It's a very improper
time to call upon such an errand just as one is going
to sit down to dinner. You must call again; but
don't call at dinner time; or you may drop into the
store sometime, and perhaps I may find time to at
tend to it there.”

“Well, now, Mr. Sharp,” said Peter, with rather a
determined look, “I can't stand this kind of business
any longer, that's a fact. I'm a poor man, and I suppose
you are a rich one. I can't afford to lose five
dollars, and I'm too poor to spend any more time in
running after it and trying to collect it. I must eat,
as well as other folks, and if you can't pay me the
five dollars to-day, to help me pay my board at my
regular boarding-house, I'll stay here and board it
out at your table.”

“You will, will you?' said Sharp, looking daggers,

-- 227 --

[figure description] Page 227.[end figure description]

and stepping toward Peter. “If you give me a word
of your impudence, you may find it'll be a long time
before you collect your bill.”

“It's been a long time already,” said Peter, “and I
can't afford to wait any longer. My mind is made
up; if you don't pay me now, I'm going to stay here
and board it out.”

Sharp colored, and looked at the door, and then at
Peter.

“Come, come, young man,” said he advancing,
with rather a threatening attitude, toward Peter, “the
sooner you leave the house peaceably the better.”

“Now, sir,” said Peter, fixing his black eyes upon
Sharp, with an intenseness that he could not but feel,
“I am a small man, and you are considerable of a
large one; but my mind is made up. I am not going
to starve, when there's food enough that I have an
honest claim upon.”

So saying, he took his seat again very deliberately
upon the sofa. Sharp paused; he looked agitated
and angry; and after waiting a minute, apparently
undecided what to do, he left the parlor and went up
stairs. In a few minutes, the servant rung for dinner.
Mrs. Sharp came into the dining room and took her
seat at the head of the table. Mr. Sharp followed,

-- 228 --

[figure description] Page 228.[end figure description]

and seated himself opposite his lady; and between
them, and on the right hand of Mrs. Sharp, sat another
lady, probably some friend or relative of the family.
When they were well seated, and Mr. Sharp was
beginning to carve, Peter walked out of the parlor,
drew another chair up to the table, and seated himself
very composedly opposite the last-mentioned lady.
Mr. Sharp colored a good deal, but kept on carving.
Mrs. Sharp stared very wildly, first at Peter and then
at her husband.

“What in the world does this mean?” said she.
“Mr. Sharp, I did n't know we were to have company
to dinner.”

“We are not,” said the husband. “This young
man has the impudence to take his seat at the table
unasked, and says he is going to board out the amount
of the bill.”

“Well, really, this is a pretty piece of politeness,”
said Mrs. Sharp, looking very hard at Peter.

“Madam,” said Peter, “hunger will drive a man
through a stone wall. I must have my board somewhere.”

No reply was made to this, and the dinner went on
without any further reference to Peter at present
Mr Sharp helped his wife, and then the other lady

-- 229 --

[figure description] Page 229.[end figure description]

and then himself, and they all fell to eating. Peter
looked around him for a plate and knife and fork, but
there were none on the table but what were in use.
Peter, however, was not to be baffled. He reached a
plate of bread, and tipping the bread upon the table
cloth, appropriated the plate for his own convenience.
He then took possession of the carving knife and fork,
helped himself bountifully to meat and vegetables,
and commenced eating his dinner with the greatest
composure imaginable. These operations on the part
of Peter, had the effect to suspend all operations for
the time on the part of the rest of the company. The
ladies had laid down their knives and forks, and were
staring at Peter in wild astonishment.

“For mercy's sake, Mr. Sharp,” said the lady of the
house, “can't we pick up money enough about the
house to pay this man his five dollars and send him
off? I declare this is too provoking. I'll see what I
can find.”

With that she rose and left the room. Mr. Sharp
presently followed her. They returned again in a
minute, and Mr. Sharp laid a five dollar bill before
Peter, and told him he would thank him to leave the
house. Peter examined the bill to see if it was a good
one, and very quietly folded it and put it into his

-- 230 --

[figure description] Page 230.[end figure description]

pocket. He then drew out a little pocket inkstand
and a piece of paper, laid it upon the table before
him, wrote a receipt for the money, which he handed
to Mr. Sharp, rose from the table, bowed to the company
and retired, thinking as he left the house that he
had had full enough of the custom of Solomon Sharp,
the importer.

Peter Punctual still followed his vocation of circulating
magazines. He had no intention of ever
darkening the door of Mr. Solomon Sharp's store
again, but somehow or other, two or three years after,
as he was canvassing for subscribers in the lower part
of the city, he happened to blunder into the same
store accidentally, without noticing the name upon
the door. Nor did he discover his mistake, until he
had nearly crossed the store and attracted the attention
of Mr. Sharp himself, who was at his accustomed
seat at the desk where Peter had before so often seen
him. Peter thought, as he had got fairly into the
store, he would not back out; so he stepped up to
Mr. Sharp without a look of recognition, and asked
if he would not like to subscribe for some magazines.
Mr. Sharp, who either did not recognize Peter, or
chose not to appear to recognize him, took the magazines
and looked at them, and found a couple he said

-- 331 --

[figure description] Page 331.[end figure description]

he would like to take, and inquired the terms. They
were each three dollars a year in advance.

“But I don't pay in advance for anything,” said
Sharp. “If you have a mind to leave them at my
house, to be paid for at the end of the year, you may
put me down for these two.”

“No,” said Peter, “I don't wish to take any subscribers,
but those who pay in advance.”

Saying this, he took up his specimens, and was
going out the door, when Mr. Sharp called him
back.

“Here young man, you may leave these two at any
rate,” said he, “and here's your advance,” handing
him the six dollars.

“Where will you have them left?” said Peter.

“At my house, up town,” said Mr. Sharp, describing
the street and number.

The business being completed, Peter retired, much
astonished at his good luck. He again became a
monthly visitor at Mr. Sharp's door, where he regularly
delivered to the servant girl the two magazines.
Two or three months after this, when he called one
day on his usual round, the girl told him that Mr.
Sharp wanted to see him, and desired he would call
at the store. Peter felt not a little curious to know

-- 232 --

[figure description] Page 232.[end figure description]

what Mr. Sharp might have to say to him; so in the
course of the same day he called at Mr. Sharp's
store.

“Good morning,” said Mr. Sharp as Peter entered;
“come, take a chair, and sit down here.”

Peter, with a “good morning, sir,” did as he was
desired.

“Ain't you the young man,” said Mr. Sharp, with
a comical kind of a look, “who set out to board out
a subscription to the New England Magazine at my
house two or three years ago.”

“Yes,” said Peter, “I believe I'm the same person
who once had the honor of taking board at your
house.”

“Well,” said Mr. Sharp, “I want to give you a
job.”

“What is it?” said Peter.

“Here, I want you to collect these bills for me,”
said Mr. Sharp, taking a bundle from his desk, “for
I'll be hanged if I can; I've tried till I'm tired.”

Whereupon he opened the bundle and assorted out
the bills, and made a schedule of them, amounting,
in the aggregate, to about a thousand dollars.

“There,” said he, “I will give upon that list ten
per cent. commission on all you collect; and on that

-- 233 --

[figure description] Page 233.[end figure description]

list I'll give you twenty-five per cent. on all you collect.
What say you? will you undertake the job?”

“Well, I'll try,” said Peter, “and see what I can
do with them. How soon must I return them?”

“Take your own time for it,” said Mr. Sharp;
“I've seen enough of you to know pretty well what
you are.”

Peter accordingly took the bills and entered on his
new task, following it up with diligence and perseverance.
In a few weeks he called again at Sharp's
store.

“Well,” said Mr. Sharp, “have you made out to
collect anything on those bills?”

“Yes,” said Peter.

“There were some of the ten per cent. list that I
thought it probable you might collect,” said Mr.
Sharp. “How many have you collected?”

“All of them,” said Peter.

“All of them!” said Mr. Sharp; “well, fact, that's
much more than I expected. The twenty-five per
cent. list was all dead dogs, was n't it? You got
nothing on them, I suppose, did you?”

“Yes, I did,” said Peter.

“Did you though? How much?” said Sharp.

“I got them all,” said Peter.

-- 234 --

[figure description] Page 234.[end figure description]

“Oh, that's all a joke,” said Sharp.

“No, it is n't a joke,” said Peter. “I've collected
every dollar of them, and here's the money,” taking
out his pocket-book, and counting out the bills.

Mr. Sharp received the money with the most perfect
astonishment. He had not expected one-half of
the amount would ever be collected.

He counted out the commissions on the ten per cent.
list, and then the commissions on the twenty-five per
cent. list, and handed the sum over to Peter. And
then he counted out fifty dollars more, and asked Peter
to accept that as a present; “partly,” said he, “because
you have accomplished this task so very far beyond
my expectations, and partly because my acquaintance
with you has taught me one of the best lessons of my
life. It has taught me the value of perseverance and
punctuality. I have reflected upon it much ever
since you undertook to board out the bill for the
magazine at my house.”

“Why yes,” said Peter, “I think perseverance and
punctuality are great helps in the way of business.”

“If every person in the community,” said Mr.
Sharp, “would make it a point to pay all of his bills
promptly, the moment they become due, what a vast
improvement it would make in the condition of

-- 235 --

[figure description] Page 235.[end figure description]

society all round. That would put people in a condition,
at all times, to be able to pay their bills promptly.”

We might add, that Peter Punctual afterward
opened a store in the city, in a branch of business
which brought Mr. Sharp to be a customer to him,
and he has been one of his best customers ever since,
paying all of his bills promptly, and whenever Peter
requires it, even paying in advance.

-- 236 --

p689-249 CHAPTER X. THE SPECULATOR.

[figure description] Page 236.[end figure description]

In the autumn of 1836, while travelling through a
portion of the interior of the State of Maine, I stopped
at a small new village, between the Kennebec and
Penobscot rivers, nearly a hundred miles from the
sea-board, for the purpose of giving my horse a little
rest and provender, before proceeding some ten miles
farther that evening. It was just after sunset; I was
walking on the piazza, in front of the neat new
tavern, admiring the wildness of the surrounding
country, and watching the gathering shadows of the
grey twilight, as it fell upon the valleys, and crept
softly up the hills, when a light one-horse wagon,
with a single gentleman, drove rapidly into the yard,
and stopped at the stable door.

“Tom,” said the gentleman to the ostler as he
jumped from his wagon, “take my mare out, rub her
down well, and give her four quarts of oats. Be
spry, now, Tom; you need n't give her any water, for

-- 237 --

[figure description] Page 237.[end figure description]

she sweats like fury. I'll give her a little when I am
ready to start.”

Tom sprang with uncommon alacrity to obey the
orders he had received, and the stranger walked
toward the house. He was a tall, middle-aged gentleman,
rather thin, but well proportioned, and well
dressed. It was the season of the year when the
weather began to grow chilly, and the evenings cold;
and the frock-coat of the stranger, trimmed with fur,
and buttoned to the throat, while it insured comfort,
served also to exhibit his fine elastic form to the best
advantage. His little wagon, too, had a marked air
of comfort about it; there were the spring-seat, the
stuffed cushions, and buffalo robes; all seemed to indicate
a gentleman of ease and leisure; while, on the
other hand, his rapid movements and prompt manner,
betokened the man of business. As he stepped on to
the piazza, with his long and handsome driving-whip
in his hand, the tavern-keeper, who was a brisk young
man, and well understood his business, met him with
a hearty shake of the hand, and a familiar “How are
you, Colonel? Come, walk in.”

There was something about the stranger that
strongly attracted my attention, and I followed him
into the bar-room. He stepped up to the bar, laid

-- 238 --

[figure description] Page 238.[end figure description]

his whip on the counter, and called for a glass of
brandy and water, with some small crackers and
cheese.

“But not going to stop to supper, Colonel? Going
farther to-night?” inquired the landlord, as he pushed
forward the brandy bottle.

“Can't stop more than ten minutes,” replied the
stranger; “just long enough to let the mare eat her
oats.”

“Is that the same mare,” asked the host, “that
you had when you were here last?”

“Yes,” answered the colonel: “I've drove her
thirty miles since dinner, and am going forty miles
farther, before I stop.”

“But you'll kill that mare, colonel, as sure as
rates,” said the landlord; “she's too likely a beast to
drive to death.”

“No, no,” was the reply; “she's tough as a pitchknot;
I feed her well; she'll stand it, I guess. I go
to Norridgewock before I sleep to-night.”

With a few more brief remarks, the stranger finished
his brandy, and crackers and cheese; he threw
down some change on the counter, ordered his carriage
brought to the door, and bidding his landlord
good night, jumped into his wagon, cracked his whip

-- 239 --

[figure description] Page 239.[end figure description]

and was off like a bird. After he was gone, I ventured
to exercise the Yankee privilege of asking
“who he might be.”

“That's Colonel Kingston,” said the landlord; “a
queer sort of a chap he is, too; a real go-ahead sort
of a fellow as ever I met with; does more more business
in one day than some folks would do in a year.
He's a right good customer; always full of money,
and pays well.”

“What business or profession does he follow?” I
asked.

“Why, not any particular business,” replied the
landlord; “he kind o' speculates round, and sich
like.”

“But,” said I, “I thought the speculation in timberlands
was over; I did n't know that a single person
could be found, now, to purchase lands.”

“Oh, it is n't exactly that kind of speculation,” said
the landlord; “he's got a knack of buying out folks'
farms; land, house, barn, live stock, hay, and provisions,
all in the lump.”

“Where does he live?” said I.

“Oh, he's lived round in a number of places, since
he's been in these parts. He's been round in these
towns only a year or two, and it's astonishing to see

-- 240 --

[figure description] Page 240.[end figure description]

how much property he's accumulated. He stays in
Monson most of the time, now. That's where he
came from this afternoon. They say he's got a number
of excellent farms in Monson, and I'll warrant he's got
some deeds of some more of 'em with him, now, that
he's going to carry to Norridgewock to-night, to put
on record.”

I bade the landlord good evening, and proceeded on
my journey. What I had seen and heard of Colonel
Kingston, had made an unwonted impression on my
mind; and as Monson lay in my route, and I was
expecting to stop there a few days, my curiosity was
naturally a little excited, to learn something more of
his history. The next day I reached Monson; and as I
rode over its many hills, and along its fine ridges of
arable land, I was struck with the number of fine
farms which I passed, and the evidences of thrift and
good husbandry that surrounded me. As this town
was at that time almost on the extreme verge of the
settlements in that part of the state, I was surprised
to find it so well settled, and under such good cultivation.
My surprise was increased, on arriving at the
centre of the town, to find a flourishing and bright-looking
village, with two or three stores, a variety of
mechanics' shops, a school-house, and a neat little

-- 241 --

[figure description] Page 241.[end figure description]

church, painted white, with green blinds, and surmounted
by a bell. A little to the westward of the
village, was one of those clear and beautiful ponds,
that greet the eye of the traveller in almost every
hour's ride in that section of the country; and on its
outlet, which ran through the village, stood a mill, and
some small manufacturing establishments, that served
to fill up the picture.

“Happy town!” thought I, “that has such a
delightful village for its centre of attraction, and happy
village that is supported by surrounding farmers of
such thrift and industry as those of Monson!” All
this, too, I had found within a dozen or fifteen miles
of Moosehead Lake, the noblest and most extensive
sheet of water in New England, which I had hitherto
considered so far embosomed in the deep, trackless
forest, as to be almost unapproachable, save by the
wild Indian or the daring hunter. A new light seemed
to burst upon me; and it was a pleasant thought that
led me to look forward but a few years, when the rugged
and wild shores of the great Moosehead should
resound with the hum and the song of the husbandman,
and on every side rich farms and lively vilages
should be reflected on its bosom.

I had been quietly seated in the village inn but a

-- 242 --

[figure description] Page 242.[end figure description]

short time, in a room that served both for bar and
sitting-room, when a small man, with a flapped hat,
an old brown “wrapper,” a leather strap buckled
round his waist, and holding a goad-stick in his hand,
entered the room, and took a seat on a bench in the
corner. His bright, restless eye glanced round the
room, and then seemed to be bent thoughtfully toward
the fire, while in the arch expression of his countenance
I thought I beheld the prelude to some important
piece of intelligence, that was struggling for
utterance. At last, said he, addressing the landlord,
“I guess the colonel ain't about home to-day, is he?”

“No,” replied Boniface, “he's been gone since
yesterday morning; he said he was going up into
your neighborhood. Have n't you seen anything of
him?”

“Yes,” said the little man with the goad-stick, “I
see him yesterday afternoon about two o'clock, starting
off like a streak, to go to Norridgewock.”

“Gone to Norridgewock!” said the landlord;
“what for? He did n't say nothing about going
when he went away.”

“More deeds, I guess,” said the little teamster.
“He's worried Deacon Stone out of his farm, at
last.”

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

"He han't got Deacon Stone's Farm, has he?" exclaimed the landlord. PAGE 243. [figure description] Illustration page. A man stands amongst a group of men and is looking downwards. Three men are seated around him and one more stands behind him. A woman is standing in the doorway to the room. One of the seated men is holding a walking stick. There is a trunk sitting behind another seated man. All the people look anxious.[end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- 243 --

[figure description] Page 243.[end figure description]

“He has n't got Deacon Stone's farm, has he?”
exclaimed the landlord.

“Deacon Stone's farm!” reiterated an elderly,
sober-looking man, drawing a long pipe from his
mouth, which he had until now been quietly smoking
in the opposite corner.

“Deacon Stone's farm!” uttered the landlady, with
upraised hands, as she entered the room just in season
to hear the announcement.

“Deacon Stone's farm!” exclaimed three or four
others, in different parts of the room, all turning an
eager look toward the little man with the goad-stick.
As soon as there was a sufficient pause in these
exclamations, to allow the teamster to put in another
word, he repeated:

“Yes, he's worried the deacon out, at last, and
got hold of his farm, as slick as a whistle. He's been
kind o' edging round the deacon this three weeks, a
little to a time; jest enough to find out how to get
the right side of him; for the deacon was a good
deal offish, and yesterday morning the colonel was up
there by the time the deacon had done breakfast; and
he got them into the deacon's fore room, and shet the
door; and there they staid till dinner was ready, and had
waited for them an hour, before they would come out.

-- 244 --

[figure description] Page 244.[end figure description]

And when they had come out, the job was all done;
and the deed was signed, sealed, and delivered. I'd
been there about eleven o'clock, and the deacon's
wife and the gals were in terrible fidgets for fear of
what was going on in t'other room. They started to
go in, two or three times, but the door was fastened,
so they had to keep out. After dinner I went over
again, and got there just before they were out of the
fore room. The deacon asked the colonel to stop to
dinner, but I guess the colonel see so many sour looks
about the house, that he was afraid of a storm abrewing;
so he only ketched up a piece of bread and
cheese, and said he must be a-goin'. He jumped into
his wagon, and give his mare a cut, and was out of
sight in two minutes.”

“How did poor Mrs. Stone feel?” asked the landlady;
“I should thought she would a-died.”

“She looked as if she'd turn milk sour quicker than
a thunder-shower,” said the teamster: “and Jane
went into the bedroom, and cried as if her heart
would break. I believe they did n't any of 'em make
out to eat any dinner, and I thought the deacon felt
about as bad as any of 'em, after all; for I never see
him look so kind o' riled in my life. `Now Mrs.
Stone,' said he to his wife, `you think I've done

-- 245 --

[figure description] Page 245.[end figure description]

wrong; but after talking along with Colonel Kingston,
I made up my mind it would be for the best.'
She did n't make him any answer, but begun to cry,
and went out of the room. The deacon looked as if
he would sink into the 'arth. He stood a minute or
two, as if he was n't looking at nothing, and then he
took down his pipe off the mantel, and sat down in
the corner, and went to smoking as hard as he could
smoke.

“After a while, he turned round to me, and says he,
`Neighbor, I don't know but I've done wrong.'
`Well,' says I, `in my opinion, that depends upon
what sort of a bargain you've made. If you've got a
good bargain out of the colonel, I don't see why his
money is n't worth as much as anybody's, or why
another farm as good as your'n is n't worth as much.'
`Yes,' said the deacon, `so it seems to me. I've
got a good bargain, I know; it's more than the
farm is worth. I never considered it worth more
than two thousand dollars, stock, and hay, and all;
and he takes the whole jest as 'tis, and gives me three
thousand dollars.' `Is it pay down?' says I. `Yes,'
says he, `it's all pay down. He gives me three
hundred dollars in cash; I've got it in my pocket;
and then he gives me an order on Saunders' store for

-- 246 --

[figure description] Page 246.[end figure description]

two hundred dollars; that's as good as money, you
know; for we are always wanting one thing or
another out of his store. Then he gives me a deed of
five hundred acres, of land, in the upper part of Vermont,
at five dollars an acre. That makes up three
thousand dollars. But that is n't all; he says this
land is richly worth seven dollars an acre; well timbered,
and a good chance to get the timber down;
and he showed me certificates of several respectable
men, that had been all over it, and they said it was
well worth seven dollars. That gives me two dollars
clear profit on an acre, which on five hundred acres
makes a thousand dollars. So that instead of three
thousand dollars, I s'pose I've really got four thousand
for the farm. But then it seems to work up the feelings
of the women folks so, to think of leaving it, after
we've got it so well under way, that I don't know
but I've done wrong.' And his feelings came over
him so, that he begun to smoke away again as hard
as he could draw. I did n't know what to say to him,
for I did n't believe he would ever get five hundred
dollars for his five hundred acres of land, so I got up
and went home.”

As my little goad-stick teamster made a pause here,
the elderly man in the opposite corner, who had sat

-- 247 --

[figure description] Page 247.[end figure description]

all this time knocking his pipe-bowl on the thumbnail
of his left hand, took up the thread of discourse.

“I'm afraid,” says he, looking up at the landlord,
“I'm afraid Deacon Stone has got tricked out of his
farm for a mere song. That Colonel Kingston, in my
opinion, is a dangerous man, and ought to be looked
after.”

“Well, I declare!” said the landlord, “I'd no idee
he would get hold of Deacon Stone's farm. That's
one of the best farms in the town.”

“Yes,” replied the man with the pipe, “and that
makes seven of the “best farms in town that he's got
hold of already; and what 'll be the end of it, I don't
know; but I think something ought to be done about
it.”

“Well, there,” said the landlady, “I do pity Mrs.
Stone from the bottom of my heart; she'll never get
over it the longest day she lives.”

Here the little man with the goad-stick, looking out
the window, saw his team starting off up the road,
and he flew out of the door, screaming “Hush!
whoa! hush!” and that was the last I saw of him.
But my curiosity was now too much excited, with
regard to Colonel Kingston's mysterious operations,
and my sympathies for good Deacon Stone, and his

-- 248 --

[figure description] Page 248.[end figure description]

fellow-sufferers, were too thoroughly awakened, to
allow me to rest without farther inquiries.

During the days that I remained in the neighborhood,
I learned that he came from Vermont; that he
had visited Monson several times within a year or
two, and had made it his home there for the last
few months During that time he had exercised an
influence over some of the honest and sober-minded
farmers of Monson, that was perfectly unaccountable.
He was supposed to be a man of wealth, for he never
seemed to lack money for any operation he chose to
undertake. He had a bold, dashing air, and rather
fascinating manners, and his power over those with
whom he conversed had become so conspicuous, that
it was regarded as an inevitable consequence in
Monson, if a farmer chanced to get shut up in a room
with Colonel Kingston, he was a “gone goose,” and
sure to come out well stripped of his feathers. He
had actually got possession of seven or eight of the
best farms in the town, for about one quarter part of
their real value.

It may be thought unaccountable, that thriving, sensible
farmers could in so many instances be duped;
but there were some extraneous circumstances that
helped to produce the result. The wild spirit of

-- 249 --

[figure description] Page 249.[end figure description]

speculation, which had raged throughout the country for
two or three years, had pervaded almost every mind,
and rendered it restless, and desirous of change. And
then the seasons, for a few years past, had been cold
and unfavorable. The farmer had sowed and had not
reaped, and he was discouraged. If he could sell, he
would go to a warmer climate. These influences,
added to his own powers of adroitness and skill in
making “the worse appear the better reason,” had
enabled Colonel Kingston to inveigle the farmers of
Monson out of their hard-earned property, and turn
them, houseless and poor, upon the world.

The public mind had become much excited upon
the subject, and the case of Deacon Stone added fresh
fuel to the fire. It was in this state of affairs that I
left Monson, and heard no more of Colonel Kingston
until the following summer, when another journey
called me into that neighborhood, and I learned the
sequel to his fortunes. The colonel made but few
more conquests, after his victory over Deacon Stone;
and the experience of a cold and cheerless winter,
which soon overtook them, brought the deluded
farmers to their senses. The trifling sums of money
which they received in hand, were soon exhausted in
providing necessary supplies for their families; and

-- 250 --

[figure description] Page 250.[end figure description]

the property which they had obtained, as principal
payment for their farms, turned out to be of little value,
or was so situated that they could turn it to no profitable
account. Day after day, through the winter, the
excitement increased, and spread, and waxed more
intense, as the unfortunate condition of the sufferers
became more generally known. “Colonel Kingston”
was the great and absorbing topic of discussion, at
the stores, at the tavern, at evening parties, and sleigh-rides,
and even during intermission at church, on the
Sabbath.

The indignation of the people had reached that
pitch which usually leads to acts of violence.
Colonel Kingston was now regarded as a monster,
preying upon the peace and happiness of society, and
various were the expedients proposed to rid the town
of him. The schoolboys, in the several districts,
discussed the matter, and resolved to form a grand
company, to snowball him out of town, and only
waited a nod of approbation from some of their
parents or teachers, to carry their resolutions into
effect. Some reckless young men were for seizing
him, and giving him a public horse-whipping, in
front of the tavern at mid-day, and in presence of the
whole village. Others, equally violent, but less

-- 251 --

[figure description] Page 251.[end figure description]

daring, proposed catching him out, some dark evening,
giving him a good coat of tar-and-feathers, and
riding him out of town on a rail. But the older,
more experienced, and sober-minded men, shook their
heads at these rash projects, and said: “It is a bad
plan for people to take the law into their own hands;
as long as we live under good laws, it is best to be
governed by them. Such kind of squabbles as you
young folks want to get into, most always turn out
bad in the end.”

So reasoned the old folks; but they were nevertheless
as eager and as determined to get rid of Colonel
Kingston, as were the young ones, though more cautious
and circumspect as to the means. At last, after
many consultations and much perplexity, Deacon
Stone declared one day, with much earnestness, to his
neighbors and townsmen, who were assembled at the
village, that “For his part, he believed it was best to
appeal at once to the laws of the land; and if they
would n't give protection to the citizen, he did n't
know what would. For himself, he verily believed
Colonel Kingston might be charged with swindling,
and if a complaint was to be made to the Grand Jury
he did n't believe but they would have him indicated
and tried in Court, and give back the people their

-- 252 --

[figure description] Page 252.[end figure description]

farms again.” The deacon spoke feelingly, on the
subject, and his words found a ready response in the
hearts of all present. It was at once agreed to present
Colonel Kingston to the Grand Jury, when the
Court should next be in session at Norridgewock.
Accordingly, when the next Court was held, Monson
was duly represented before the grand inquest for the
county of Somerset, and such an array of facts and
evidence was exhibited, that the Jury, without hesitation,
found a bill against the colonel for swindling, and
a warrant was immediately issued for his apprehension.

This crisis had been some months maturing, and
the warm summer had now commenced. The forest
trees were now in leaf; and though the ground was
yet wet and muddy, the days began to be hot and
uncomfortable. It was a warm moonlight evening,
when the officer arrived at Monson with the warrant.
He had taken two assistants with him, mounted on
fleet horses, and about a dozen stout young men of
the village were in his train as volunteers. They
approached the tavern where Colonel Kingston
boarded, and just as they were turning from the road
up to the house, the form of a tall, slim person was
seen in the bright moonlight, gliding from the back-door,
and crossing the garden.

-- 253 --

[figure description] Page 253.[end figure description]

“There he goes!” exclaimed a dozen Monson voices
at once; “that's he!—there he goes!”

And sure enough, it was he! Whether he had been
notified of his danger, by some traitor, or had seen
from the window the approach of the party, and suspected
mischief was at hand, was never known. But
the moment he heard these exclamations, he sprang
from the ground as if a bullet had pierced his heart.
He darted across the garden, leaped the fence at a
bound, and flew over the adjacent pasture with the
speed of a race-horse. In a moment the whole party
were in full pursuit; and in five minutes more, a
hundred men and boys, of all ages, roused by the cry
that now rang through the village, were out, and joining
in the race. The fields were rough, and in some
places quite wet, so that running across them was
rather a difficult and hazardous business. The direction
which Kingston at first seemed inclined to take,
would lead him into the main road, beyond the corner,
nearly a half a mile off. But those who were mounted
put spurs to their horses, and reaching the spot before
him, headed him off in another direction. He now
flew from field to field, leaping fence after fence, and
apparently aiming for the deep forest, on the eastern
part of the town. Many of his pursuers were athletic

-- 254 --

[figure description] Page 254.[end figure description]

young men, and they gave him a hot chase. Even
Deacon Stone, who had come to the village that evening
to await the arrival of the officer—even the deacon,
now in the sixty-first year of his age, ran like a
boy. He kept among the foremost of the pursuers, and
once getting within about a dozen rods of the fugitive,
his zeal burst forth into words, and he cried out, in a
tremulous voice: “Stop! you infernal villain!—stop!”
This was the nearest approach he had made to profanity
for forty years; and when the sound of the words
he had uttered fell full on his ear, his nerves received
such a shock that his legs trembled and he was no
longer able to sustain his former speed.

The colonel, however, so far from obeying the
emphatic injunction of the deacon, rather seemed to
be inspired by it to new efforts of flight. Over log,
bog and brook, stumps, stones and fences, he flew like
a wild deer; and after a race of some two miles, during
which he was at no time more than twenty rods from
some of his pursuers, he plunged into a thick dark forest.
Hearing his adversaries close upon him, after he
had entered the wood, and being almost entirely
exhausted, he threw himself under the side of a large
fallen tree, where he was darkly sheltered by a thick
clump of alders. His pursuers rushed furiously on,

-- 255 --

[figure description] Page 255.[end figure description]

many of them within his hearing, and some of them
passing over the very tree under which he lay. After
scouring the forest for a mile round, without finding
any traces of the fugitive, they began to retreat to the
opening, and Kingston heard enough of their remarks,
on their return, to learn that his retreat from the woods
that night would be well guarded against, and that
the next day Monson would pour out all its force, “to
hunt him to the ends of the 'arth, but what they
would have him!”

Under this comfortable assurance, he was little disposed
to take much of a night's rest, where he would
be sure to be discovered and overtaken in the morning.
But what course to take, and what measures to
adopt, was a difficult question for him to answer. To
return to Monson opening, he well knew would be to
throw himself into the hands of his enemies; and if
he remained in the woods till next day, he foresaw
there would be but a small chance of escape from the
hundreds on every side, who would be on the alert to
take him. North of him was the new town of Elliotville,
containing some fifteen or twenty families, and to
the south, lay Guilford, a well-settled farming town;
but he knew he would be no more safe in either of
those settlements than he would in Monson. East of

-- 256 --

[figure description] Page 256.[end figure description]

him lay an unsettled and unincorporated wild township,
near the centre of which, and some three or four
miles to the eastward of where he now lay, dwelt a
solitary individual by the name of Johnson, a singular
being, who, from some unknown cause, had forsaken
social life, and had lived a hermit in that secluded spot
for seven or eight years. He had a little opening in a
fine interval, on the banks of Wilson River, where
he raised his corn and potatoes, and had constructed
a rude hovel for a dwelling. Johnson had made his
appearance occasionally at the village, with a string
of fine trout, a bear-skin, or some other trophy of his
Nimrod propensities, which he would exchange at the
stores for “a little rum, and a little tobacco, and a
little tea, and a jack-knife, and a little more rum,”
when he would plunge into the forest again, return to
his hermitage, and be seen no more for months.

After casting his thoughts about in vain for any
other refuge, Kingston resolved to throw himself upon
the protection of Johnson. Accordingly, as soon as
he was a little rested, and his pursuers were well out
of hearing, he crept from his hiding-place, and taking
his direction by the moon, made the best of his way
eastward, through the rough and thick wood. It is
no easy matter to penetrate such a forest in the

-- 257 --

[figure description] Page 257.[end figure description]

daytime; and in the night, nothing but extreme desperation
could drive a man through it. Here pressing his
way through dark and thick underbrush, that constantly
required both hands to guard his eyes; there
climbing over huge windfalls, wading a bog, or leaping
a brook; and anon working his way, for a quarter
of a mile, through a dismal, tangled cedar-swamp,
where a thousand dry and pointed limbs, shooting out
on every side, clear to the very ground, tear his clothes
from his back, and wound him at every step. Under
these impediments, and in this condition, Kingston
spent the night in pressing on toward Johnson's camp;
and after a period of extreme toil and suffering, just
at daylight, he came out to the opening. But here
another barrier was before him. The Wilson River,
a wild and rapid stream, and now swollen by a recent
freshet, was between him and Johnson's dwelling, and
he had no means of crossing. But cross he must, and
he was reluctant to lose time in deliberation. He
selected the spot that looked most likely to admit of
fording, and waded into the river. He staggered
along from rock to rock, and fought against the current,
until he reached nearly the middle of the stream,
when the water deepened and took him from his feet!
He was but an indifferent swimmer, and the force of

-- 258 --

[figure description] Page 258.[end figure description]

the current carried him rapidly down the stream. At
last, however, after severe struggles, and not without
imminent peril of his life, he made out to reach the
bank, so much exhausted, that it was with difficulty
he could walk to Johnson's camp. When he reached
it, he found its lonely inmate yet asleep. He roused
him, made his case known to him, and begged his
protection.

Johnson was naturally benevolent, and the forlorn,
exhausted, ragged, and altogether wretched appearance
of the fugitive, at once touched his heart. There
was now.—


No speculation in those eyes
Which he did glare withal,”
but fear and trembling blanched his countenance, and
palsied his limbs. Possibly the hermit's benevolence
might have been quickened by a portion of the contents
of the colonel's purse; but be that as it may, he
was soon administering to the comfort of his guest.
In a few minutes he had a good fire, and the exhausted
wanderer took off his clothes and dried them, and tried
to fasten some of the flying pieces that had been torn
loose by the hatchel-teeth limbs in the cedar-swamps.
In the meantime Johnson had provided some roasted
potatoes, and a bit of fried bear-meat, which he

-- 259 --

[figure description] Page 259.[end figure description]

served up, with a tin dipper of strong tea, and Kingston
ate and drank, and was greatly refreshed.

They now set themselves earnestly to work to devise
means of retreat and security against the pursuit of
the enraged Monsonites, “who,” Kingston said, “he
was sure would visit the camp before noon.” Under a
part of the floor, was a small excavation in the earth,
which his host called his potato-hole, since, being near
the fire, it served in winter to keep his potatoes from
freezing. This portion of the floor was now entirely
covered over with two or three barrels, a water-pail, a
bench, and sundry articles of iron and tin-ware. It
was Johnson's advice, that the colonel should be
secreted in this potato-hole. He was afraid, however,
that they would search so close as to discover his retreat.
Yet the only alternative seemed between the
plan proposed and betaking himself again to the woods,
exposed to toil and starvation, and the chance of arrest
by some of the hundreds who would be scouring the
woods that day, eager as bloodhounds for their prey.
Something must be done immediately, for he was
expecting every hour to hear the cry of his pursuers;
and relying on Johnson's ingenuity and skill to send
them off on another scent should they come to his
camp, he concluded to retreat to the potato-hole.

-- 260 --

[figure description] Page 260.[end figure description]

Accordingly, the superincumbent articles were hastily
removed, a board was taken up from the floor,
and the gallant colonel descended to his new quarters.
They were small to be sure, but under the circumstances
very acceptable. The cell was barely deep enough
to receive him in a sitting posture, with his neck a
little bent, while under him was a little straw, upon
which he could stretch his limbs to rest. Johnson
replaced all the articles with such care that no one
would have supposed they had been removed for
months.

This labor had just been completed, when he heard
shouts at a distance, and beheld ten or a dozen people
rushing out of the woods, and making toward his
camp. He was prepared for them; and when they
came in, they found him seated quietly on his bench,
mending his clothes.

“Have you seen anything of Colonel Kingston?”
inquired the foremost of the company with panting
eagerness.

“Colonel Kingston?” asked Johnson, looking up
with a sort of vacant, honest stare.

“Yes—he's run for't,” replied the other, “and we
are after him. The Grand Jury has indicted him,
and the Sheriff's got a warrant, and all Monson, and

-- 261 --

[figure description] Page 261.[end figure description]

one half of Guilford, is out a hunting for him. Last
night, just as they were going to take him, he run
into the woods this way. Ha'n't you seen nothin' of
him?”

Johnson sat with his mouth wide open, and listened
with such an inquiring look that any one would have
sworn it was all news to him. At last he exclaimed
with the earnestness inspired by a new thought,
“Well, there! I'll bet that was what my dog was
barking at, an hour or so ago! I heard him barking
as fierce as a tiger, about half a mile down the river.
I was busy mending my trowsers, or I should have
gone down to see what he'd got track of.”

The company unanimously agreed that it must
have been Kingston the dog was after; and in the
hope of getting upon his track, they hurried off in
the direction indicated, leaving Johnson as busily
engaged as if, like

“Brian O'Linn, he'd no breeches to wear,”

until he had finished repairing his tattered inexpressibles.

The fugitive now breathed freely again; but while
his pursuers were talking with his host, his respiration
had hardly been sufficient to sustain life, and

-- 262 --

[figure description] Page 262.[end figure description]

“cold drops of sweat stood on his trembling flesh.”
He did not venture to leave his retreat for two days;
for during that day and most of the next, the woods
were scoured from one end of the township to the
other, and several parties successively visited the
camp, who were all again successively despatched to
the woods by the adroitness of its occupant.

After two days the pursuers principally left the
woods and contented themselves with posting sentinels
at short intervals on the roads that surrounded
the forest, and in the neighboring towns, hoping to
arrest their victim, when hunger should drive him
forth to some of the settlements. Kingston felt that
it was unsafe for him to remain any longer under the
protection of Johnson, and he knew it would be
exceedingly difficult to make his escape through any
of the settlements of Maine. Upon due reflection he
concluded that the only chance left for him was to
endeavor to make his way to Canada.

He was now a dozen or fifteen miles from the foot
of Moosehead lake. There was a foot-path to Elliottville,
where there were a few inhabitants. Through
this settlement he thought he might venture to pass
in the night; and he could then go a few miles to the
westward, and meet the road leading from Monson to

-- 263 --

[figure description] Page 263.[end figure description]

the lake. Once across or around the foot of the lake,
he believed he could make his way into the Canada
road, and escape with safety. Having matured his
plan he communicated it to Johnson, who aided it in
the best manner he could by providing him with a
pack of potatoes and fried bear-meat, accompanied
with an extra Indian “johnny-cake,” a jack-knife, and
a flint and tinder for striking fire.

It was late in the night, when all things were prepared
for the journey, and Kingston bade an affectionate
adieu to his host, declaring that he should
never forget him, and adding, with much originality
of thought and expression, that “a friend in need
was a friend indeed.” He had nearly a mile to go
through the woods, before reaching the path that led
through the township of Elliotville; and when he
passed the Elliottville settlement the day began to
dawn. A stirring young man, who was out at that
early hour, saw him cross the road at a distance and
strike into the woods. Satisfied at once who he was,
and suspecting his object, he hastened to rouse his
two or three neighbors, and then started toward Monson
village with all the speed his legs could give him.
Kingston, observing this movement from a hill-top
in the woods, was convinced that he should be

-- 264 --

[figure description] Page 264.[end figure description]

pursued, and redoubled his exertions to reach the
lake.

When the messenger reached Monson and communicated
his intelligence, the whole village was roused
like an encamped army at the battle-call; and in
twenty minutes every horse in the village was mounted
and the riders were spurring with all speed toward the
lake, and Deacon Stone among the foremost. As
they came in sight of the Moosehead, the sun, which
was about an hour high, was pouring a flood of warm
rays across the calm, still waters, and some half a mile
from land, they beheld a tall, slim man, alone in a
canoe, paddling toward the opposite shore.

For a moment the party stood speechless, and then
vent was given to such oaths and execrations as habit
had made familiar. Something was even swelling in
Deacon Stone's throat, well-nigh as sinful as he had
uttered on a former occasion, but he coughed, and
checked it before it found utterance. They looked
around, and ran on every side, to see if another boat,
or any other means of crossing the lake could be
found; but all in vain. The only skiff on that arm
of the lake had been seized by the colonel in his
flight. His pursuers were completely baffled. Some
were for crossing the woods, and going round the

-- 265 --

[figure description] Page 265.[end figure description]

southwest bay of the lake over the head waters of
the Kennebec River, and so into the great wilderness
on the western side of the lake. But others said,
“No; it's no use; if he once gets over among them
swamps and mountains, you might as well look for a
needle in a hay-mow!”

This sentiment accorded with the better judgment
of the party, and they turned about and rode quietly
back to Monson—Deacon Stone consoling himself on
the way by occasionally remarking: “Well, if the
heathen is driven out of the land, thanks to a kind
Providence, he has n't carried the land with him!”

-- 266 --

p689-283 CHAPTER XI. A DUTCH WEDDING.

[figure description] Page 266.[end figure description]

You can often get over the difficulty, when you
can't get over the river,” said my friend John Van
Ben Schoten.

“Why don't you begin your name with a Sam?”
said I; “it would give it more fulness and roundness;
a more musical sound. I do like a full, harmonious
name, I don't care what nation it belongs to. Only
see how much better it would sound—Sam John Van
Ben Schoten—I would make that little addition, if I
was you.”

“Why that is my boy's name,” said my friend
John Van Ben Schoten. “You Yankees are always
one generation ahead of us Hollanders. Wait till
my boy grows up, and he'll be just what you want.
“But don't let us be disputing about names”—

Our disputes were always of the good-natured
sort, and generally confined to the relative advantages
of Yankee enterprise and Dutch perseverance.

-- 267 --

[figure description] Page 267.[end figure description]

“Don't let us be disputing about names,” said he,
“when you ought to be planning how to pay that
note to-morrow. You say your draft has come back
protested, and you have no other means of raising
the money.”

This was too true; I had been in a perfect fever all
the morning; the return of the draft was most unexpected;
those, of whom I had been accustomed to
receive accomodations, were out of town, and the
note in question would do me much injury by lying
over. As a last resort I had applied to my friend
John Van Ben Schoten for advice in the matter.

“I tell you,” said John Van Ben Schoten, “you
can often get over the difficulty, when you can't get
over the river.”

“Yes,” said I, “but how? You can do most any
thing if you only know how.”

“Well,” said he, “go into my counting-room and
sit down a minute, and I'll tell you how.”

We went in, and took a seat in the shadiest corner,
near the window. John, before sitting down, reached
up over his desk and took down his long pipe. He
then opened a little drawer and filled his pipe with
fine dry tobacco, and pulling a lens out of his pocket
he stepped into the sunshine to light it.

-- 268 --

[figure description] Page 268.[end figure description]

“You don't need that glass,” said I, “you just hold
your pipe in the sun, and if it don't light in half a
minute without the glass, I'll engage to eat it.”

“There 'tis again,” said John Van Ben Schoten,
“you are always showing the Yankee. Our fathers
always lit their pipes with sun glasses, and now you
want to contrive some other way to do it. If I knew
I could light it in half the time without the glass, still
I would use the glass out of respect to my ancestors.”

“Well, come,” said I, “this is n't telling me how to
get over the difficulty.”

“Wait till I get my little steam-engine a-going,”
said John, still holding the glass in the sun.

“But have n't you any loco foco matches?” said I,
growing somewhat impatient.

“No,” said John, “I never allow those new-fangled
dangerous things to come into my counting room.”

“But how do you get a fire when the sun don't
shine?” said I.

“I use a flint and steel,” said he, “the safest and
surest way in the world.”

At last, his pipe began to burn, and John with the
utmost complacency sat down in his large arm-chair
and began to smoke.

-- 269 --

[figure description] Page 269.[end figure description]

“Well, now,” said I, “I suppose you are ready to
open your mind upon this matter, and tell me if you
can contrive any plan to help me over this difficulty.”

“Why, yes,” said John, “you can oftentimes get
over the difficulty, when you can't get over the river.
Did you ever know how Peter Van Horn got married?”

“No,” said I.

“Well, I'll tell you,” said John, taking the pipe
from his mouth and puffing out a cloud of smoke that
almost concealed his head from my view.

“Oh, now, don't stop for any of your long yarns,”
said I; “it is getting toward the close of business
hours, and it's very important that this business of
mine should be attended to.”

“You Yankees are always too impatient,” said
John; “there's never anything lost by taking time to
consider a matter. It is driving the steamboat too
fast, and trying to go ahead of somebody else, that
makes her burst her boiler.”

At that he put his pipe in his mouth and went to
smoking again.

“Well, come,” said I, “the sooner you begin to
tell how Peter Van Horn got married, the sooner
you'll get through with it.”

-- 270 --

[figure description] Page 270.[end figure description]

“I know it,” said he, “and if you won't interrupt
me, I'll go on.”

“Yes,” says I, “a Dutchman must always have
his own way; go ahead.”

“Well, then,” said John Van Ben Schoten, throwing
himself back into the chair, and leisurely blowing
the smoke in a long, steady, quiet roll from his mouth;
“about a hundred years ago, Peter Van Horn lived
at Schenectady, or near where Schenectady now is,
for it was a kind of wilderness place then. You've
been at Schenectady, have n't you?”

“No” said I, “I never have.”

“Well, it is about fifteen or twenty miles from
Albany; you've been at Albany, of course.”

“No, I have n't,” said I.

“Not been at Albany?” said John, staring at me
with rather an incredulous look; “then you have n't
seen much of the world yet.”

“Why, no,” said I, “perhaps not a great deal on
this side of it; though I have seen something of the
other side of it, and a little of both eends.”

John laughed, and went on with his story.

“Peter Van Horn lived near Schenectady, on one
of the little streams that empty into the Mohawk.
His father was one of the first settlers in that region;

-- 271 --

[figure description] Page 271.[end figure description]

and the old gentleman brought up a nice family, a
fine set of hardy, industrious fellows; every one of
them as steady as a mill horse: no wild oats—they
were men before they were boys. The consequence
was, they picked up the money and always had a
comfortable share of this world's goods.

“Well, Peter, he grew up to be a smart young
man, and at last he got it into his head, that he
wanted to be married. You know how 'tis; young
men now-a-days are apt to get such notions into their
heads, and it was just so in old times. I don't know
as Peter was to blame for that; for there was living
a little ways up the hill, above his father's, Betsey Van
Heyden, a round, rosy-cheeked, blue eyed girl, as neat
as a new pin, and as smart as a steel-trap. Every
time Peter saw her, his feelings became more interested
in her. Somehow, he could not seem to keep
his mind off of her. Sometimes, when he was hoeing
corn in the field, the first thing he would know, his
father would call out to him, `Peter, what do you
stand there leaning over your hoe-handle for?' And
then he would start, and color up to the eyes, and go
to work. He knew he had been thinking of Betsey
Van Heyden, but how long he had been standing still
he could n't tell.

-- 272 --

[figure description] Page 272.[end figure description]

“At last things grew worse and worse, and he
found he could n't live without Betsey Van Heyden
no how; so he went and popped the question to her;
and Betsy said she was willing if mother was—gals
in them days were remarkably well brought up, in
comparison of what they are now-a-days—so after a
while Peter mustered up courage enough to go and
ask the old folks, and the old folks, after taking two
days to consider of it, said yes; for, why should n't
they? Peter was one of the most industrious young
men in the whole valley of the Mohawk.

“And now that the road was all open and plain
before him, Peter was for hurrying ahead; he did n't
see any use at all in waiting.

“Betsey was for putting it off two months, till she
could get another web out of the loom; but Peter
said no, he did n't care a snap about another web;
they'd be married first and make the cloth afterward.
Betsey at last yielded the point; she said she did want
to make up a few articles before they were married,
but she supposed they might get along without them.
So they finally fixed on Thursday of the following
week for the wedding. The work of preparation was
soon commenced, and carried out in a liberal style.
Everything requisite for a grand feast was collected,

-- 273 --

[figure description] Page 273.[end figure description]

cooked, and arranged in apple-pie order. The guests
were all invited, and Parson Van Brunt was engaged
to be there precisely at three o'clock, in order that
they might get through the business, and have supper
out of the way in season for all to get home before
dark.

“Thus far, up to the evening before the wedding day,
everything looked fair and promising. Peter retired
to bed early, in the hope of getting a good night's
rest; but somehow or other he never was so restless
in his life. He shut his eyes with all his might, and
tried to think of sheep jumping over a wall; but do
all he could, sleep would n't come. Before midnight
the doors and windows began to rattle with a heavy
wind. Peter got up and looked out; it was dark and
cloudy. Presently flashes of lightning were seen,
and heavy thunder came rolling from the clouds and
echoing among the hills. In half an hour more a
heavy torrent of rain was beating upon the house.
`It will be soon over,' thought Peter, `and the air
will be beautiful to-morrow, as sweet as a rose; what
a fine day we shall have.'

“Hour after hour passed away, and the rain still
came down in a flood. Peter could not sleep a wink
all night. He got up and walked the floor till

-- 274 --

[figure description] Page 274.[end figure description]

day-light, and when he looked out upon the roads and
the fields the water was standing in every hollow and
running down the hillsides in rivulets. Nine, ten,
and eleven o'clock passed, and still it rained. Peter
had been up to Mr. Van Heyden's twice through
the rain to see how affairs went on there; the family
looked rather sad, but Betsey said she had faith to
believe that it would hold up before three o'clock;
and sure enough about twelve o'clock, while the
families were at dinner, it did hold up, and the clouds
began to clear away.

“About two o'clock the wedding guests began to
assemble at Mr. Van Heyden's, and the faces of all
began to grow shorter and brighter. All this time it
had not entered Peter's head, or the heads of any of
the rest of the company, that there might be any
difficulty in the way of Parson Van Brunt's coming
to their aid in completing the marriage ceremony.
They had all this time forgotten that they were on
one side of the Tomhenick stream and Parson Van
Brunt on the other; that there was no bridge over
the stream, and that it was now so swollen by the
flood, and the current was so rapid, that it was almost
as much as a man's life was worth to attempt to cross
it at the usual fording-place, or swim it on horseback.

-- 275 --

[figure description] Page 275.[end figure description]

“At last, about half-past two o'clock, Parson Van
Brunt, true to his promise, was seen riding down the
hill on the opposite side of the river and approaching
the ford.

“There he is,” said old Mrs. Van Heyden, who
had been upon the lookout for the last half hour,
“there's the dear good man; now let us all take our
seats and be quiet before he comes in.”

“While they were still lingering at the doors and
windows, and watching the parson as he came slowly
down the hill, he reached the bank of the river and
stopped. He sat upon his horse some minutes, looking
first up the stream and then down the stream, and
then he rode his horse a few rods up and down the
bank, and returned again to the ford.

“`What can he be waiting there for?' said Peter;
`sure he has seen the river often enough before, that
he need n't stand there so long to look at it.'

“`I can tell you what the difficulty is,' said old Mr.
Van Heyden, `the river is so high he can't get across.'

“The truth now fell like a flash upon the minds of
the whole company.

“`Do you think so?' said Mr. Van Horn.

“`I know so,' said Mr. Van Heyden; `you can
see from here the water is up the bank two rods

-- 276 --

[figure description] Page 276.[end figure description]

farther than it commonly is, and must be as much as
ten feet deep over the ford just now.'

“`What shall we do?' said old Mrs. Van Heyden;
`the things will all be spoilt if we don't have the
wedding to-day.'

“Betsey began to turn a little pale. Peter took his
hat and started off upon a quick walk toward the
river; and presently all the men folks followed him.
The women folks waited a little while, and seeing
Parson Van Brunt still sitting on his horse upon the
other side of the river without any attempt to cross,
they all put on their bonnets and followed the men.
When they got to the bank, the reason of the parson's
delay was as clear as preaching. The little river was
swollen to a mighty torrent, and was rushing along
its banks with the force and rapidity of a cataract.
The water had never been so high before since the
neighborhood had been settled, and it was still rising.
To ford the river was impossible, and to attempt to
swim it on horseback was highly dangerous.

“`What shall we do?' said Peter, calling to the
parson across the river.

“`Well, I think you will have to put it off two or
three days, till the river goes down,' said Parson
Van Brunt.

-- 277 --

[figure description] Page 277.[end figure description]

“`Tell him we can't put it off,' said old Mrs. Van
Heyden, touching Peter by the elbow: `for the pies
and cakes and things will all be spoilt.'

“`Ask him if he don't think his horse can swim
over,' said Betsey in a half whisper, standing the other
side of Peter.

“Peter again called to the parson; told him what
a disappointment it would be if he did n't get over,
and that it was the general opinion his horse could
swim over with him if he would only try. Parson Van
Brunt was devoted to the duties of his profession, and
ready to do anything, even at the risk of his life, for
the good of his flock. So he reined up his horse
tightly, gave him the whip, and plunged into the
stream. The current was too rapid and powerful for
the animal; the horse and rider were carried down
stream with fearful speed for a about a dozen rods,
when they made out to land again on the same side
from which they started. All were now satisfied
that the parson could not get over the river. The
experiment already made was attended with such
fearful hazard as to preclude all thought of its repetition.

“`Oh dear, what shall we do?' said Mrs. Van Heyden;
`was there ever anything so unlucky?

-- 278 --

[figure description] Page 278.[end figure description]

“Betsey sighed, and Peter bit his lips with vexation.
Peter's mother all this while had not uttered a syllable.
She was a woman that never talked, but she did
up a great deal of deep thinking. At last, very much
to the surprise of the whole company, she spoke out
loud, and said:

“`It seems to me, if Parson Van Brunt can't get
over the river, he might get over the difficulty somehow
or other.'

“`Well, how in the world can he do it?' said Peter.

“`Why, you jest take hold of Betsey's hand,' said
his mother, `and stand up here, and let the parson
marry you across the river.'

“This idea struck them all very favorably; they
did n't see why it could n't be done. Peter again
called to Parson Van Brunt, and stated to him the
proposition, and asked him if he thought there was
anything in the law or in the Bible that could go
against the match if it was done in that way. Parson
Van Brunt sat in a deep study about five minutes,
and then said he could n't see anything in the way,
and told them they might stand up and take hold of
hands. When they had taken their proper positions,
and old Mrs. Van Heyden had put her handkerchief to
her face to hide the tears that began to start from her

-- 279 --

[figure description] Page 279.[end figure description]

eyes, the parson read over, in a loud and solemn tone,
the marriage ceremony, and pronounced them man
and wife.

“Peter then threw a couple of silver dollars across
the river, which Parson Van Brunt gathered up and
put in his pocket, and then mounted his horse and
started for home, while the company upon the other
side of the river returned to the house of Mr. Van
Heyden to enjoy the wedding feast.”

By this time John Van Ben Schoten's pipe had
gone out, and he started to the window again with
his lens to re-light it.

“Well,” said I, “I understand, now, how Peter
Van Horn got over his difficulty, but I'll be hanged
if I can see any clearer how I am to get over mine.”

“None so blind as them that won't see,” said John,
turning to his desk and pulling out his old rusty yellow
pocket book. He opened it, and counted out the
sum of money which I lacked.

“There,” said he, “go and pay your note, and
remember you can sometimes get over the difficulty,
when you can't get over the river.”

-- 280 --

p689-297 CHAPTER XII. BILLY SNUB.

[figure description] Page 280.[end figure description]

When the biographer has a subject of unusual
magnitude and importance to deal with, it becomes
him to lay out his work with circumspection, and
preserve a careful method in the arrangement. He
must dig deep, and lay his foundation firmly, before
he attempts to rear his edifice. He must not thrust
his hero at once and unceremoniously in the face of
his reader, standing alone and erect, like a liberty-pole
on the naked common of a country meeting-house.
He must keep him for a while in the background,
and with a careful and skilful progression drag him
slowly up from the dark and misty slough of antiquity,
to the full light of day. It is not sufficient to commence
with the father, nor even with the grandfather;
propriety requires that the ancestral chain should be
examined to the very topmost link.

Unfortunately for the cause of letters, the origin
and early history of the Snubs are veiled in the

-- 281 --

[figure description] Page 281.[end figure description]

deepest obscurity. The most indefatigable researches
have been sufficient to trace them back but a few
generations. Their family name is not found in the
list of the hardy adventurers who came over in the
Mayflower, nor yet among the early colony planted
by Captain John Smith. But though history retains
no record of the precise point of time when they
migrated to the Western continent, it is certain they
were among the early settlers of the New World,
and many respectable traditions are extant of their
ancient standing and influence in some of the older
towns in New England. There is some doubt as to
what nation may rightfully claim the honor of supplying
the blood that flows in their veins, and it is
probable the question at this late day can never be
settled with entire satisfaction. Though the claims
of England, France, and Germany, might each and
all be urged with so much force as to incline the historian
to believe that their blood is of mixed origin,
yet the prevailing testimony ought to be considered
sufficient to establish the point that John Bull is the
father of the Snub family; a conclusion which
derives no small support from the general pugnacity
of their character. It is much to be lamented that
the ancient history of this ancient family is lost

-- 282 --

[figure description] Page 282.[end figure description]

to the world; but, alas! they had no poet, no historian.

The ancestors of Billy Snub can be traced in a
direct line only to the fourth generation. The great-grandfather
was a lawyer of thrift and respectability;
a man of talents and influence; and tradition says, if
he was not a younger son, he was the nephew of a
younger son of an English earl. It cannot, therefore,
with any propriety, be thrown in the face of the
Snubs, that


“Their ancient but ignoble blood
Has crept through scoundrels ever since the flood.”
But this Lawyer Snub, whose first name was William,
had not the faculty or the talents to bring up his
children to maintain the standing and dignity of their
father. His son William was nothing more than a
plain, respectable country farmer, who planted his
potatoes, and hoed his corn, and mowed his hay, and
milked his cows very much as other farmers do, without
ever doing anything to become distinguished in
the history of his times. He also was destined to see
his posterity still in the descendant, for his son William
was a village shoemaker, who sat on his bench,
and drew his thread, and hammered his lapstone

-- 283 --

[figure description] Page 283.[end figure description]

from morning till night, the year in and year out,
with the occasional variation of whistling while
paring off a shoe, and singing a song of an evening
to the loungers in his shop. The tendency in the
Snub family, however, was still downwards; even
the shoemaker was not at the bottom of the hill, for
his son was Billy Snub the newsboy. The direct
family line, as far back as authentic history goes,
running thus:

First generation, William Snub, Esquire.

Second generation, Mr. William Snub, the farmer.

Third generation, Bill Snub, the shoemaker.

Fourth generation, Billy Snub, the newsboy.

There is a tide in families, as well as “in the affairs
of men.” They rise and fall, though not as regularly,
yet as surely as the spring and neap tides of the
ocean. And Billy Snub, after kicking and floundering
about upon the flats at low water, has at last
caught the flood, and there is no knowing to what
height of fortune he may yet be carried. His posterity
will undoubtedly be in the ascendant, and it
may not be too much to expect that in a few generations
ahead, we shall have his Excellency, William
Snub, Governor, &c., and perhaps William Snub, the
eighteenth President of the United States. But the

-- 284 --

[figure description] Page 284.[end figure description]

regular chain of history must not be anticipated; and
in order to bring Billy fairly and with sufficient clearness
before the public, it is necessary to dwell for a
few moments upon the history of Bill Snub, the shoemaker,
and Sally Snub, his wife.

For a few years Bill Snub was the leading shoemaker
in a quiet New England village. Indeed, he
took the lead from necessity, for he had no competitor;
the field was all his own, and being allowed to have
his own way, and fix his own prices, he managed to
get a comfortable living. Being well to do in the
world, and much given to whistling and singing, his
shop gradually became the favorite resort of all the
idlers in the village. Bill's importance was magnified
in his own eyes by this gathering around him almost
every evening, to say nothing of the rainy afternoons.
Unconsciously to himself he encouraged this lounging
habit of his neighbors by administering to their little
idle comforts. In one corner of his shop was a broken
chair for an extra seat, in another a square block of
timber left from the frame of the new school-house,
and in still another corner was a stout side of sole
leather, rolled up and snugly tied, which answered
very well for a seat for three. A half-peck of apples,
and a mug or two of cider, always at Bill's expense,

-- 285 --

[figure description] Page 285.[end figure description]

frequently added to the allurements of the place, and
Bill's songs, and Bill's jokes, no matter how little
music or wit they contained, were always applauded.

This state of things silently, but gradually, made sad
encroachments upon Bill's habits of industry. His
customers were put off from day to day, and when
Saturday night came, a bushel basket full of boots
and shoes remained in his shop waiting repairs, to say
nothing of Sunday new ones that had been promised,
but not touched. Many of his customers had to stay
at home on the Sabbath, or go to meeting barefoot.
The result of all this was, that an interloper soon
came into the place, and opened a shop directly
opposite to that of Bill. The way was already open
for him for a good run of business. Bill's customers,
exasperated at their numerous disappointments, discarded
him at once, and flocked to the new comer.
In a week's time, Bill had nothing to do. He might
be seen standing in his shop door, or with his head
out of the window, hour after hour, watching his old
customers as they entered the shop of his rival. He
would go home to his meals in ill-humor, and scold
his wife for his bad luck. And if little Billy, then
six years old, came round him with his accustomed
prattle and play, he was pretty sure to be silenced

-- 286 --

[figure description] Page 286.[end figure description]

with a smart box on the ear. Things grew worse and
worse with him, and in a few months want was not
only staring him in the face, but had actually seized
him with such a firm gripe as to bring him to a full
stand. Something must be done; Bill was uncomfortable.
Whistling or singing to the bare walls of
his shop, produced an echo that chilled and annoyed
him exceedingly. Food and clothing began to be
among the missing, and he soon discovered that walking
the streets did but little towards replenishing his
wardrobe; nor would scolding or even beating his
wife supply his table.

At last, throwing the whole blame upon the place
and its people where he lived, he resolved at once to
pull up stakes and be off.

“And where are you going, Bill?” said his wife,
wiping the tears from her eyes, as she saw her husband
commence the work of packing up.

“It's none of your business, Sall,” said the husband
gruffly. “But I'm going where there's work enough
for all creation; where there's more folks to mend
shoes for than you can shake a stick at.”

“Well, where is it Bill? do tell us;” said Sally in
an anxious tone. “If it is only where we can get victuals
to eat, and clothes to wear, I shall be thankful.”

-- 287 --

[figure description] Page 287.[end figure description]

“Well, then,” said Bill, “I'm going to the biggest
city in the United States, where there's work enough
all weathers.”

“Well, that's Boston,” said Sally.

“No, 'taint Boston,” said Bill; “it's a place as big
as four Bostons. It's New York; I'm going right
into the middle of New York; so pack up your duds
about the quickest; for I ain't going to stop for
nobody.”

And sure enough, a few mornings after this, among
the deck passengers of one of the steamers that arrived
at New York, was no less a personage than Bill Snub,
the shoemaker, with his wife Sally and his son Billy.
The group landed, and stared at every object they
met, with a wild and wondering expression, that
seemed to indicate pretty clearly that they were not
accustomed to sights and scenes like those around
them. Indeed, they had never before been in a large
town, and hardly out of their quiet country village.
Each bore a bundle, containing the whole amount of
their goods and chattels, which had been reduced to
a few articles of wearing apparel, a box or two of
eatables, which they had taken for their journey, and
a few tools of his trade, which Bill had had the foresight
to preserve in order to begin the world anew.

-- 288 --

[figure description] Page 288.[end figure description]

Bewildered by the noise and bustle, and crowds of
people on every side, they knew not which way to
turn or what to do. They knew not a person nor a
street in the city, and had no very definite object in
view. Instinctively following the principal current
of passengers that landed from the boat, they soon
found themselves in Broadway. Here, as a small stream
blends with a large one into which it flows, their company
was presently merged and lost in the general
throng of that great thoroughfare. They gradually
lost sight of the familiar faces they had seen on board
the boat, and when the last one disappeared, and
they could no longer discern in the vast multitude hurrying
to and fro, and down the street, a single individual
they had ever seen before, a sense of solitude
and home-sickness came over them, that was most
overpowering. They stopped short on the sidewalk,
and Bill looked in his wife's face, and his wife looked
in his, and little Billy stood between them, and looked
up in the faces of both.

“What are you going to do?” said Sally.

“Going to do?” said Bill; “I'm going to hire out;
or else hire a shop and work on my own hook.”

Just at that moment a gentleman brushed past his
elbow, and Bill hailed him.

-- 289 --

[figure description] Page 289.[end figure description]

“I say, mister, you don't know of nobody that
wants to hire a shoemaker, do ye?”

The gentleman turned and glanced at him a
moment, and then hurried on without saying a word.

“I should think he might have manners enough to
answer a civil question,” muttered Bill to himself, as
he shouldered his bag and moved on up the street.
Presently they passed a large shoe store.

“Ah, here's the place!” said Bill; “we've found
it at last. O, Sall, did you ever see such an allfired
sight of shoes? Lay down your bundle, and stop
here to the door, while I go in and make a bargain
for work. So in Bill went, and addressed himself to
one of the clerks.

“I say, mister, you've got sich an everlastin' lot of
shoes here, I guess may be you'd like to hire a good
shoemaker; and if you do, I'm the boy for you.”

The clerk laughed, and told him he must ask the
boss about that.

“Ask the what?” said Bill.

“Ask the boss,” said the clerk, who began to relish
the conversation.

“I shan't do no sich thing,” said Bill; “I did n't
come to New York to talk with bossy-calves nor pigs;
and if you are a calf I don't want any more to say to

-- 290 --

[figure description] Page 290.[end figure description]

you; but if you want to hire a good shoemaker, I tell
you I'm the chap for you.” Here the proprietor of
the store, seeing the clerks gathering round Bill, to
the neglect of their customers, came forward and told
him he did not wish to hire any workmen, and he
had better go along.

“But I'll work cheap,” said Bill, “and I'm a first-rate
workman. Here's a pair of shoes on my feet
I've wore for four months, and they han't ripped a
stitch yet.”

“But I don't want to hire,” said the man of the
store, with some impatience; “so you had better go
along.”

“But maybe we can make a bargain,” said Bill;
“I tell ye, I'll work cheap.”

“I tell you, I don't want to hire,” said the man;
“so go out of the store.”

“You need n't be so touchy,” said Bill; “I guess
I've seen as good folks as you are, before to-day.
Come now, what'll you give me a month?”

“I'll give you what you won't want,” said the man,
“if you are not out of this store in one minute.” As
he said this, he approached Bill with such a menacing
appearance, that the shoemaker thought it time to
retreat, and hastened out of the door. As he reached

-- 291 --

[figure description] Page 291.[end figure description]

the sidewalk, he turned round and hailed the man of
the store again.

“I say, mister, hav n't you got a shoemaker's shop
you'll let to me?”

The man said he had a good room for that purpose.

“Well, what do you ask a year for it?” said Bill.

“Three hundred dollars, with good security,” replied
the shopman.

“Three hundred dollars! My gracious! Come
now, none of your jokes. Tell us how much you ask
for it, 'cause I want to hire.”

“I tell you I ask three hundred dollars,” said the
man; “but it's of no use for you to talk about it;
you can't give the security.”

“Oh, you go to grass,” said Bill; “I don't want
none of your jokes. I've hired as good a shop as
ever a man waxed a thread in, for fifteen dollars a
year; and if you are a mind to let me have yourn for
the same, I'll go and look at it.”

The man laughed in his face, and turned away to
wait upon his customers; and a little waggish boy,
who had been standing by and listening to the conversation,
placed his finger against his nose, and looking
up askance at Bill, exclaimed, “Ain't ye green?”

Poor Bill began to think he had got among a

-- 292 --

[figure description] Page 292.[end figure description]

strange set of people, and, shouldering his bag, he
marched up Broadway with his wife and Billy at his
heels, till he came to the Astor House. Here he
made a halt, for it looked to him like a sort of place
for head-quarters. The building was so imposing in
its appearance, and so many people were going in
and coming out, and everything around was so brisk
and busy, he thought surely it must be just the place
to look for business. So laying down their baggage,
he and Sally and Billy quietly took a seat on the
broad granite steps. He soon began to ply his
inquiries to all sorts of people, asking if they could
tell him of anybody that wanted to hire a shoemaker,
or that had a shoemaker's shop to let. Most of them
would hurry by him without any further notice than
a hasty glance; others would laugh, and some would
stop, and ask a few questions, or crack a few heartless
jokes, and then turn away. After a while a throng
of boys had gathered around him, and by various
annoyances rendered his position so uncomfortable,
that he was glad to escape, and shouldering his baggage,
he and his group wandered on with heavy
hearts up the street.

Most of the day passed in this way without any
profitable result, and as night approached they grew

-- 293 --

[figure description] Page 293.[end figure description]

weary and desponding. They had no money left to
provide themselves with a home for the night, though
they had provision enough for a meal or two remaining
in their wallets. Bill had found it utterly impossible
to make any impression upon any one he had
met in the city, except so far as to be laughed at.
He could get no one's ear to listen to his story, and
he could see no prospect of employment. Sally had
several times suggested that this great road which
they had been up and down so much—for they had
been almost the whole length of Broadway two or
three times—was not exactly the best road for them
to go in, and she did n't think but what they might be
likely to do better to go into one of the smaller roads,
where the folks didn't look so grand. And, though
Bill had been of different opinion through the day,
he now began to think that Sally might be right.
Looking down one of the cross streets that seemed to
descend into a sort of valley, quite a different country
appeared to open to them. They could see old
decayed-looking houses, with broken windows and
dirty sidewalks; they could see half-naked children,
running about and playing in the street; they could
see bareheaded women and ragged men lounging
about the doors, and numerous swine rooting in the

-- 294 --

[figure description] Page 294.[end figure description]

gutters. The prospect was too inviting to be resisted.
They felt at once that there they could find sympathy,
and hastened down the street. Arriving in the midst
of this paradise, they deliberately laid down their
luggage on the sidewalk, and seating themselves on
the steps of an old wooden house, felt as if they had
at last found a place of rest. They opened their bundles
and began to partake of a little food. Heads
were out of a hundred windows in the neighborhood
gazing at them. Children stopped short in the midst
of their running, and stood around them; and leisurely,
one after another, a stout woman or a sturdy
loafer came nigh and entered into conversation. As
Bill related his simple story, a universal sympathy
was at once awakened in the hearts of all the hearers.
They all declared he should have a shop in the neighborhood
and they would give him their patronage.

Patrick O'Flannegan, who lived in the basement of
the old house on whose steps they were seated, at
once invited them to partake of the hospitalities of
his mansion, saying he had but nine in his family, and
his room was large, and they should be welcome to
occupy a corner of it till they could find a better home.
Of course the invitation was accepted, and the group
followed Patrick down the steep dirty steps that led

-- 295 --

[figure description] Page 295.[end figure description]

to his damp apartment. The tops of the low windows
were about upon a level with the sidewalk, bringing
almost the entire apartment below the surface of the
ground. The dim light that struggled down through
the little boxed-up dusty windows, showed a strawbed
in two several corners of the room, three or four
rickety chairs, a rough bench, small table, tea-kettle,
frying-pan, and several other articles of household
comforts.

“You can lay your things in that corner,” said
Patrick, pointing to a vacant corner of the room,
“and we'll soon get up some good straw for you to
sleep on.” In short, Bill and his family at once
became domesticated in this subterranean tenement,
which proved to be not merely a temporary residence,
but their home for years. The limits of this history
will not allow space to follow the fortunes of Bill
through three or four of the first years of his city life.
It must be sufficient to state generally, that though he
found kindness and sympathy in his new associates,
he found little else that was beneficial. The atmosphere
around him was not favorable to industry, and
his habits in that respect never improved, but rather
grew worse. His neighbors did not work, and why
should he? His neighbors were fond of listening to

-- 296 --

[figure description] Page 296.[end figure description]

his songs, and why should he not sing to them? His
neighbors drank beer, and porter, and sling, and gin
toddy, and Bill needed but little coaxing to drink
with them. And he did drink with them, moderately
at first, but deeper and oftener from month to month,
and in three years' time he became a perfect sot.

The schooling that little Bill received during these
three years was eminently calculated to fit him for
his future profession. He had slept on the floor, lying
down late and rising up early, till his frame was as
hardy and elastic as that of a young panther. He
had been flogged so much by a drunken father, and
had his ears boxed so often by a fretted and desponding
mother, that he had lost all fear of their blows,
and even felt a sort of uneasiness, as though matters
were not all right, if by any chance the day passed
by without receiving them. He had lived on such
poor diet, and so little of it, that potato-skins had a
fine relish, and a crust of bread was a luxury. He
had battled with boys in the street till he had become
such an adept at fisticuffs, that boys of nearly twice
his size stood in fear of him. And he had so often
been harshly driven from the doors of the wealthy,
where he had been sent to beg cold victuals, that he
had come to regard mankind in general as a set of

-- 297 --

[figure description] Page 297.[end figure description]

ferocious animals, against whose fangs it was necessary
to be constantly on his guard. In short, Billy
had been beaten about from post to pillar, and pillar
to post so much, and had rubbed his head against so
many sorts of people, that it had become pretty well
filled with ideas of the hardest kind.

When Billy was about ten years old, he came running
in one day in great glee, with a sixpence in his
hand, which he had found in the street. As soon as
his father heard the announcement of it, he started
up, and took down a junk bottle from a little shelf
against the wall, and told Billy to take the sixpence,
and go to the grocer's on the corner, and get the
worth of it in rum. Sally begged that he would not
send for rum, but let little Billy go to the baker's and
get a loaf of bread, for she had not had a mouthful of
anything to eat for the day, and it was then noon.
But Bill insisted upon having the rum, and told Billy
to go along and get it, and be quick about it, or he
would give him such a licking as he had not had for
six months. Billy took the bottle, and started; but
as he left the door, his cheek reddened, and his lip
curled with an expression of determination which it
had not been accustomed to wear. He walked down
the street, thinking of the consequences that would

-- 298 --

[figure description] Page 298.[end figure description]

result from carrying home a bottle of rum. His
father would be drunk all the afternoon, and through
the night. His mother and himself would have to go
without food, probably be abused and beaten, and
when night came, would find no repose.

He arrived at the grocer's, but he could not go in.
He passed on a little farther, in anxious, deep thought.
At last he stopped suddenly, lifted the bottle above
his head, and then dashed it upon the pavement with
all his might, breaking it into a thousand pieces.

“There,” said Billy to himself, “I'll never carry
any more rum home as long as I live. But I s'pose
father 'll lick me half to death; but I don't care if
he does, I'll never carry any more rum home as long
as I live.”

He brushed a tear from his eye, and bit his lips, as
he stood looking at the fragments of the bottle a
moment, and then passed on farther down the street.
But now the question of what he should do, came
home to him with painful force. If he returned back
to the house, and encountered his enraged father, he
was sure to be half killed. He wandered on, unconcious
where he went, till he reached the Park. Here
he met a newsboy crying papers, with great earnestness
and tremendous force of lungs. Billy watched

-- 299 --

[figure description] Page 299.[end figure description]

him for the space of ten minutes, and saw him sell
half-a-dozen papers. They contained important news
by a foreign arrival, and people seemed eager to get
hold of them. A new idea flashed across Billy's
mind. Why could not he sell newspapers, and get
money, as well as that boy! His resolution was at
once formed, with almost the strength and firmness
of manhood. It required capital, to be sure, to start
with, but luckily he had the capital in his pocket.
The rum bottle had been broken, and he still retained
the sixpence. He hastened immediately to the
publishing office of the paper he had just seen sold.
When he arrived there, he found quite a crowd of
newsboys pressing up to the counter, and clamorous
for papers; for the publisher could not supply them
fast enough to meet the demand. Billy edged his
way in among them, and endeavored to approach the
counter. But he was suddenly pushed back by two
or three boys at once, who exclaimed, “What new-comer
is this? Here's boys enough here now, so you
better be off.”

Another sung out “Go home, you ragbag, your
mother don't know you're out!”

At this, one of the boys looked round that happened
to know Billy, and he cried out, “Ah, Billy Snub,

-- 300 --

[figure description] Page 300.[end figure description]

clear out of this; here's no place for you! No boys
comes to this office that don't wear no hats and shoes?”

Billy felt the force of this argument, for he was bareheaded
and barefooted, besides being sadly out at
knees and elbows; and looking around, he perceived
that all the boys in the room had something on their
heads, and something on their feet. He began to feel
as though he had perhaps got among the aristocracy
of the newsboys, and shrank back a little, and stood
in a corner of the room. The boys, however, were
not disposed to let him rest in peace there. Several
of them gathered around him, taunting him with
jokes and jeers, and began to crowd against him to
hustle him out of the room.

“Now take care,” said Billy, “for I won't stand
that from none of you.”

“You won't, will you?” said the boys, bursting out
into a roar of laughter; and one of them took Billy
by the nose, and attempted to pull him to the door.
Billy sprang like a young catamount; and although
he was considerably smaller and younger than his
assailant, he gave him such a well-directed blow upon
the chest that he laid him sprawling upon the floor.
Upon this, two or three more came at him with great
fury; but Billy's sleight of hand was exhibited with

-- 301 --

[figure description] Page 301.[end figure description]

so much force and skill, that he made his way through
them, and kept his coast clear; and when a stronger
reinforcement was about to attack him, the publisher
interfered, and ordered them to let that boy alone.
Still they were disposed to continue their persecutions,
till the publisher took up a long whip, and
cracked it over their heads, and told them he would
horsewhip the first one that dared to meddle with
him. And in order to make amends to Billy for the
ill-treatment he had received, he said he should now
be served with papers before any of the rest. He
accordingly took Billy's six cents, and handed him
three papers, and told him to sell them at three cents
apiece.

Billy eagerly grasped his papers, and ran into the
street. He had not been gone more than fifteen
minutes, before he returned with nine cents, which
he had received for the papers, and one more, which
he had found in the street. This enabled him to purchase
five papers; and he found the publisher ready
to wait upon him in preference to the other boys; so
he was soon dispatched on his second cruise. He
was not many minutes in turning his five papers into
fifteen cents cash. This operation was repeated some
half dozen times in the course of the afternoon, and

-- 302 --

[figure description] Page 302.[end figure description]

when night came, Billy found his stock of cash had
increased to about a dollar.

This was a great overturn in Billy's fortune, sufficient
to upset the heads of most boys of his age; but
though his head swam a little on first ascertaining the
great amount of money in his pocket, his strength
and firmness of character sustained him, so that he
was enabled to bear it with a good degree of composure.
As the shadows of night gathered around him,
Billy began to turn his thoughts homeward. But
what could he do? He knew his father too well to
venture himself in his presence, and had no hesitation
in coming to the conclusion that he must now,
for the first time in his life, spend the night away
from home. Still he instinctively wandered on
through the streets that led him towards home, for
the thought that his mother had probably been without
food the whole day, pressed heavily upon his
mind, and he was anxious to contrive some way to
afford her relief. As he approached the neighborhood
of his home, or rather the place where his
parents resided, for it was no longer a home to him,
he stopped at a grocer's, and purchased a sixpenny
loaf of bread, sixpence worth of gingerbread, and
half a dozen herrings, for which he paid another

-- 303 --

[figure description] Page 303.[end figure description]

sixpence. With these he turned into the street, and
walked thoughtfully and carefully towards the house,
hesitating, and looking frequently around him, lest
his father might be out, and suddenly seize him. At
last he reached the house. He stopped cautiously on
the sidewalk, and looked, and listened. There was a
dim light in the basement, but he heard no sound.
He stepped lightly down the steps as far as the first
window, and through the sash, which had lost a pane
of glass, he dropped his bundle of provisions, and
then ran with all his speed down the street. When
he reached the first corner he stopped and looked
back, and by the light of the street lamps, he saw
his father and mother come out, and stand on the
sidewalk two or three minutes, looking earnestly
around them in every direction. They then went
quietly back to their room, and Billy cautiously
returned again to the house. He placed himself as
near the window as he could, without being discovered
from within, and listened to what was going on.
His mother took the little bundle to the table, and
opened it. Her eyes filled with tears the moment
she saw what it contained, for her first thought rested
upon Billy. She could not divine by what means
she had received such a timely gift, but somehow or

-- 304 --

[figure description] Page 304.[end figure description]

other, she could not help thinking that Billy was in
some way connected with it.

“Come, Bill,” said Sally to her husband, “we've
got a good supper at last; now set down and eat some.”

Bill drew up to the table, and ate as one who had
been fasting for twenty-four hours. After his appetite
began to be satisfied, said he, “Now, Sall, where do
you think all this come from?”

“Well, I'm sure I can't tell anything about it,” said
Sally; “but I should n't be afraid to lay my life on
it, that Billy knows something about it.”

“So does your granny know something about it, as
much as Billy,” said Snub, contemptuously. “All
Billy cares about is to spend that sixpence, and eat it
up; and now he dares n't come home. I wish I had
hold of the little rascal, I'd shake his daylights out;
I'd lick him till he could n't stand.”

“Oh, you're too cruel to that boy,” said Sally;
“Billy's a good child, and would do anything for me,
and for you too, for all you whip him so much. And
I believe it's his means that got somebody to give us
this good supper to night. I hope the dear child will
come home pretty soon, for I feel worried 'most to
death about him.”

“I hope he'll come, too,” said Snub, “and I've a

-- 305 --

[figure description] Page 305.[end figure description]

good mind to go and take a look after him, for I want
to lick him most awfully.”

At this, Billy began to feel as though it would be
hazardous for him to remain any longer, so he hastened
away down the street to seek a resting-place for the
night. This he found at last, in the loft of a livery
stable, where he crept away unobserved, and slept
quietly till morning. True, he had one or two golden
dreams, excited by his remarkable fortune the previous
day, and when he woke his first impulse was to
put his hand in his pocket, and ascertain whether he
was really in possession of the fortune he had been
dreaming of, or whether he was the same poor Billy
Snub that he was two days before. The three hard
silver quarters which he felt in his pocket roused him
to the reality of his situation, and he sprang from his
hard couch, soon after daylight, resolved to renew the
labors he had so successfully followed the day before.
He had now a good capital to start with, and could
work to a better advantage than the previous day.
He accordingly soon supplied himself with an armful
of papers, and placed himself on the best routes, and
at the best hours. The result was, that though it was
not properly a news-day, there being no subject of
special interest to give a demand for papers, yet, by

-- 306 --

[figure description] Page 306.[end figure description]

his diligence and perseverance, he managed to clear,
in the course of the day almost another dollar, leaving
in his pocket, when night came on, nearly a dollar
and three quarters.

Having completed his work for the day, his
thoughts instinctively turned to the home of his
parents. He felt an intense desire to go and share
with them the joys of his good fortune; but he dared
not meet his father, for he knew well that a severe
punishment would be inflicted upon him, and that his
money would be taken from him to purchase rum.
He could not, however, go to rest for the night without
getting a sight of his mother, if it were possible,
and purchasing something for her comfort. He
accordingly went and purchased some articles of provision,
to the amount of a quarter of a dollar, rolled
them in a paper, and made his way homeward. The
evening was rather dark, and gave him a favorable
opportunity to approach the house without being discovered.
He saw his mother, through the window,
sitting on a bench on the opposite side of the room,
with her head reclining on her hand, and apparently
weeping. He could also hear his father walking in
another part of the room, though he could not see
him. He crept carefully to the window, dropped his

-- 307 --

[figure description] Page 307.[end figure description]

paper of provisions into the room, and turned away
down the street as fast as he could run.

He went again to his solitary lodgings, and rested
till morning, when he arose with fresh vigor, and
resumed the labors of the day. The same exertions
and perseverance produced the same successful results
he had met with the two previous days; and the evenings
saw the table of his parents again spread with a
comfortable meal, which was improved this time by
the addition of a little fruit.

Thus, day after day, and week after week, Billy
successfully followed his new profession of newsboy,
working hard and faring hard, in season and out of
season, early and late, rain or shine. His lodging
was sometimes in a stable, sometimes among the open
market stalls, and sometimes under a portico of some
public building. His food was of the coarsest and
cheapest kind, bread and cheese, and potatoes and
fish; and sometimes, when he had done a good day's
work, he would treat himself to an apple or two, or
some other fruit that happened to be in season.

But Billy never forgot his parents. Regularly
every night he contrived to supply them with a quantity
of food sufficient for the following day; sometimes
carrying it himself, and dropping it in the

-- 308 --

[figure description] Page 308.[end figure description]

window, and sometimes, when the evening was light,
and he was afraid of being discovered, employing
another boy to carry it for him, while he stood at the
corner, and watched to see that his errand was faithfully
executed. At the end of three months, Billy
found himself in possession of thirty dollars in cash,
notwithstanding he had in the meantime purchased
himself a pretty good second-hand cap, a little too
small to be sure, but nevertheless he managed to keep
it on the top of his head; also a second-hand frock
coat, which was somewhat too large, but whose capacious
pockets he found exceedingly convenient for carrying
his surplus gingerbread and apples. He had
also, in the meantime, sent his mother calico sufficient
to make her a gown, besides sundry other little articles
of wearing apparel. He had been careful all this
time not to come in contact with his father, though he
once came very near falling into his hands. His
father discovered him at a little distance in the street,
and ran to seize him, but Billy saw him in time to flee
round a corner, and through an alley way that led to
another street, and so escaped.

Bill Snub at last came to the conclusion that his
son Billy was doing a pretty fair business in something
or other, for he had become satisfied that the

-- 309 --

[figure description] Page 309.[end figure description]

food which he and his wife daily received was
furnished by Billy, as well as occasional articles of his
wife's clothing. And when he ascertained from some
of the boys of Billy's acquaintance, that he had probably
laid up some thirty or forty dollars in cash,
Bill at once conceived the design of getting possession
of the money. As he could not catch Billy in the
street, he formed a plan to get the aid of police officers;
and, in order to do that, he found it necessary to make
charges against Billy. He accordingly repaired to
the police office, and entered a complaint against his
boy for having stolen thirty or forty dollars of his
money, which he was spending about the streets. He
described the boy to the police officers, who were soon
dispatched in search of him, with orders to arrest him,
and see if any money could be found upon him. As
Billy was flying about in all parts of the city, selling
his papers, it was nearly night before the officers came
across him. He had just sold his last paper, and was
walking leisurely along the street, eating a piece of
gingerbread and an apple, when a policeman came
suddenly behind him and seized him by the shoulder.
Billy looked up with surprise, and asked the man
what he wanted.

“I'll let you know what I want, you little rascal!”

-- 310 --

[figure description] Page 310.[end figure description]

said the officer, harshly. “Where did you get all
that gingerbread and apples, sir?”

“I bought it,” said Billy.

“You bought it, did ye? and where did you get
the money, sir?”

“I earnt it,” said Billy.

“You earnt it did ye? and how did you earn it,
sir?”

“By selling newspapers,” said Billy.

“Tell me none of your lies, sir?” said the man,
giving him an extra shake by the shoulder. “Now,
sir, how much money have you got in your pockets?”

“I've got some,” said Billy, trembling and trying
to pull away from the man.

“Got some, have you?” said the officer, holding
him by a still firmer gripe. “How much have you
got, sir? Let me see it?”

“I shan't show my money to nobody,” said Billy,
“so you let me alone.”

“We'll see about that, sir, when we get to the
police office,” said the man, dragging Billy away by
the shoulder.

It was so late in the day when they arrived at the
office, that the examining magistrates had left, and
gone home. The constable, therefore, with one of his

-- 311 --

[figure description] Page 311.[end figure description]

fellow-officers, proceeded to search Billy, and found
something over thirty dollars of good money in his
pockets. Billy persisted that he had earned the
money by selling papers; but the officers, with much
severity, told him to leave off his lying, for boys that
sold papers did n't have so much money as that.
They knew all about it; he had stolen the money,
and he must be locked up till next morning, when he
would have his trial. So they took Billy's money
from him, and locked him up in a dark gloomy room
for the night. A sad night was this for poor Billy.
At first he was so bewildered and shocked at the
thought of being locked up alone all night, that he
hardly realized where he was, or what was going on.
As they pushed him into his solitary apartment, and
closed the door upon him, and turned the large
grating key, he instinctively clung to the door latch,
and tried to pull it open. He called to them as loud
as he could scream, to open the door and let him out,
and they might have all the money in welcome. He
could get no answer, however, to his calls; and when
he stopped and listened, the silence around him
pressed upon him with such appalling power, that he
almost fell to the floor. He reeled across the room
two or three times, and returned again to the door;

-- 312 --

[figure description] Page 312.[end figure description]

but there was no chance to escape, and the conviction
was forced upon him that he was indeed locked up,
and all alone, without the power of speaking to any
living being. He sank down upon a bench in a
corner of the room, and wept a long time most
bitterly. When his tears had somewhat subsided,
and he roused himself up again so as to look about,
the night had closed in and left him in such deep
darkness that he could not see across the room. He
rose and walked about, feeling his way by the walls,
and continued to walk a great part of the night, for
there was nothing to rest on but the floor or the little
bench, and he could not have slept if he had had the
softest bed in the world. He could not imagine the
cause of his imprisonment, for he was sure he had
injured no one; but what grieved him most, was the
thought that his poor father and mother were probably
without food, as he had been prevented from
carrying anything home that evening. At the
thought of his mother, his tears gushed forth again in
a copious flood.

Towards morning he sank down exhausted upon
the floor, and fell into a short sleep. Still he was
awake again by daylight, and up and walking the
room. The morning seemed long, very long, to him,

-- 313 --

[figure description] Page 313.[end figure description]

for it was ten o'clock before the officers came to take
him before the magistrate. He was glad to see the
door open again, even though it was to carry him to
court, for the idea of being tried for stealing was not
so horrible to him as being locked up there alone in
that dark room.

The money was given to the magistrate, and Billy
was placed at the bar to answer to the charge against
him. The officer stated that he had found the boy in
the street by the description he had of him, and on
searching him, the money was found in his pockets.

“Well, that's a clear case,” said the magistrate;
“precious rogue—large amount for a boy—thirty
dollars—that's worth three months' imprisonment;
the boy must be locked up for three months.”

Billy shuddered, and began to weep.

“It's too late to cry now,” said the magistrate,
“you should have thought of that before; but, after
committing the crime, there's no way to escape the
punishment. What induced you to steal this money?”

“I did n't steal it, sir,” said Billy, very earnestly.

“Ah, that is only making a bad matter worse,”
said the magistrate; “the best way for you is to confess
the whole, and resolve to reform and do better in
future.”

-- 314 --

[figure description] Page 314.[end figure description]

“But I did n't steal it,” said Billy with increasing
energy; “I earnt it, every cent of it!”

“You earnt it!” said the magistrate, peering over
his spectacles at Billy; “and how did you earn it?”

“By selling newspapers,” said Billy.

There was something so frank and open in the
boy's appearance, that the magistrate began to wake
up to the subject a little. He asked the officer if the
money had been identified by the loser. The officer
replied that the particular money had not been identified,
only the amount.

“Well, bring the man forward,” said the magistrate;
“he must identify his money.”

The officer then called up Bill Snub, who was
stowed away in a distant corner of the room, apparently
desirous of keeping out of sight. This was the
first intimation that Billy had that his father was his
accuser, and it gave him such a shock that he sank
down upon the seat, and almost fainted away. The
magistrate asked Snub if that was his money, found
on the boy. Snub said it was.

“Well, what sort of money was it that you lost?”
said the magistrate. “You must describe it.”

“Oh, it was—it was all good money,” said Snub,
coloring.

-- 315 --

[figure description] Page 315.[end figure description]

“But you must be particular,” said the magistrate,
“and describe the money. What kind of money
was it?”

“Well, some of it was paper money, and some of it
was hard money,” said Snub; “it's all good money.”

“But how much of it was hard money?” said the
magistrate.

“Well, considerable of it,” said Bill; “I don't
know exactly how much.”

“What banks were the bills on?” said the magistrate.

“Well, I don't know exactly,” said Bill, “but I
believe it was some of the banks of this city.”

“How large were the bills?” said the magistrate.

“Well, some of 'em was larger, and some smaller,”
said Bill.

“This business does not look very clear,” said the
magistrate. “What is your name, sir?”

“Bill Snub,” was the answer.

“And what is the boy's name?”

“His name is Billy Snub, Sir.”

“Is he any connection of yours?” said the magistrate.

“I'm sorry to own it, sir, but he's my only son,
bad as he is.”

-- 316 --

[figure description] Page 316.[end figure description]

The magistrate, who had been looking over the
top of his spectacles some time, now took them off,
and fixed his eyes sternly on Bill.

“This business must be unravelled, sir. There is
no evidence as yet on either side; but there is something
mysterious about it. It must be unravelled,
sir.”

At this, a little boy of about Billy's age, came forward,
and told the magistrate that he knew something
about the matter.

“Let him be sworn,” said the magistrate; “and
now tell all you know about it.”

“Well, I've seen Billy Snub selling newspapers
'most every day this three or four months; and I've
known him to make as much as a dollar a-day a good
many times. And I've known he's been laying up
his money all the time, only a little, jest enough to
buy his victuals with, and about a quarter of a dollar
a day that he took to buy victuals with for his father
and mother. And I've been a good many times in
the evening, and put the victuals into the window
where his father and mother lived, because Billy
did n't dare to go himself, for fear his father would
catch him, and lick him 'most to death for breaking
the rum-bottle when he sent him to get some rum.

-- 317 --

[figure description] Page 317.[end figure description]

And I know Billy had got up to about thirty dollars,
for I've seen him count it a good many times. And
yesterday his father was asking me what Billy was
about all the time; and said Billy was a lazy feller,
and never would earn anything in the world. And
I told him Billy was n't lazy, for he'd got more than
thirty dollars now, that he'd earnt selling papers.
And then he said, if Billy had got thirty dollars, he'd
have it somehow or other before he was two days
older.”

“You may stop there,” said the magistrate; “the
evidence is full and clear enough.” Then turning to
Bill, he continued, with great severity of manner,
“and, as for you, sir, for this inhuman and wicked
attempt to ruin your own son, you stand committed to
prison, and at hard labor for the term of one year.”
Then he turned to Billy, and said, “Here, my noble
lad, take your money and go home and take care of
your mother. Continue to be industrious and honest,
and never fear but that you will prosper.”

The rest of this history is soon told. Billy was
really rejoiced at the opportunity of visiting his
mother in peace and safety again, and of once more
having a home where he could rest in quietness at
night. Bill Snub had to serve out his year in prison,

-- 318 --

[figure description] Page 318.[end figure description]

but Billy constantly supplied him with all the comforts
and necessaries of life which his situation admitted,
and always visited him as often as once a week.
And when he came out of prison he was an altered
man. He joined the temperance society, and quitted
the rum-bottle forever. He became more industrious,
worked at his trade, and earned enough to support
himself and Sally comfortably.

Billy still pursued his profession with untiring
industry and great success. He some time since
purchased a small house and lot in the outskirts of
the city for a residence for his parents; and at this
present writing he has several hundred dollars in the
savings bank, besides many loose coins profitably
invested in various other ways. He is active,
healthy, honest, and persevering, and destined beyond
doubt to become a man of wealth and honorable distinction,
whose name will shine on the page of history
as the illustrious head of an illustrious line of Snubs.

-- 319 --

p689-336 CHAPTER XIII. THE PUMPKIN FRESHET.

[figure description] Page 319.[end figure description]

Aunt Patty Stow is sixty-seven years old; not quite
as spry as a girl of sixteen, but a great deal tougher—
she has seen tough times in her day. She can do
as good a day's work as any woman within twenty
miles of her, and as for walking, she can beat a regiment.
General Taylor's army on the march moved
about fifteen miles a day, but Aunt Patty, on a pinch,
could walk twenty. She has been spending the summer
with her niece in New York; for Aunt Patty
has nieces, abundance of them, though she has no
children; she never had any. Aunt Patty never was
married, and, for the last thirty years, whenever the
question has been asked her, why she did not get
married, her invariable reply has been, “she would
not have the best man that ever trod shoe-leather.”
Aunt Patty has been spending the summer in New
York, but she does n't live there; not she! she would
as soon live on the top of the Rocky Mountains. If

-- 320 --

[figure description] Page 320.[end figure description]

you ask her where she does live, she always answers,

“On Susquehanna's side, fair Wyoming.”

This, to be sure, is a poetical license, and before you
get the sober prose answer to your question, Aunt
Patty will tell you that she is “a great hand for
poetry,” though the line above is the only one she has
ever been known to quote, even by the oldest inhabitant.
When you get at the truth of the matter, you
find she does live “on Susquehanna's side,” but a
good ways from “fair Wyoming,” that being in Pennsylvania,
while her residence, for fifty-eight years, has
been in the old Indian valley of Oquago, now Windsor,
in Broome county, New York. There, in that
beautiful bend of the Susquehanna, some miles before
it receives the waters of the Chenango, Aunt Patty
has been “a fixture” ever since the white inhabitants
first penetrated that part of the wilderness, and sat
down by the side of the red man. There, when a
child, she wandered over the meadows and by the
brook-side to catch trout, and clambered up the mountains
to gather blueberries, and down into the valleys
for wild lillies.

This valley of Oquago, before the revolutionary

-- 321 --

[figure description] Page 321.[end figure description]

war, was the favorite residence of an Indian tribe,
and a sort of half-way ground, a resting-place for the
“six nations” at the north, and the tribes of Wyoming
at the south, in visiting each other. It was to the
Indians in Oquago valley, that the celebrated Dr
Edwards, while a minister in Stockbridge, Mass., sent
the Rev. Mr. Hawley as a missionary; and also sent
with him his little son, nine years old, to learn the
Indian language, with a view of preparing him for an
Indian missionary. And when the French war broke
out, a faithful and friendly Indian took charge of the
lad, and conveyed him home to his father, carrying
him a good part of the way on his back. But all this
happened before Aunt Patty's time, and before any
white family, except the missionary's, resided within
a long distance of Oquago.

About the year of 1788, some families came in from
Connecticut, and settled in the valley, and Aunt
Patty's father and mother were among the first. Thus
brought up to experience the hardships and privations
of a pioneer life in the wilderness, no wonder Aunt
Patty should be much struck on viewing for the first
time the profusion and luxury and mode of life in a
city. The servant girl was sent out for some bread,
and in five minutes she returned with a basket of

-- 322 --

[figure description] Page 322.[end figure description]

wheat loaves, fresh biscuit and French rolls. Aunt
Patty rolled up her eyes and lifted up both
hands.

“Dear me!” says she, “do you call that bread?
And where, for massy sake, did it come from so quick
now? Does bread rain down from heaven here in
New York, jest as the manna in the Bible did to the
children of Israel?”

“Oh, no, Aunt Patty, there's a baker only a few
steps off, just round the next corner, who bakes more
than a hundred bushels a day; so that we can always
have hot bread and hot cakes there, half a dozen
times a day if we want it.”

“A hundred bushels a day!” screamed Aunt Patty,
at the top of her voice; “the massy preserve us!
Well, if you had only been at Oquago at the time of
the great punkin freshet, you would think a good deal
of having bread so handy, I can tell you.”

Aunt Patty's niece took her with her to the Washington
Market of a Saturday evening, and showed
her the profusion of fruits and vegetables and meats,
that covered an area of two or three acres.

“The Lord be praised!” said Aunt Patty, “why,
here is victuals enough to feed a whole nation. Who
would have thought that I should a-lived through the

-- 323 --

[figure description] Page 323.[end figure description]

punkin freshet to come to see such a sight as this
before I die?”

At the tea table, Mrs. Jones, for that was the name
of Aunt Patty's niece, had many apologies to make
about the food; the bread was too hard and the butter
was too salt, and the fruit was too stale, and something
else was too something or other. At the
expression of each apology, Aunt Patty looked up
with wonderment; she knew not how to understand
Mrs. Jones; for, to her view, a most grand and rich
and dainty feast was spread before her. But when
Mrs. Jones summed up the whole by declaring to
Aunt Patty she was afraid she would not be able to
make out a supper of their poor fare, Aunt Patty laid
down her knife, and sat back in her chair, and looked
up at Mrs. Jones with perfect astonishment.

“Why, Sally Jones!” said she, “are you making
fun of me all this time, or what is it you mean!”

“No, indeed, Aunt Patty, I only meant just what
I said; we have rather a poor table to night, and I
was afraid you would hardly make a comfortable tea.”

Aunt Patty looked at Mrs. Jones about a minute
without saying a word. At last she said, with most
decided emphasis, “Well, Sally Jones, I can't tell how
it is some folks get such strange notions in their heads;

-- 324 --

[figure description] Page 324.[end figure description]

but I can tell you, if you had seed what I seed, and
gone through what I have gone through, in the punkin
freshet, when I was a child, and afterwards come
to set down to sich a table as this, you'd think you
was in heaven.”

Here Mr. Jones burst out into a broad laugh.
“Well done, Aunt Patty!” said he, shoving back his
cup and shaking his sides; “the history of that
pumpkin freshet we must have; you have excited
my curiosity about it to the highest pitch. Let us
have the whole story now, by way of seasoning for
our poor supper. What was the pumpkin freshet?
and when was it, and where was it, and what did you
have to do with it? Let us have the whole story from
first to last, will you?”

“Well, Mr. Jones, you ask me a great question,”
said Aunt Patty, “but if I can't answer it, I don't
know who can—for I seed the punkin freshet with my
own eyes, and lived on the punkins that we pulled
out of the river for two months afterwards. Let me
see—it was in the year 1794; that makes it sixty
years ago. Bless me, how the time slips away. I
was only about seven years old then. It was a woodsy
place, Oquago Valley was. There was only six
families in our neighborhood then, though there was

-- 325 --

[figure description] Page 325.[end figure description]

some more settled away further up the river. Major
Stow, my uncle, was the head man of the neighborhood.
He had the best farm, and was the smartest
hand to work, and was the stoutest and toughest man
there was in them parts. Major Buck was the minister.
They always called him Major Buck, because
he'd been a major in the revolutionary war, and when
the war was over he took to preaching, and come and
lived in Oquago. He was a nice man; everybody
sot store by Major Buck.”

“Oh, well, I don't care about Major Buck, nor
Major Stow,” said Mr. Jones, “I want to hear about
the pumpkin freshet. What was it that made the
pumpkin freshet?”

“Why, the rain, I suppose,” said Aunt Patty,
looking up very quietly.

“The rain?” said Mr. Jones; “did it rain pumpkins
in your younger days, in the Oquago Valley!”

“I guess you'd a-thought so,” said Aunt Patty “if
you had seen the punkins come floating down the
river, and rolling along the shore, and over the
meadows. It had been a great year for punkins that
year. All the corn-fields and potato-fields up and
down the river was spotted all over with 'em, as yallow
as goold. The corn was jest beginning to turn hard,

-- 326 --

[figure description] Page 326.[end figure description]

and the potatoes was ripe enough to pull. And then,
one day, it begun to rain, kind of easy at first; we
thought it was only going to be a shower; but it
did n't hold up all day, and in the night it kept raining
harder and harder, and in the morning it come
down with a power. Well, it rained steady all that
day. Nobody went out into the fields to work, but
all staid in the house and looked out to see if it
would n't hold up. When it come night, it was dark
as Egypt, and the rain still poured down. Father
took down the Bible and read the account about the
flood, and then we went to bed. In the morning, a
little after daylight, Uncle Major Stow come to the
window and hollowed to us, and says he, turn out all
hands, or ye'll all be in the river in a heap.

“I guess we was out of bed about the quickest.
There was father, and mother, and John, and Jacob,
and Hannah, and Suzy, and Mike, and me, and Sally,
and Jim, and Rachel, all running to the door as hard
as we could pull. We didn't stand much about
clothes. When father unbarred the door and opened
it—`oh,' says Uncle Major, says he, `you may go
back and dress yourselves, you'll have time enough
for that; but there's no knowing how long you'll be
safe, for the Susquehanna has got her head up, and is

-- 327 --

[figure description] Page 327.[end figure description]

running like a race-horse. Your hen-house has gone
now. At that Hannah fetched a scream that you
might a heard her half a mile, for half the chickens
was her'n. As soon as we got our clothes on, we all
run out, and there we see a sight. It still rained a
little, but not very hard. The river, that used to be
away down in the holler, ten rods from the house,
had now filled the holler full, and was up within two
rods of our door. The chicken-house was gone, and
all the hens and chickens with it, and we never seed
nor heard nothin' of it afterwards.

“While we stood there talking and mourning about
the loss of the chickens, father he looked off upon
the river, for it begun to be so light that we could see
across it now, and father spoke, and says he, `what
upon airth is all them yallow spots floating along
down the river?'

“At that we all turned round and looked, and
Uncle Major, says he, `by King George, them's
punkins! If the Susquehanna has n't been robbing
the punkin fields in the upper neighborhood, there's
no snakes in Oquago.'

“And sure enough, they was punkins; and they
kept coming along thicker and thicker, spreading
away across the river, and up and down as far as we

-- 328 --

[figure description] Page 328.[end figure description]

could see. And bime-by Mr. Williams, from the
upper neighborhood, come riding down a horseback
as hard as he could ride, to tell us to look out, for the
river was coming down like a roaring lion, seeking
whom he may devour. He said it had run over the
meadows and the low grounds, and swept off the
corn-fields, and washed out the potatoes, and was
carrying off acres and acres of punkins on its back.
The whole river, he said, was turned into a great
punkin-field. He advised father to move out what he
could out of the house, for he thought the water
would come into it, if it did n't carry the house away.
So we all went to work as tight as we could spring,
and Uncle Major he put to and helped us, and we
carried out what things we could, and carried them
back a little ways, where the ground was so high we
thought the river could n't reach 'em. And then we
went home with Uncle Major Stow, and got some
breakfast. Uncle Major's house was on higher
ground, and we felt safe there.

“After breakfast, father went down to the house
again, to see how it looked, and presently he come
running back, and said the water was up to the doorsill.
Then they began to think the house would go,
and we all went down as quick as we could, to watch

-- 329 --

[figure description] Page 329.[end figure description]

it. When we got there, the water was running into
the door, and was all the time rising. `That house is
a gone goose,' says Uncle Major, says he, `it's got to
take a journey down the river to look after the hens
and chickens.'

“At that, mother begun to cry, and took on about
it as though her heart would break. But father, says
he, `la, Patty,' mother's name was Patty, and I
was named after her; father, says he, `la, Patty, it's
no use crying for spilt milk, so you may as well wipe
up your tears. The house aint gone yet, and if it
should go, there's logs enough all handy here, and we
can build another as good as that in a week.'

“`Yes,' says Uncle Major, says he, `if the house
goes down stream, we'll all turn to and knock another
one together in short order.' So mother begun
to be pacified. Father went and got a couple of bed-cords
and hitched on to one corner of the house, and
tied it to a stump; for, he said, if the water come up
only jest high enough to start the house, maybe the
cords would keep it from going. The water kept
a-rising, and in a little more than an hour after we got
back from uncle's, it was two foot deep on the floor.

“`One foot more,' says Uncle Major, says he, `will
take the house off its legs.'

-- 330 --

[figure description] Page 330.[end figure description]

“But, as good luck would have it, one foot more
did n't come. We watched and watched an hour
longer, and the water kept rising a little, but not so
fast as it did, and at last we could n't see as it ris any
more. And, as it had done raining, after we found
it did n't rise any for an hour, Uncle Major he pronounced
his opinion that the house would stand it.
Then did n't we feel glad enough? Before noon the
water begun to settle away a little, and before night
it was clear of the house. But Uncle Major said it
was so wet, it would never do for us to stay in it that
night, without we wanted to ketch our death a-cold.
So we all went up to his house, and made a great camp
bed on the floor, and there we all staid till morning.
That day we got our things back into the house again,
and the river kept going down a little all day.

“But oh, such a melancholy sight as it was to see
the fields, you don't know. All the low grounds had
been washed over by the river, and everything that
was growing had been washed away and carried
down stream, or else covered up with sand and mud.
Then in a few weeks after that, come on the starving
time. Most all the crops was cut off by the freshet;
and there we was in the wilderness, as it were, forty
miles from any place where we could get any help,

-- 331 --

[figure description] Page 331.[end figure description]

and no road only a blind footpath through the woods.
Well, provisions began to grow short. We had a
good many punkins that the boys pulled out of the
river as they floated along the bank. And it was
boiled punkins in the morning, and boiled punkins at
noon, and boiled punkins at night. But that was n't
very solid food, and we hankered for something else.
We had some meat, though not very plenty, and we
got some roots and berries in the woods. But as for
bread, we did n't see any from one week's end to
another.

“There was but very little corn or grain in the
neighborhood, and what little there was could n't be
ground, for the hand-mill had been carried away by
the freshet. At last, when we had toughed it out five
or six weeks, one day Uncle Major Stow, says he,
`well, I aint agoing to stand this starving operation
any longer. I am going to have some bread and
flour cake, let it cost what 'twill.'

“We all stared and wondered what he meant.

“`I tell ye,' says he, `I'm a-going to have some
bread and flour cake before the week's out, or else
there's no snakes in Oquago.'

“`Well, I should like to know how you are a-going
to get it,' says father, says he.

-- 332 --

[figure description] Page 332.[end figure description]

“`I'm a-going to mill,' says Uncle Major, says he.
`I've got a half bushel of wheat thrashed out, and if
any of the neighbors will put in enough to make up
another half bushel, I'll shoulder it and carry it down
to Wattle's ferry to mill, and we'll have one feast
before we starve to death. It's only about forty
miles, and I can go and get back again in three or four
days.'

“They tried to persuade him off the notion of it,
'twould be such a long tiresome journey; but he said
it was no use; his half bushel of wheat had got to go,
and he could as well carry a bushel as a half bushel,
for it would only jest make a clever weight to
balance him. So Major Buck and three other neighbors,
who had a little wheat, put in half a peck apiece,
and that made up the bushel. And the next morning
at daylight, Uncle Major shouldered the bushel of
wheat, and started for Wattle's ferry, forty miles, to
mill.

“Every night and morning while he was gone,
Major Buck used to mention him in his prayers, and
pray for his safe return. The fourth day, about noon,
we see Uncle Major coming out of the woods with a
bag on his shoulder; and then, if there was n't a
jumping and running all over the neighborhood, I

-- 333 --

[figure description] Page 333.[end figure description]

won't guess again. They all sot out and run for
Uncle Major's house, as tight as they could leg it,
and the whole neighborhood got there about as soon
as he did. In come Uncle Major, all of a puff,
and rolled the bag off his shoulder on to the
bench.

“`There, Molly,' says he; that was his wife, his
wife's name was Molly; `there, Molly, is as good a
bushel of flour meal as you ever put your hands into.
Now go to work and try your skill at a short cake.
If we don't have a regular feast this afternoon, there's
no snakes in Oquago. Bake two milk-pans full, so as
to have enough for the whole neighborhood.'

“`A short cake, Mr. Stow,' says Aunt Molly, says
she, `why what are you a thinking about? Don't
you know we have n't got a bit of shortnin' in the
house; not a mite of butter, nor hog's fat, nor nothin'?
How can we make a short cake?'

“`Well, maybe some of the neighbors has got
some,' says Uncle Major, says he.

“`No,' says Aunt Molly, `I don't believe there's a
bit in the neighborhood.'

“Then they asked Major Buck, and father, and all
round, and there wasn't one that had a bit of butter
or hog's fat.

-- 334 --

[figure description] Page 334.[end figure description]

“`So your short cake is all dough agin,' says Aunt
Molly, says she.

“`No taint, nother,' says Uncle Major, `I never
got agin a stump yet, but what I got round it some
way or other. There's some of that bear's grease left
yet, and there's no better shortnin' in the world. Do
let us have the short cake as soon as you can make it.
Come, boys, stir round and have a good fire ready to
bake it.'

“Then Aunt Molly stripped up her sleeves, and
went at it, and the boys knocked round and made up
a fire, and there was a brisk business carried on there
for awhile, I can tell you. While Aunt was going on
with the short cakes, Uncle Major was uncommon
lively. He went along and whispered to Major
Buck, and Major Buck looked up at him with a wild
kind of a stare, and says he, `you don't say so!'

“Then Uncle Major whispered to mother, and
mother says she, `why, Brother Stow, I don't believe
you.'

“`You may believe it or not,' says Uncle Major,
says he, `but 'tis true as Major Buck's preachin'.'

“Then Uncle Major walked up and down the
room, whistlin' and snappin' his fingers, and sometimes
strikin' up into Yankee Doodle.

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

" `Here,' says Uncle Major, says he, pulling out a little paper bundle out of his pocket, and holding it up to Aunt Molly's face: here, smell of that says he. PAGE 335. [figure description] Illustration page. Four men and a woman are standing gathered around a table. One man holds a little parcel out and the woman is leaning over to smell it. There is a bowl on the table and a stool is tipped over on its side in front of the table. In the background there is a stone wall with a pot lid on it.[end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- --

[figure description] Blank Page.[end figure description]

-- 335 --

[figure description] Page 335.[end figure description]

“Aunt Molly she dropped her work, and took her
hands out of the dough, and says she, `Mr. Stow, I
wonder what's got into you; it must be something
more than the short cakes I'm sure, that's put such
life into you.'

“`To be sure 'tis,' says Uncle, `for the short cakes
hain't got into me yet.' And then he turned round
and give a wink to mother and Major Buck.

“`Well, there now,' says Aunt Molly, says she, `I
know you've got some kind of a secret that you've
been telling these folks here, and I declare I won't
touch the short cakes again till I know what 'tis.'

“When Aunt Molly put her foot down, there
'twas, and nobody could move her. So Uncle Major
knew he might as well come to it first as last; and
says he, `well, Molly, it's no use keeping a secret
from you; but I've got something will make you
stare worse than the short cakes.'

“`Well, what is it, Mr. Stow?' says Aunt Molly,
`out with it, and let us know the worst of it.'

“`Here,' says Uncle Major, says he, pulling out a
little paper bundle out of his pocket, and holding it
up to Aunt Molly's face; `here, smell of that,' says
he.

“As soon as Aunt Molly smelt of it, she jumped

-- 336 --

[figure description] Page 336.[end figure description]

right up and kissed Uncle Major right before the
whole company, and says she, `it's tea! as true as
I'm alive, it's the real bohea. I have n't smelt any
before for three years, but I knew it in a moment.
'

“`Yes,' says Uncle Major, `it's tea; there's a
quarter of a pound of the real stuff. While my grist
was grinding, I went into the store, and there I found
they had some tea; and, thinks I, we'll have one dish
for all hands, to go with the short cakes, if it takes
the last copper I've got. So I knocked up a bargain
with the man, and bought a quarter of a pound; and
here 'tis. Now, Molly, set your wits to work, and
give us a good dish of tea with the short cakes, and
we'll have a real thanksgiving; we'll make it seem
like old Connecticut times again.'

“`Well, now, Mr. Stow, what shall we do?' says
Aunt Molly, `for there isn't a tea-kettle, nor a tea-pot,
nor no cups and sarcers in the neighborhood.'

“And that was true enough; they had n't had any
tea since they moved from Connecticut, so they
had n't got any tea-dishes.

“`Well, I don't care,' says Uncle Major, says he,
`we'll have the tea, any how. There's the dish-kettle,
you can boil the water in that, and you can

-- 337 --

[figure description] Page 337.[end figure description]

steep the tea in the same, and when it's done I guess
we'll contrive some way or other to drink it.'

“So Aunt Molly dashed round and drove on with
the work, and got the short-cakes made, and the boys
got the fire made, and they got the cakes down to
baking, and about four quarts of water hung on in the
dish-kettle to boil for tea, and when it began to boil,
the whole quarter of a pound of tea was put into it
to steep. Bime-by they had the table set out, and a
long bench on one side, and chairs on the other side,
and there was two milk-pans set on the table filled up
heaping full of short-cakes, and the old folks all sot
down, and fell to eating, and we children stood behind
them with our hands full, eating tu. And oh, them
short-cakes, seems to me, I never shall forget how
good they tasted the longest day I live.

“After they eat a little while, Uncle Major called
for the tea; and what do you think they did for teacups?
Why, they took a two quart wooden bowl,
and turned off tea enough to fill it, and sot it on to
the table. They handed it up to Major Buck first, as
he was the minister, and sot to the head of the table,
and he took a drink, and handed it to Uncle Major
Stow, and he took a drink, and then they passed it all
round the table, from one to t'other, and they all took

-- 338 --

[figure description] Page 338.[end figure description]

a drink; and when that was gone, they turned out
the rest of the tea, and filled the bowl up, and drinked
round again. Then they poured some more water
into the dish-kettle, and steeped the tea over again a
few minutes, and turned out a bowlful, and passed
it round for us children to taste of. But if it want
for the name of tea, we had a good deal rather have
water, for it was such bitter, miserable stuff, it spoilt
the taste of the short-cakes. But the old folks said if
we did n't love it, we need n't drink it; so they took
it and drinkt up the rest of it.

“And there they sot all the afternoon, eating short-cakes,
and drinking tea, and telling stories, and having
a merry thanksgiving of it. And that's the way we
lived at the time of the punkin freshet in the valley
of Oquago.”

Note—The main incidents in this sketch, in relation to the early
settlement of Oquago Valley, the “pumpkin freshet,” Major Stow's
pedestrian journey of forty miles to mill, the bushel of wheat, the
short-cakes and the tea, are all historically true.

-- 339 --

p689-360 CHAPTER XIV. A RACE FOR A SWEETHEART.

[figure description] Page 339.[end figure description]

Hardly any event creates a stronger sensation in a
thinly settled New England village, especially among
the young folks, than the arrival of a fresh and blooming
miss, who comes to make her abode in the neighborhood.
When, therefore, Squire Johnson, the only
lawyer in the place, and a very respectable man of
course, told Farmer Jones one afternoon that his
wife's sister, a smart girl of eighteen, was coming in
a few days to reside in his family, the news flew like
wildfire through Pond Village, and was the principal
topic of conversation for a week. Pond Village is
situated upon the margin of one of those numerous
and beautiful sheets of water that gem the whole surface
of New England, like the bright stars in an evening
sky, and received its appellation to distinguish
it from two or three other villages in the same town,
which could not boast of a similar location. When
Farmer Jones came in to his supper, about sunset that

-- 340 --

[figure description] Page 340.[end figure description]

afternoon, and took his seat at the table, the eyes of
the whole family were upon him, for there was a
peculiar working about his mouth, and a knowing
glance of his eye, that always told them when he had
anything of interest to communicate. But Farmer
Jones' secretiveness was large, and his temperament
not the most active, and he would probably have
rolled the important secret as a sweet morsel under his
tongue for a long time, had not Mrs. Jones, who was
rather of an impatient and prying turn of mind, contrived
to draw it from him.

“Now, Mr. Jones,” said she, as she handed him his
cup of tea, “what is it you are going to say? Do out
with it; for you've been chawing something or other
over in your mind ever since you came into the
house.”

“It's my tobacher, I s'spose,” said Mr. Jones, with
another knowing glance of his eye.

“Now, father, what is the use?” said Susan; “we
all know you've got something or other you want to
say, and why can't you tell us what 'tis.”

“La, who cares what 'tis?” said Mrs. Jones; “if it
was anything worth telling, we shouldn't have to wait
for it, I dare say.”

Hereupon Mrs. Joues assumed an air of the most

-- 341 --

[figure description] Page 341.[end figure description]

perfect indifference, as the surest way of conquering
what she was pleased to call Mr. Jones's obstinacy,
which, by the way, was a very improper term to apply
in the case; for it was purely the working of secretiveness,
without the least particle of obstinacy
attached to it.

There was a pause of two or three minutes in the
conversation, till Mr. Jones passed his cup to be filled
a second time, when, with a couple of preparatory
hems, he began to let out the secret.

“We are to have a new neighbor here in a few
days,” said Mr. Jones, stopping short when he had
uttered thus much, and sipping his tea and filling his
mouth with food.

Mrs. Jones, who was perfect in her tactics, said not
a word, but attended to the affairs of her table, as
though she had not noticed what was said. The farmer's
secretiveness had at last worked itself out, and
he began again.

“Squire Johnson's wife's sister is coming here in a
few days, and is going to live with 'em.”

The news being thus fairly divulged, it left free
scope for conversation.

“Well, I wonder if she is a proud, stuck-up piece,”
said Mrs. Jones.

-- 342 --

[figure description] Page 342.[end figure description]

“I should n't think she would be,” said Susan, “for
there aint a more sociabler woman in the neighborhood
than Miss Johnson. So if she is at all like her
sister, I think we shall like her.”

“I wonder how old she is?” said Stephen, who was
just verging toward the close of his twenty-first year.

“The squire called her eighteen,” said Mr. Jones,
giving a wink to his wife, as much as to say, that's
about the right age for Stephen.

“I wonder if she is handsome,” said Susan, who
was somewhat vain of her own looks, and having
been a sort of reigning belle in Pond Village, for
some time, she felt a little alarm at the idea of a rival.

“I dare be bound she's handsome,” said Mrs. Jones,
“if she's a sister to Miss Johnson, for where'll you find
a handsomer woman than Miss Johnson, go the town
through?”

After supper, Stephen went down to Mr. Robinson's
store, and told the news to young Charles Robinson,
and all the young fellows, who were gathered there for
a game at quoits, and a ring at wrestling. And Susan
went directly over to Mr. Bean's and told Patty, and
Patty went round to the Widow Davis' and told Sally,
and before nine o'clock, the matter was pretty well
understood in about every house in the village.

-- 343 --

[figure description] Page 343.[end figure description]

At the close of the fourth day, a little before sunset,
a chaise was seen to drive up to Squire Johnson's
door. Of course the eyes of the whole village were
turned in that direction. Sally Davis, who was just
coming in from milking, set her pail down on the
grass by the side of the road, as soon as the chaise
came in sight, and watched it till it reached the squire's
door, and the gentleman and lady had got out and
gone into the house. Patty Bean was doing up the
ironing that afternoon, and she had just taken a hot
iron from the fire as the chaise passed the door, and
she ran with it in her hand, and stood on the door-steps
till the whole ceremony of alighting, greeting, and
entering the house was over. Old Mrs. Bean stood
with her head out of the window, her iron-bowed
spectacles resting up on the top of her forehead, her
shriveled hand placed across her eyebrows, to defend
her red eyes from the rays of the setting sun, and her
skinny chin protruding about three inches in advance
of a couple of stubs of teeth, which her open mouth
exposed fairly to view.

“It seems to me, they are dreadful loving,” said old
Mrs. Bean, as she saw Mrs. Johnson descend the steps
and welcome her sister with a kiss.

“La me, if there is n't the squire kissing of her tu,”

-- 344 --

[figure description] Page 344.[end figure description]

said Patty; “well, I declare, I would a-waited till I
got into the house, I'll die if I would n't. It looks so
vulgar to be kissing afore folks, and out of doors tu;
I should think Squire Johnson would be ashamed of
himself.”

“Well, I should n't,” said young John Bean, who
came up at the moment, and who had passed the
chaise just as the young lady alighted from it. “I
should n't be ashamed to kiss sich a pretty gal as that
anyhow; I'd kiss her wherever I could catch her, if
it was in the meetin-house.”

“Why, is she handsome, Jack?” said Patty.

“Yes, she's got the prettiest little puckery mouth
I've seen these six months. Her cheeks are red, and
her eyes shine like new buttons.”

“Well,” replied Patty, “if she'll only take the shine
off Susan Jones when she goes to meetin', Sunday, I
sha'nt care.”

While these observations were going on at old Mr.
Bean's, Charles Robinson, and a group of young fellows
with him, where standing in front of Robinson's
store, a little farther down the road, and watching the
scenes that was passing at Squire Johnson's. They
witnessed the whole with becoming decorum, now and
then making a remark upon the fine horse and the

-- 345 --

[figure description] Page 345.[end figure description]

handsome chaise, till they saw the tall squire bend his
head down, and give the young lady a kiss, when they
all burst out into a loud laugh. In a moment, being
conscious that their laugh must be heard and noticed
at the squire's, they, in order to do away the impression
it must necessarily make, at once turned their
heads the other way, and, Charles Robinson who was
quick at an expedient, knocked off the hat of the lad
who was standing next to him, and then they all
laughed louder than before.

“Here comes Jack Bean,” said Charles, “now we
shall hear something about her, for Jack was coming
by the squire's when she got out of the chaise. How
does she look, Jack?”

“Handsome as a pictur,” said Jack. “I haint seen
a prettier gal since last Thanksgiving Day, when Jane
Ford was here to visit Susan Jones.”

“Black eyes or blue?” said Charles.

“Blue,” said Jack, “but all-fired bright.”

“Tall or short?” said Stephen Jones, who was rather
short himself, and therefore felt a particular
interest on that point.

“Rather short,” said Jack, “but straight and round
as a young colt.”

“Do you know what her name is?” said Charles.

-- 346 --

[figure description] Page 346.[end figure description]

“They called her Lucy when she got out of the
chaise,” said Jack, “and as Miss Johnson's name was
Brown before she was married, I s'pose her name
must be Lucy Brown.”

“Just such a name as I like,” said Charles Robinson;
“Lucy Brown sounds well. Now suppose in
order to get acquainted with her, we all hands take a
sail to-morrow night, about this time, on the pond,
and invite her to go with us.”

“Agreed,” said Stephen Jones. “Agreed,” said
Jack Bean. “Agreed,” said all hands.

The question then arose who should carry the invitation
to her; and the young men being rather bashful
on that score, it was finally settled that Susan
Jones should bear the invitation, and accompany her
to the boat, where they should all be in waiting to receive
her. The next day was a very long day, at
least to most of the young men of Pond village;
and promptly an hour before sunset, most of them
were assembled, with a half a score of their sisters
and female cousins, by a little stone wharf on the
margin of the pond, for the proposed sail. All the
girls in the village of a suitable age were there,
except Patty Bean. She had undergone a good deal
of fidgeting and fussing during the day, to prepare

-- 347 --

[figure description] Page 347.[end figure description]

for the sail, but had been disappointed. Her new
bonnet was not done; and as to wearing her old flapsided
bonnet, she declared she would not, if she never
went. Presently Susan Jones and Miss Lucy Brown
were seen coming down the road.

In a moment, all was quiet, the laugh and joke were
hushed, and each one put on his best looks. When
they arrived, Susan went through the ceremony of
introducing Miss Brown to each of the ladies and
gentlemen present.

“But how in the world are you going to sail?” said
Miss Brown, “for there isn't a breath of wind; and I
don't see any sail-boat, neither.”

“Oh, the less wind we have, the better, when we
sail here,” said Charles Robinson, “and there is our
sail-boat,” pointing to a flat-bottomed scow-boat, some
twenty feet long by ten wide.

“We don't use no sails,” said Jack Bean; “sometimes,
when the wind is fair, we put up a bush to
help pull along a little, and when 'tis n't, we row.”

The party were soon embarked on board the scow,
and a couple of oars were set in motion, and they glided
slowly and pleasantly over as lovely a sheet of
water as ever glowed in the sunsetting ray. In one
hour's time, the whole party felt perfectly acquainted

-- 348 --

[figure description] Page 348.[end figure description]

with Miss Lucy Brown. She had talked in the most
lively and fascinating manner; she had told stories and
sung songs. Among others, she had given Moore's
boat song with the sweetest possible effect; and by
the time they returned to the landing, it would hardly
be too much to say that half the young men in the
party were decidedly in love with her.

A stern regard to truth requires a remark to be
made here, not altogether favorable to Susan Jones,
which is the more to be regretted, as she was in the
main an excellent hearted girl, and highly esteemed
by the whole village. It was observed that as the
company grew more and more pleased with Miss
Lucy Brown, Susan Jones was less and less animated,
till at last she became quite reserved, and apparently
sad. She, however, on landing, treated Miss Brown
with respectful attention, accompanied her home to
Squire Johnson's door, and cordially bade her good
night.

The casual glimpses which the young men of Pond
village had of Miss Brown during the remainder of the
week, as she occasionally stood at the door, or looked
out at the window, or once or twice when she walked
out with Susan Jones, and the fair view they all had
of her at meeting on the Sabbath, served but to

-- 349 --

[figure description] Page 349.[end figure description]

increase their admiration, and to render her more and
more an object of attraction. She was regarded by
all as a prize, and several of them were already planning
what steps it was best to take in order to win
her. The two most prominent candidates, however,
for Miss Brown's favor, were Charles Robinson and
Stephen Jones. Their position and standing among
the young men of the village seemed to put all others
in the back-ground. Charles, whose father was
wealthy, had every advantage which money could
procure. But Stephen, though poor, had decidedly
the advantage of Charles in personal recommendations.
He had more talent, was more sprightly and
intelligent, and more pleasing in his address. From
the evening of the sail on the pond, they had both
watched every movement of Miss Brown with the
most intense interest; and, as nothing can deceive a
lover, each had, with an interest no less intense,
watched every movement of the other. They had
ceased to speak to each other about her, and if her
name was mentioned in their presence, both were
always observed to color.

The second week after her arrival, through the
influence of Squire Johnson, the district school was
offered to Miss Brown on the other side of the pond,

-- 350 --

[figure description] Page 350.[end figure description]

avoid observation, he took a back route across the
field, intending to come into the road by the pond, a
little out of the village. As ill-luck would have it,
Charles Robinson had been out in the same direction,
and was returning with an armful of green boughs
and wild flowers, to ornament the parlor for the evening.
He saw Stephen, and noticed his dress, and the
direction he was going, and he at once smoked the
whole business. His first impulse was to rush upon
him and collar him, and demand that he should
return back. But then he recollected that in the last
scratch he had with Stephen, two or three years
before, he had a little the worst of it, and he instinctively
stood still, while Stephen passed on without
seeing him. It flashed upon his mind at once that
the question must now be reduced to a game of speed.
If he could by any means gain the school-house first,
and engage Miss Lucy to walk home with him, he
should consider himself safe. But if Stephen should
reach the school-house first, he should feel a good deal
of uneasiness for the consequences. Stephen was
walking, very leisurely, and unconscious that he was
in any danger of a competitor on the course, and it
was important that his suspicions should not be
awakened. Charles therefore remained perfectly

-- 351 --

[figure description] Page 351.[end figure description]

of inviting Miss Brown; and then, of course, he
should walk home with her in the evening; and then,
of course, would be a good opportunity to break the
ice, and make known to her his feelings and his wishes.
Stephen Jones, however, was more prompt in his
movements. He had got wind of the proposed tea
party, although himself and sister, for obvious reasons,
had not been invited, and he resolved not to risk the
arrival of Miss Brown and her visit to Mr. Robinson's
before he should see her. She would dismiss her
school at noon, and come the distance of a mile and
a half round the pond home. His mind was at once
made up. He would go round and meet her at the
school-house, and accompany her on her walk. There,
in that winding road, around those delightful waters,
with the tall and shady trees over-head, and the wild
grape-vines twining round their trunks, and climbing
to the branches, while the wild birds were singing
through the woods, and the wild ducks playing in the
coves along the shore, surely there, if anywhere in
the world, could a man bring his mind up to the point
of speaking of love.

Accordingly, a little before noon, Stephen washed
and brushed himself up, and put on his Sunday
clothes, and started on his expedition. In order to

-- 352 --

[figure description] Page 352.[end figure description]

which offer was accepted, and she went immediately
to take charge of it. This announcement at first threw
something of a damper upon the spirits of the young
people of Pond village. But when it was understood
that the school would continue but a few weeks, and
being but a mile and a half distant, Miss Brown would
come home every Saturday afternoon, and spend the
Sabbath, it was not very difficult to be reconciled to
the temporary arrangement. The week wore away
heavily, especially to Charles Robinson and Stephen
Jones. They counted the days impatiently till Saturday,
and on Saturday they counted the long and lagging
hours till noon. They had both made up their
minds that it would be dangerous to wait longer, and
they had both resolved not to let another Sabbath pass
without making direct proposals to Miss Brown.

Stephen Jones was too early a riser for Charles
Robinson, and, in any enterprize where both were
concerned, was pretty sure to take the lead, except
where money could carry the palm, and then, of
course, it was always borne away by Charles. As
Miss Lucy had been absent most of the week, and was
to be at home that afternoon, Charles Robinson had
made an arrangement with his mother and sister to
have a little tea party in the evening, for the purpose

-- 353 --

[figure description] Page 353.[end figure description]

quiet till Stephen had got a little out of hearing, and
then threw down his bushes and flowers, and ran to
the wharf below the store with his utmost speed. He
had one advantage over Stephen. He was ready at a
moment's warning to start on an expedition of this
kind, for Sunday clothes was an every day affair with
him.

There was a light canoe belonging to his father
lying at the wharf, and a couple of stout boys were
there fishing. Charles hailed them, and told them if
they would row him across the pond as quick as they
possibly could, he would give them a quarter of a
dollar a-piece. This, in their view, was a splendid
offer for their services, and they jumped on board
with alacrity and manned the oars. Charles took a
paddle and stood in the stern to steer the boat, and
help propel her ahead. The distance by water was a
little less than by land, and although Stephen had
considerably the start of him, he believed he should
be able to reach the school-house first, especially if
Stephen should not see him and quicken his pace. In
one minute after he arrived at the wharf, the boat
was under full way. The boys laid down to the oars
with right good will, and Charles put out all his
strength upon the paddle. They were shooting over

-- 354 --

[figure description] Page 354.[end figure description]

the water twice as fast as a man could walk, and
Charles already felt sure of the victory. But when
they had gone about half a mile, they came in the
range of a little opening in the trees on the shore,
where the road was exposed to view, and there, at
that critical moment, was Stephen pursuing his easy
walk. Charles's heart was in his mouth. Still it was
possible Stephen might not see them, for he had not
yet looked around. Lest the sound of the oars might
attract his attention, Charles had instantly, on coming
in sight, ordered the boys to stop rowing, and he
grasped his paddle with breathless anxiety, and
waited for Stephen again to disappear. But just as
he was upon the point of passing behind some trees,
where the boat would be out of his sight, Stephen
turned his head and looked round. He stopped
short, turned square round, and stood for the space of
a minute looking steadily at the boat. Then lifting
his hand, and shaking his fist resolutely at Charles, as
much as to say, I understand you, he started into a
quick run.

“Now, boys,” said Charles, “buckle to your oars
for your lives, and if you get to the shore so I can
reach the school-house before Stephen does, I'll give
you a half a dollar a-piece.”

-- 355 --

[figure description] Page 355.[end figure description]

This, of course, added new life to the boys, and
increased speed to the boat. Their little canoe flew
over the water almost like a bird, carrying a white bone
in her mouth, and leaving a long ripple on the glassy
wave behind her. Charles' hands trembled, but still
he did good execution with his paddle. Although Stephen
upon the run was a very different thing from
Stephen at a slow walk, Charles still had strong hopes
of winning the race, and gaining his point. He
several times caught glimpses of Stephen through the
trees, and, as well as he could judge, the boat had
a little the best of it. But when they came out into
the last opening, where for a little way they had a
fair view of each other—Charles thought Stephen ran
faster than ever; and although he was now considerably
nearer the school-house than Stephen was, he
still trembled for the result. They were now within
fifty rods of the shore, and Charles appealed again to
the boys' love of money.

“Now,” said he, “we have not a minute to spare.
If we gain the point, I'll give you a dollar a-piece.”

The boys strained every nerve, and Charles' paddle
made the water fly like the tail of a wounded shark.
When within half a dozen rods of the shore, Charles
urged them again to spring with all their might, and

-- 356 --

[figure description] Page 356.[end figure description]

one of the boys making a desperate plunge upon his
oar, snapped it in two. The first pull of the other
oar headed the boat from land. Charles saw at once
that the delay must be fatal, if he depended on the
boat to carry him ashore. The water was but two
feet deep, and the bottom was sandy. He sprang
from the boat, and rushed toward the shore as fast as
he was able to press through the water. He flew up
the bank, and along the road, till he reached the
school-house. The door was open, but he could see
no one within. Several children were at play round
the door, who, having seen Charles approach with
such haste, stood with mouths and eyes wide open,
staring at him.

“Where's the schoolma'am?” said Charles, hastily,
to one of the largest boys.

“Why,” said the boy, opening his eyes still wider,
“is any of the folks dead?”

“You little rascal, I say, where's the school ma'am?”

“She just went down that road,” said the boy,
“two or three minutes ago.”

“Was she alone?” said Charles.

“She started alone,” said the boy, “and a man
met her out there a little ways, and turned about and
went with her.”

-- 357 --

[figure description] Page 357.[end figure description]

Charles felt that his cake was all dough again, and
that he might as well give it up for a bad job, and go
home. Stephen Jones and Lucy Brown walked very
leisurely home through the woods, and Charles and
the boys went very leisurely in the boat across the
pond. They even stopped by the way, and caught a
mess of fish, since the boys had thrown their lines
into the boat when they started. And when they
reached the wharf, Charles, in order to show that he
had been a fishing, took a large string of the fish in
his hand, and carried them up to the house. Miss
Lucy Brown, on her way home through the woods,
had undoubtedly been informed of the proposed teaparty
for the evening, to which she was to be invited,
and to which Stephen Jones and Susan Jones were
not invited; and when Miss Lucy's invitation came,
she sent word back that she was engaged.

-- 358 --

p689-379 CHAPTER XV. OLD MYERS.

[figure description] Page 358.[end figure description]

In a country like ours, of boundless forests, rapidly
filling up with a growing and widely spreading population,
the pioneers of the wilderness, those hardy
and daring spirits who take their lives in their hands,
and march, in advance of civilization, into the wild
woods, to endure privations among the wild animals,
and run the hazard of wild warfare among the savage
tribes, form a very peculiar and interesting class.
Whether it is a natural hardihood and boldness, and
love of adventure, or a desire for retirement, or a
wish to be free from the restraints of civilized society,
that thus leads this peculiar class of people into the
wilderness, it matters not now to inquire. Probably
all these motives, in a greater or less degree, go to
make up the moving principle.

At the head of this class is the renowned Daniel
Boone, whose name will live as long as his Old Kentucky
shall find a place on the page of history. He

-- 359 --

[figure description] Page 359.[end figure description]

was the great Napoleon among the pioneers of the
wilderness. But there are many others of less note,
whose lives were also filled with remarkable adventures,
and curious and interesting incidents. Indeed,
every State in the Union has had more or less of these
characters, which go to make up the class. One of
these was Old Myers, the Panther; a man of iron
constitution, of great power of bone and muscle, and
an indomitable courage that knew no mixture of fear.

Four times, in four different States, had Myers
pitched his lonely tent in the wilderness, among
savage tribes, and waited for the tide of white population
to overtake him; and four times he had “pulled
up stakes” and marched still deeper into the forest,
where he might enjoy more elbow-room, and exclaim
with Selkirk,



“I am monarch of all I survey—
My right there is none to dispute.”

And now, at the time of which we speak, he had a
fifth time pitched his tent and struck his fire on the
banks of the Illinois river, in the territory which
afterwards grew up to a State of the same name.
Having lived so much in the wilderness, and associated
so much with the aborigines, he had acquired
much of their habits and mode of life, and by his

-- 360 --

[figure description] Page 360.[end figure description]

location on the Illinois river, he soon became rather a
favorite among the Indian tribes around him. His
skill with the rifle and the bow, and his personal
feats of strength and agility, were well calculated to
excite their admiration and applause. He often took
the lead among them in their games of sport. It was
on one of these occasions that he acquired the
additional name of the Panther.

A party of eight or ten Indians, accompanied by
Myers, had been out two or three days on a hunting
excursion, and were returning, laden with the spoils
of the chase, consisting of various kinds of wild fowl,
squirrels, racoons and buffalo-skins. They had used
all their ammunition except a single charge, which
was reserved in the rifle of the chief for any emergency,
or choice game which might present itself on
the way home. A river lay in the way, which could
be crossed only at one point, without subjecting them
to an extra journey of some ten miles round. When
they arrived at this point, they suddenly came upon
a huge panther, which had taken possession of the
pass, and, like a skilful general, confident of his
strong position, seemed determined to hold it. The
party retreated a little, and stood at bay for a while,
and consulted what should be done.

-- 361 --

[figure description] Page 361.[end figure description]

Various methods were attempted to decoy or
frighten the creature from his position, but without
success. He growled defiance whenever they came
in sight, as much as to say, “If you want this strong-hold
come and take it!” The animal appeared to be
very powerful and fierce. The trembling Indians
hardly dared to come in sight of him, and all the
reconnoitering had to be done by Myers. The
majority were in favor of retreating as fast as possible,
and taking the long journey of ten miles round
for home; but Myers resolutely resisted. He urged
the chief, whose rifle was loaded, to march up to the
panther, take good aim and shoot him down; promising
that the rest of the party would back him up
closely with their knives and tomahawks, in case of a
miss-fire. But the chief refused; he knew too well
the nature and power of the animal. The creature,
he contended, was exceedingly hard to kill. Not one
shot in twenty, however well aimed, would dispatch
him; and if one shot failed, it was a sure death to
the shooter, for the infuriated animal would spring
upon him in an instant, and tear him to pieces. For
similar reasons every Indian in the party declined to
hazard a battle with the enemy in any shape.

At last Myers, in a burst of anger and impatience,

-- 362 --

[figure description] Page 362.[end figure description]

called them all a set of cowards, and snatching the
loaded rifle from the hands of the chief, to the amazement
of the whole party, marched deliberately towards
the panther. The Indians kept at a cautious distance,
to watch the result of the fearful battle. Myers
walked steadily up to within about two rods of the
panther, keeping his eyes fixed upon him, while the
eyes of the panther flashed fire, and his heavy growl
betokened at once the power and firmness of the
animal. At about two rods distance, Myers levelled
his rifle, took deliberate aim, and fired. The shot
inflicted a heavy wound, but not a fatal one; and
the furious animal, maddened with the pain, made
but two leaps before he reached his assailant. Myers
met him with the butt end of his rifle, and staggered
him a little with two or three heavy blows, but the
rifle broke, and the animal grappled him, apparently
with his full power. The Indians at once gave Myers
up for dead, and only thought of making a timely
retreat for themselves.

Fearful was the struggle between Myers and the
panther, but the animal had the best of it at first, for
they soon came to the ground, and Myers underneath,
suffering under the joint operation of sharp claws and
teeth, applied by the most powerful muscles. In

-- 363 --

[figure description] Page 363.[end figure description]

falling, however, Myers, whose right hand was at liberty,
had drawn a long knife. As soon as they came to the
ground, his right arm being free, he made a desperate
plunge at the vitals of the animal, and, as his good
luck would have it, reached his heart. The loud
shrieks of the panther showed that it was a death-wound.
He quivered convulsively, shook his victim
with a spasmodic leap and plunge, then loosened his
hold, and fell powerless by his side. Myers, whose
wounds were severe but not mortal, rose to his feet,
bleeding, and much exhausted, but with life and
strength to give a grand whoop, which conveyed the
news of his victory to his trembling Indian friends.

They now came up to him with shouting and joy,
and so full of admiration that they were almost ready
to worship him. They dressed and bound up his
wounds, and were now ready to pursue their journey
home without the least impediment. Before crossing
the river, however, Myers cut off the head of the
panther, which he took home with him, and fastened
it up by the side of his cabin-door, where it remained
for years, a memorial of a deed that excited the admi
ration of the Indians in all that region. From that
time forth they gave Myers that name, and always
called him the Panther.

-- 364 --

[figure description] Page 364.[end figure description]

Time rolled on, and the Panther continued to
occupy his hut in the wilderness, on the banks of the
Illinois river, a general favorite among the savages,
and exercising great influence over them. At last the
tide of white population again overtook him, and he
found himself once more surrounded by white neighbors.
Still, however, he seemed loth to forsake the
noble Illinois, on whose banks he had been so long a
fixture, and he held on, forming a sort of connecting
link between the white settlers and the Indians.

At length hostilities broke out, which resulted in
the memorable Black Hawk War, that spread desolation
through that part of the country. Parties of
Indians committed the most wanton and cruel depredations,
often murdering old friends and companions,
with whom they had held long conversation. The
white settlers, for some distance round, flocked to the
cabin of the Panther for protection. His cabin was
transformed into a sort of garrison, and was filled by
more than a hundred men, women, and children, who
rested almost their only hope of safety on the prowess
of the Panther, and his influence over the savages.

At this time a party of about nine hundred of the
Iroquois tribe were on the banks of the Illinois, about
a mile from the garrison of Myers, and nearly

-- 365 --

[figure description] Page 365.[end figure description]

opposite the present town of La Salle. One day news
was brought to the camp of Myers, that his brother-in-law
and wife, and their three children, had been
cruelly murdered by some of the Indians. The Panther
heard the sad news in silence. The eyes of the
people were upon him, to see what he would do.
Presently they beheld him with a deliberate and
determined air, putting himself in battle array. He
girded on his tomahawk and scalping-knife, and
shouldered his loaded rifle, and, at open mid-day,
silently and alone, bent his steps towards the Indian
encampment. With a fearless and firm tread, he
marched directly into the midst of the assembly,
elevated his rifle at the head of the principal chief
present, and shot him dead on the spot. He then
deliberately severed the head from the trunk, and
holding it up by the hair before the awe-struck multitude,
he exclaimed, “You have murdered my brother-in-law,
his wife and their little ones; and now I have
murdered your chief. I am now even with you.
But now mind, every one of you that is found
here to-morrow morning at sunrise, is a dead Indian!”

All this was accomplished without the least molestation
from the Indians. These people are accustomed

-- 366 --

[figure description] Page 366.[end figure description]

to regard any remarkable deed of daring as the
result of some supernatural agency; and doubtless so
considered the present incident. Believing their
chief had fallen a victim to some unseen power, they
were stupified with terror, and looked on without
even a thought of resistance. Myers bore off the
head in triumph to his cabin, where he was welcomed
by his anxious friends, almost as one returning from
the dead. The next morning not an Indian was to be
found anywhere in the vicinity. Their camps were
deserted, and they left forever their ancient haunts
and their dead, and that part of the State was not
molested by them afterwards.

The last account we have of Old Myers, the Panther,
was in 1838. The old man was eighty years of
age, but his form was still erect, and his steps were
firm; his eyes were not dim, nor his natural force
abated. Up to that time he had remained on the
banks of his favorite Illinois. But now the old
veteran pioneer grew discontented. The State was
rapidly filling up with inhabitants, and the forms and
restraints of civilization pressed upon him. The
wildness and freshness of the country were destroyed.
He looked abroad from his old favorite hills, and he
saw that in every direction the march of civilization

-- 367 --

[figure description] Page 367.[end figure description]

had broken in upon the repose of the old forest, and
his heart again yearned



“For a lodge in some vast wilderness,
Some boundless contiguity of shade,
Where rumor of oppression and deceit,
Of unsuccessful or successful war,
Might never reach him more.”

The old man talked about selling out and once
more “pulling up stakes” to be off.

“What?” said a neighbor, “you are not going to
leave us, Father Myers, and take yourself to the
woods again in your old age?”

“Yes,” said Myers, “I can't stand this eternal
bustle of the world around me. I must be off in the
woods, where it is quiet, and as soon as I can sell out
my improvements, I shall make tracks.”

The venerable “squatter” had no fee in the land
he occupied, but the improvements on it were his
own, and it was not long before a gentleman appeared
who offered a fair equivalent for these, with a right
to purchase the soil. The bargain was completed,
and the money counted out, and the Panther began
to prepare for his departure.

“Where are you going, Father Myers?” said the
neighbor.

-- 368 --

[figure description] Page 368.[end figure description]

“Well, I reckon,” said the old Panther, “I shall go
away off somewhere to the further side of Missouri;
I understand the people haint got there yet, and
there's plenty of woods there.”

He proceeded to array himself for his journey.
He put on the same hunting-shirt which he wore
when he killed the Indian chief. He loaded his rifle
and girded on his tomahawk and scalping-knife; and,
having filled his knapsack with such articles as he
chose to carry with him, he buckled it upon his shoulders,
and giving a farewell glance round the cabin,
he sallied forth and took the western road for Missouri.
When he had reached a little eminence some
rods distant, he was observed to hesitate, and stop,
and look back. Presently he returned slowly to the
cabin.

“Have you forgot anything, Father Myers?” said
the occupant.

“I believe,” said the old man, “I must take the
head of the panther along with me, if you have no
objections.”

“Certainly,” said the gentleman; “any personal
matters you have a perfect right to.”

The old man took down the dried-up remains of
the panther's head from the wall, where it had hung

-- 369 --

[figure description] Page 369.[end figure description]

for many years, and fastened it to his knapsack.
Then taking one last lingering look of the premises,
he turned to the occupant, and asked if he was
willing he should give his “grand yell” before he
started on his journey.

“Certainly, Father Myers,” said the gentleman;
“I wish you to exercise the utmost freedom in all
personal matters before you leave.”

At this the old Panther gave a long, and loud,
shrill whoop, that rang through the welkin, and was
echoed by forest and hills for miles around.

“There,” said the old man, “now my blessing is
on the land and on you. Your ground will always
yield an abundance, and you will always prosper.”

Then Old Myers, the Panther, turned his face to
the westward, and took up his solitary march for the
distant wilderness.

-- 370 --

p689-391 CHAPTER XVI. SETH WOODSUM'S WIFE.

[figure description] Page 370.[end figure description]

As Mr. Seth Woodsum was mowing one morning
in his lower haying field, and his eldest son, Obediah,
a smart boy of thirteen, was opening the mown grass
to the sun, Mr. Woodsum looked up towards his
house, and beheld his little daughter Harriet, ten
years of age, running towards him with her utmost
speed. As she camp up, he perceived she was greatly
agitated; tears were running down her cheeks, and
she had scarcely breath enough to speak.

“O, father,” she faintly articulated, “mother is
dreadful sick; she's on the bed, and says she shall die
before you get there.”

Mr. Woodsum was a man of a sober, sound mind,
and calm nerves; but he had, what sometimes happens
in this cold and loveless world of ours, a tender
attachment for his wife, which made the message of
the little girl fall upon his heart like a dagger. He
dropped his scythe, and ran with great haste to the

-- 371 --

[figure description] Page 371.[end figure description]

house. Obediah, who was at the other end of the
field, seeing this unusual movement of his father,
dropped his fork, and ran with all his might, and the
two entered the house almost at the same time.

Mr. Woodsum hastened to the bedside, and took
his wife's hand. “My dear Sally,” said he, “what is
the matter?”

“What is the matter?” echoed Mrs. Woodsum,
with a plaintive groan. “I should n't think you
would need to ask what is the matter, Mr. Woodsum.
Don't you see I am dying?”

“Why, no, Sally, you don't look as if you was
dying. What is the matter? how do you feel?”

“Oh, I shan't live till night,” said Mrs. Woodsum
with a heavy sigh; “I am going fast.”

Mr. Woodsum, without waiting to make further
inquiries, told Obediah to run and jump on to the
horse, and ride over after Doctor Fairfield, and get
him to come over as quick as he can come. “Tell
him I am afraid your mother is dying. If the doctor's
horse is away off in the pasture, ask him to take our
horse and come right away over, while you go and
catch his.”

Obediah, with tears in his eyes, and his heart in his
mouth, flew as though he had wings added to his feet,

-- 372 --

[figure description] Page 372.[end figure description]

and in three minutes' time was mounted upon Old
Grey, and galloping with full speed towards Doctor
Fairfield's.

“My dear,” said Mr. Woodsum, leaning his head
upon the pillow, “how do you feel? What makes you
think you are dying?” And he tenderly kissed her
forehead as he spoke, and pressed her hand to his
bosom.

“Oh, Samuel,” for she generally called him by his
Christian name, when under the influence of tender
emotions; “Oh, Samuel, I feel dreadfully. I have
pains darting through my head, and most all over
me; and I feel dizzy, and can't hardly see; and my
heart beats as though it would come through my side.
And besides, I feel as though I was dying. I'm sure
I can't live till night; and what will become of my
poor children?” And she sobbed heavily and burst
into a flood of tears.

Mr. Woodsum was affected. He could not bring
himself to believe that his wife was in such immediate
danger of dissolution as she seemed to apprehend.
He thought she had no appearance of a dying person;
but still her earnest and positive declarations, that
she should not live through the day, sent a thrill
through his veins, and a sinking to his heart that no

-- 373 --

[figure description] Page 373.[end figure description]

language has power to describe. Mr. Woodsum was
as ignorant of medicine as a child; he therefore did
not attempt to do anything to relieve his wife, except
to try to soothe her feelings by kind and encouraging
words, till the doctor arrived. The half hour which
elapsed, from the time Obediah left till the doctor
came, seemed to Mr. Woodsum almost an age. He
repeatedly went from the bedside to the door, to look
and see if the doctor was anywhere near, and as
often returned to hear his wife groan, and say she was
sinking fast, and could not stand it many minutes
longer.

At length Doctor Fairfield rode up to the door, on
Mr. Woodsum's Old Grey, and with saddle-bags in
hand, hastened into the house. A brief examination
of the patient convinced him that it was a decided
case of hypochondria, and he soon spoke encouraging
words to her, and told her although she was considerably
unwell, he did not doubt she would be better in
a little while.

“Oh, Doctor, how can you say so?” said Mrs.
Woodsum; “don't you see I am dying? I can't
possibly live till night; I am sinking very fast, Doctor,
and I shall never see the sun rise again. My heart
sometimes almost stops its beating now, and my feet

-- 374 --

[figure description] Page 374.[end figure description]

and hands are growing cold. But I must see my
dear children once more; do let 'em come in and bid
me farewell.” Here she was so overwhelmed with
sobs and tears as to prevent her saying more.

The doctor, perceiving it was in vain to talk or try
to reason with her, assured her that as long as there
was life there was hope, and told her he would give
her some medicine that he did not doubt would help
her. He accordingly administered the drugs usually
approved by the faculty in such cases, and telling her
that he would call and see her again in a day or two,
he left the room. As he went out, Mr. Woodsum
followed him, and desired to know, in private, his real
opinion of the case. The doctor assured him he did
not consider it at all alarming. It was only an
ordinary case of hypochondria, and with proper treatment
the patient would undoubtedly get better.

“It is a case,” continued the doctor, “in which the
mind needs to be administered to as much as the
body. Divert her attention as much as possible by
cheerful objects; let her be surrounded by agreeable
company; give her a light, but generous and
nutritive diet; and as soon as may be, get her to take
gentle exercise in the open air, by riding on horseback,
or running about the fields and gathering fruits

-- 375 --

[figure description] Page 375.[end figure description]

and flowers in company with lively and congenial
companions. Follow these directions, and continue
to administer the medicines I have ordered, and I
think Mrs. Woodsum will soon enjoy good health
again.”

Mr. Woodsum felt much relieved after hearing the
doctor's opinion and prescriptions, and bade the kind
physician good morning with a tolerably cheerful
countenance. Most assiduously did he follow the
doctor's directions, and in a few days he had the happiness
to see his beloved wife again enjoying tolerable
health, and pursuing her domestic duties with cheerfulness.

But alas! his sunshine of hope was destined soon
to be obscured again by the clouds of sorrow and
disappointment. It was not long before some change
in the weather, and changes in her habits of living,
and neglect of proper exercise in the open air, brought
on a return of Mrs. Woodsum's gloom and despondency,
in all their terrific power. Again she was
sighing and weeping on the bed, and again Mr.
Woodsum was hastily summoned from the field, and
leaving his plough in mid-furrow, ran with breathless
anxiety to the house, where the same scenes were
again witnessed which we have already described.

-- 376 --

[figure description] Page 376.[end figure description]

Not only once or twice, but repeatedly week after
week and month after month, these exhibitions were
given, and followed by similar results. Each relapse
seemed to be more severe than the previous one, and
on each occasion Mrs. Woodsum was more positive
than ever that she was on her death-bed, and that
there was no longer any help for her.

On one of these occasions, so strong was her
impression that her dissolution was near, and so
anxious did she appear to make every preparation for
death, and with such solemn earnestness did she attend
to certain details, preparatory to leaving her family for
ever, that Mr. Woodsum almost lost the hope that
usually attended him through these scenes, and felt,
more than ever before, that what he had so often
feared, was indeed about to become a painful and
awful reality. Most tenderly did Mrs. Woodsum
touch upon the subject of her separation from her
husband and children.

“Our poor children—what will become of them
when I am gone? And you, dear Samuel, how can
I bear the thought of leaving you? I could feel
reconciled to dying, if it was not for the thoughts of
leaving you and the children. They will have
nobody to take care of them, as a mother would, poor

-- 377 --

[figure description] Page 377.[end figure description]

things; and then you will be so lonesome—it breaks
my heart to think of it.”

Here, her feelings overpowered her, and she was
unable to proceed any further. Mr. Woodsum was
for some time too much affected to make any reply.
At last, summoning all his fortitude, and as much
calmness as he could, he told her if it was the will
of Providence that she should be separated from
them, he hoped her last hours would not be pained
with anxious solicitude about the future welfare of
the family. It was true, the world would be a dreary
place to him when she was gone; but he should keep
the children with him, and with the blessing of
heaven, he thought he should be able to make them
comfortable and happy.

“Well, there's one thing, dear Samuel,” said Mrs.
Woodsum, “that I feel it my duty to speak to you
about.” And she pressed his hand in hers, and
looked most solemnly and earnestly in his face.
“You know, my dear,” she continued, “how sad and
desolate a family of children always is, when deprived
of a mother. They may have a kind father, and kind
friends, but nobody can supply the place of a mother.
I feel as if it would be your duty—and I could not
die in peace, if I did n't speak of it—I feel, dear

-- 378 --

[figure description] Page 378.[end figure description]

Samuel, as if it would be your duty as soon after I
am gone as would appear decent, to marry some good
and kind woman, and bring her into the family to be
the mother of our poor children, and to make your
home happy. Promise me that you will do this, and
I think it will relieve me of some of the distress I
feel at the thought of dying.”

This remark was, to Mr. Woodsum, most unexpected
and most painful. It threw an anguish into
his heart, such as he had never experienced till that
moment. It forced upon his contemplation a thought
that had never before occurred to him. The idea of
being bereaved of the wife of his bosom, whom he
had loved and cherished for fifteen years with the
ardent attachment of a fond husband, had overwhelmed
him with all the bitterness of woe; but the
thought of transferring that attachment to another
object, brought with it a double desolation. His associations
before had all clothed his love for his wife
with a feeling of immortality. She might be removed
from him to another world, but he had not felt as
though that would dissolve the holy bond that united
them. His love would soon follow her to those eternal
realms of bliss, and rest upon her like a mantle for
ever. But this new and startling idea, of love for

-- 379 --

[figure description] Page 379.[end figure description]

another, came to him, as comes to the wicked the idea
of annihilation of the soul—an idea, compared with
which no degree of misery imaginable is half so
terrible. A cloud of intense darkness seemed for a
moment to overshadow him, his heart sank within
him, and his whole frame trembled with agitation. It
was some minutes before he could find power to speak.
And when he did, it was only to beseech his wife, in
a solemn tone, not to allude to so distressing a subject
again, a subject which he could not think of nor speak
of, without suffering more than a thousand deaths.

The strong mental anguish of Mr. Woodsum
seemed to have the effect to divert his wife's attention
from her own sufferings, and by turning her
emotions into a new channel, gave her system an
opportunity to rally. She gradually grew better, as
she had done in like cases before, and even before
night was able to sit up, and became quite cheerful.

But her malady was only suspended, not cured;
and again and again it returned upon her, and again
and again her friends were summoned to witness her
last sickness, and take their last farewell. And on
these occasions, she had so often slightly and delicately
hinted to Mr. Woodsum the propriety of his
marrying a second wife, that even he could at last

-- 380 --

[figure description] Page 380.[end figure description]

listen to the suggestion with a degree of indifference
which he had once thought he could never feel.

At last, the sober saddening days of autumn came
on. Mr. Woodsum was in the midst of his “fall
work,” which had been several times interrupted by
these periodical turns of despondency in his wife.
One morning he went to his field early, for he had a
heavy day's work to do, and had engaged one of
his neighbors to come with two yoke of oxen and a
plough to help him “break up” an old mowing
field. His neighbor could only help him that day,
and he was very anxious to plough the whole field.
He accordingly had left the children and nurse in the
house, with strict charges to take good care of their
mother. Mr. Woodsum was driving the team and
his neighbor was holding the plough, and things went
on to their mind till about ten o'clock in the forenoon,
when little Harriet came running to the field, and
told her father that her mother was “dreadful sick”
and wanted him to come in as quick as he could, for
she was certainly dying now. Mr. Woodsum, without
saying a word, drove his team to the end of the
furrow; but he looked thoughtful and perplexed.
Although he felt persuaded that her danger was
imaginary, as it had always proved to be before, still,

-- 381 --

[figure description] Page 381.[end figure description]

the idea of the bare possibility that this sickness might
be unto death, pressed upon him with such power,
that he laid down his goad-stick, and telling his
neighbor to let the cattle breathe awhile, walked
deliberately towards the house. Before he had
accomplished the whole distance, however, his own
imagination had added such wings to his speed, that
he found himself moving at a quick run. He entered
the house, and found his wife as he had so often found
her before, in her own estimation, almost ready to
breathe her last. Her voice was faint and low, and
her pillow was wet with tears. She had already taken
her leave of her dear children, and waited only to
exchange a few parting words with her beloved husband.
Mr. Woodsum approached the bedside, and
took her hand tenderly, as he had ever been wont to
do, but he could not perceive any symptoms of
approaching dissolution, different from what he had
witnessed on a dozen former occasions.

“Now, my dear,” said Mrs. Woodsum, faintly,
“the time has come at last. I feel that I am on my
death-bed, and have but a short time longer to stay
with you. But I hope we shall feel resigned to the
will of Heaven. I would go cheerfully, dear, if it
was not for my anxiety about you and the children.

-- 382 --

[figure description] Page 382.[end figure description]

Now, don't you think, my dear,” she continued, with
increasing tenderness, “don't you think it would be
best for you to be married again to some kind good
woman, that would be a mother to our dear little
ones, and make your home pleasant for all of you?”

She paused, and looked earnestly in his face.

“Well, I've sometimes thought, of late, it might be
best,” said Mr. Woodsum, with a very solemn air.

“Then you have been thinking about it,” said Mrs.
Woodsum, with a slight contraction of the muscles
of the face.

“Why, yes,” said Mr. Woodsum, “I have sometimes
thought about it, since you've had spells of
being so very sick. It makes me feel dreadfully to
think of it, but I don't know but it might be my duty.”

“Well, I do think it would,” said Mrs. Woodsum,
“if you can only get the right sort of a person.
Everything depends upon that, my dear, and I hope
you will be very particular about who you get, very.”

“I certainly shall,” said Mr. Woodsum; “don't
give yourself any uneasiness about that, my dear,
for I assure you I shall be very particular. The person
I shall probably have is one of the kindest and
best tempered women in the world.”

“But have you been thinking of any one in

-- 383 --

[figure description] Page 383.[end figure description]

particular, my dear?” said Mrs. Woodsum, with a manifest
look of uneasiness.

“Why, yes,” said Mr. Woodsum, “there is one,
that I have thought for some time past, I should
probably marry, if it should be the will of Providence
to take you from us.”

“And pray, Mr. Woodsum, who can it be?” said
the wife, with an expression, more of earth than
heaven, returning to her eye. “Who is it, Mr. Woodsum?
You have n't named it to her, have you?”

“Oh, by no means,” said Mr. Woodsum; “but
my dear, we had better drop the subject; it agitates
you too much.”

“But, Mr. Woodsum, you must tell me who it is;
I never could die in peace till you do.”

“It is a subject too painful to think about,” said
Mr. Woodsum, “and it don't appear to me it would
be best to call names.”

“But I insist upon it,” said Mrs. Woodsum, who
had by this time raised herself up with great earnestness
and was leaning on her elbow, while her searching
glance was reading every muscle in her husband's
face. “Mr. Woodsum, I insist upon it!”

“Well, then,” said Mr. Woodsum, with a sigh, “if
you insist upon it, my dear—I have thought if it

-- 384 --

[figure description] Page 384.[end figure description]

should be the will of Providence to take you from us,
to be here no more, I have thought I should marry
for my second wife, Hannah Lovejoy.”

An earthly fire once more flashed from Mrs.
Woodsum's eyes—she leaped from the bed like a cat;
walked across the room, and seated herself in a chair.

“What!” she exclaimed, in a trembling voice
almost choked with agitation—“what! marry that
idle, sleepy slut of a Hannah Lovejoy! Mr. Woodsum,
that is too much for flesh and blood to bear—I
can't endure that, nor I won't. Hannah Lovejoy to
be the mother of my children! No, that's what she
never shall. So you may go to your ploughing, Mr.
Woodsum, and set your heart at rest. Susan,” she
continued, “make up more fire under that dinner pot.”

Mr. Woodsum went to the field, and pursued his
work, and when he returned at noon, he found dinner
well prepared, and his wife ready to do the honors of
the table. Mrs. Woodsum's health from that day continued
to improve, and she was never afterward visited
by the terrible affliction of hypochondria.

THE END.
Previous section

Next section


Smith, Seba, 1792-1868 [1854], Way down east, or, Portraitures of Yankee life (J. C. Derby, New York) [word count] [eaf689T].
Powered by PhiloLogic